Sunteți pe pagina 1din 544

Submission Prohibited

NEC Group Internal Use Only

-1-

iPASOLINK 400
SECTION II OPERATION

CONTENTS

DOCUMENT WARRANTY .....................................................................................................- 1 -


1. Getting Started ............................................................................................................. 1-1
1.1 Conventions Used in This Manual .......................................................................................... 1-1
1.2 LCT Communication Interface ................................................................................................ 1-1
1.2.1 Communications .............................................................................................................. 1-1
1.2.2 Local Port Interface ......................................................................................................... 1-2
1.3 Equipment Configuration of iPASOLINK ................................................................................. 1-2
2. Installation of LCT........................................................................................................ 2-1
2.1 Hardware Requirements ......................................................................................................... 2-1
2.2 Software Requirements .......................................................................................................... 2-2
2.3 OS Environment for Windows ................................................................................................. 2-2
2.3.1 Confirm Internet Explorer ................................................................................................ 2-3
2.3.2 Confirming and Setting TCP/IP ....................................................................................... 2-4
2.4 Recommended Browser Settings ........................................................................................... 2-5
2.4.1 Internet Explorer 8 ........................................................................................................... 2-5
2.4.2 Firefox 9 .......................................................................................................................... 2-9
3. System Configuration ................................................................................................. 3-1
3.1 General ................................................................................................................................... 3-1
3.2 System Configuration ............................................................................................................. 3-2
3.3 System Overview .................................................................................................................... 3-5
3.3.1 IDU Block Diagram .......................................................................................................... 3-6
3.3.2 ODU Block Diagram ........................................................................................................ 3-6
3.4 Interfaces ................................................................................................................................ 3-7
3.4.1 Baseband Interface ......................................................................................................... 3-7
3.4.1.1 E1 Interface [MC-A4 Card] ..................................................................................... 3-7
3.4.1.2 E1 Interface [Universal Card] ................................................................................. 3-8
3.4.1.3 LAN Interface 2xGbE (ETH 3,4) (SFP) [MC-A4 Card] ........................................... 3-9
3.4.1.4 LAN Interface 2xETH(RJ-45) [MC-A4 Card] .......................................................... 3-9
3.4.1.5 LAN Interface 4xGbE(2xSFP+2xRJ-45) [Universal slot] ...................................... 3-10
3.4.1.6 STM-1 interface [Universal slot] ........................................................................... 3-10

Operation NWD-115476-06E
September 2013
Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only

-2-

3.4.2 ODU Interface (MODEM Card) ...................................................................................... 3-11


3.4.2.1 MODEM-A Card ODU Interface [Universal Card] ................................................ 3-11
3.4.2.2 MODEM-EA Card ODU Interface [Universal Card] .............................................. 3-11
3.4.3 LCT /NMS Interface ....................................................................................................... 3-12
3.4.3.1 LCT Interface [MC-A4 Card] ................................................................................ 3-12
3.4.3.2 NMS Interface [MC-A4 Card] ............................................................................... 3-12
3.4.4 Functional card .............................................................................................................. 3-13
3.4.4.1 AUX interface [Universal slot] .............................................................................. 3-13
3.4.4.2 MSE (Multi Service Engine) [Universal slot] ......................................................... 3-13
3.4.4.3 PTP (Precision Time Protocol) [Universal slot] .................................................... 3-13
3.4.5 Other Interfaces ............................................................................................................. 3-15
3.4.5.1 ALM/SC/CLK Interface ......................................................................................... 3-15
3.4.5.2 USB Memory Interface ......................................................................................... 3-16
3.4.5.3 Power supply ....................................................................................................... 3-16
3.5 IDU (Indoor Unit) Specification ............................................................................................. 3-17
3.5.1 General.......................................................................................................................... 3-17
3.5.2 IDU Data Interface specification .................................................................................... 3-18
3.5.3 IDU Management Interface specification ....................................................................... 3-19
4. NE Setup ....................................................................................................................... 4-1
4.1 Login, Logout and Exit ............................................................................................................ 4-1
4.1.1 Log In to NE .................................................................................................................... 4-1
4.1.2 Log Out from NE ............................................................................................................. 4-4
4.1.3 Exit WebLCT ................................................................................................................... 4-5
4.2 WebLCT Main Window ........................................................................................................... 4-6
4.3 User Management (Security Management) ............................................................................ 4-9
4.3.1 User Access Levels ....................................................................................................... 4-10
4.3.2 Default User Account..................................................................................................... 4-13
4.3.3 User Account ................................................................................................................. 4-13
4.3.3.1 Login User List ..................................................................................................... 4-14
4.3.3.2 User Authentication Configuration ....................................................................... 4-15
4.3.3.3 User Account Management.................................................................................. 4-20
4.3.3.4 User Group Profile Configuration ......................................................................... 4-31
4.3.4 Security Management.................................................................................................... 4-38
4.3.4.1 Service Status Setting .......................................................................................... 4-46
4.3.4.2 SNMP .................................................................................................................. 4-48
4.3.4.3 SNMP Community ............................................................................................... 4-51
4.3.4.4 SNMP Trap Entry ................................................................................................. 4-57
4.3.4.5 NTP ...................................................................................................................... 4-64
4.3.4.6 NTP Server Address ............................................................................................ 4-67
4.3.4.7 FTP ...................................................................................................................... 4-72
4.3.4.8 SFTP .................................................................................................................... 4-75

NWD-115476-06E Operation
Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only

-3-

4.3.4.9 HTTP ................................................................................................................... 4-77


4.3.4.10 HTTPS ................................................................................................................. 4-79
4.3.4.11 RADIUS Setting ................................................................................................... 4-81
4.4 Register NE Configuration .................................................................................................... 4-87
4.4.1 Easy Setup Wizard ........................................................................................................ 4-87
4.4.1.1 Easy Setup........................................................................................................... 4-87
4.4.1.2 MODEM Setup ..................................................................................................... 4-93
4.4.1.3 AMR / Radio Mapping Setup................................................................................ 4-96
4.4.1.4 Management Setup............................................................................................ 4-100
4.4.1.5 TDM Setup ......................................................................................................... 4-101
4.4.1.6 ETH Setup ......................................................................................................... 4-103
4.4.1.7 PWE Setup ........................................................................................................ 4-108
4.4.2 Equipment Setup ......................................................................................................... 4-112
4.4.2.1 Equipment Configuration.................................................................................... 4-113
4.4.2.2 MODEM Migration ............................................................................................. 4-119
4.4.2.3 Radio Configuration ........................................................................................... 4-122
4.4.2.4 AMR Configuration............................................................................................. 4-127
4.4.2.5 Network Management Configuration .................................................................. 4-132
5. System Operation ........................................................................................................ 5-1
5.1 Provisioning ............................................................................................................................ 5-1
5.1.1 MODEM Function Setting ................................................................................................ 5-2
5.1.1.1 MODEM Port Setting ............................................................................................. 5-2
5.1.1.2 Radio Switch Setting .............................................................................................. 5-5
5.1.1.3 TX Power Setting ................................................................................................... 5-8
5.1.1.4 ALM Mode Setting ............................................................................................... 5-12
5.1.1.5 XPIC .................................................................................................................... 5-14
5.1.1.6 AMR Setting ......................................................................................................... 5-16
5.1.2 ETH Function Setting .................................................................................................... 5-19
5.1.2.1 Bridge Setting ...................................................................................................... 5-22
5.1.2.2 ETH Port Setting .................................................................................................. 5-25
5.1.2.3 VLAN Setting ....................................................................................................... 5-28
5.1.2.4 FDB Setting.......................................................................................................... 5-47
5.1.2.5 ETH OAM Setting ................................................................................................ 5-64
5.1.2.6 RSTP / MSTP Setting .......................................................................................... 5-90
5.1.2.7 Link Aggregation Setup ...................................................................................... 5-105
5.1.2.8 ERP Setting ....................................................................................................... 5-117
5.1.2.9 QoS/Classification Setting.................................................................................. 5-124
5.1.2.10 Filter Setting ....................................................................................................... 5-172
5.1.2.11 L2CP Transparent / Mirroring Setting ................................................................ 5-189
5.1.2.12 Port Isolate Setting............................................................................................. 5-192
5.1.2.13 LLF Setting......................................................................................................... 5-194

Operation NWD-115476-06E
Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only

-4-

5.1.2.14 Broadcast Storm Control Setting ........................................................................ 5-202


5.1.3 Cross Connect Setting................................................................................................. 5-205
5.1.3.1 E1 Port Setting ................................................................................................... 5-205
5.1.3.2 STM-1 Port Setting ............................................................................................ 5-210
5.1.3.3 Cross Connect Setting ....................................................................................... 5-215
5.1.4 PWE Setting ................................................................................................................ 5-229
5.1.4.1 PWE Setting....................................................................................................... 5-229
5.1.5 Equipment Clock / Synchronization Setting ................................................................. 5-243
5.1.5.1 Equipment Clock Setting .................................................................................... 5-244
5.1.5.2 EXT Clock Setting .............................................................................................. 5-250
5.1.5.3 PTP Mode Setting .............................................................................................. 5-254
5.1.5.4 PTP Domain setting ........................................................................................... 5-266
5.1.6 Relay-Alarm Mapping Setting ...................................................................................... 5-268
5.1.6.1 Relay Control Setting ......................................................................................... 5-268
5.1.7 V.11/OW Setting .......................................................................................................... 5-272
5.1.7.1 V.11/SC Setting ................................................................................................. 5-272
5.1.7.2 V.11 Directional Setting ..................................................................................... 5-280
5.1.7.3 OW Setting......................................................................................................... 5-282
5.1.8 Alarm/AIS Setting ........................................................................................................ 5-286
5.1.8.1 Correlation Setting ............................................................................................. 5-287
5.1.8.2 Alarm Severity Setting ....................................................................................... 5-289
5.1.8.3 AIS Setting ......................................................................................................... 5-291
5.1.8.4 BER Threshold Setting ...................................................................................... 5-293
5.1.9 PMON/RMON Setting.................................................................................................. 5-297
5.1.9.1 PMON Threshold Setting ................................................................................... 5-297
5.1.9.2 PMON Other ...................................................................................................... 5-308
5.1.9.3 RMON Threshold Setting ................................................................................... 5-310
5.1.9.4 RMON Other ...................................................................................................... 5-313
5.1.10 AUX Setting ................................................................................................................. 5-317
5.1.10.1 AUX Input Setting .............................................................................................. 5-317
5.1.10.2 AUX Output Setting............................................................................................ 5-320
6. Abbreviations ............................................................................................................... 6-1

NWD-115476-06E Operation
Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only

-1-

DOCUMENT WARRANTY

1. The information contained in this manual is subject to change without prior


notice.
2. The WebLCT’s screen samples used in this manual are the latest at the time
of issuing. However, they may look different on your PC, because their
appearances vary according to the equipment configurations, equipment
operating modes, setting parameters, LCT application program version, etc.,
or may be simply improved.

3. This manual is written on the assumption that the target users have skills
and knowledge of the restrictions and precautions to operate the equivalent
equipment. Refer to the equipment manual for details.

Operation NWD-115476-06E
Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only

- 2 -/END DOCUMENT WARRANTY

This page is intentionally left blank.

NWD-115476-06E Operation
Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only

Getting Started 1-1

1. GETTING STARTED

1.1 Conventions Used in This Manual


Table 1-1 Conventions Used in This Manual
Style What Represents Example
Italic For manual titles or related document names. Refer to iPASOLINK Operation
Manual for details.
Bold Items and buttons on the user interface. Item The Overall window
on the computer display. File and directory
names. Menus and items.
Arrow A menu name and then the item. Select System  Login/Logout

Menu Path:
System  Login/Logout

<Item> A command variable where the user must <password>


make the appropriate entry. This is also
commonly used when asking for a password.
Capitalized key Key name on the keyboard. Press Enter key

1.2 LCT Communication Interface

1.2.1 Communications
iPASOLINK 400 provides WebLCT as the local craft terminal (LCT) that is a
convenient tool to install and maintain the equipment. WebLCT uses the GUI
method on WEB browser. In addition, this tool enables a remote connection as well.

Since using the WEB browser, there is no application to install. However, to operate
iPASOLINK via WebLCT, license keys that are prepared according to the contract
and equipment version should be installed.

Operation NWD-115476-06E
Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only

1-2 Getting Started

1.2.2 Local Port Interface


The LCT Port is located on the front of the equipment.

Figure 1-1 LCT Port Interface

Connect the LAN Port on your PC and LCT Port on the equipment front using a
LAN Cable.

Following shows the specification of the LCT Port:

 10/100BASE-TX, Cable Type: RJ45

1.3 Equipment Configuration of iPASOLINK


Following configurations are available by the single iPASOLINK 400 IDU:

 4-Way Nodal (Non-protected (1+0))

 Protected (1+1) with hot standby / space diversity / twin path with hitless switch

 One IDU 1+0 / 1+1 XPIC, Two IDU 1+0 / 1+1 XPIC

 Back-to-back configuration ((1+0) x 2)

NWD-115476-06E Operation
Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only

Installation of LCT 2-1

2. INSTALLATION OF LCT

2.1 Hardware Requirements


* Windows XP
Item Required Recommend
CPU Pentium M 1.6 GHz –
RAM 512 MB –
HDD 40 GB –
Display Color LCD (1024 x 768) –
LAN Port 10/100BASE-T(X) –
USB Port – –

* Windows Vista
Item Required Recommend
CPU Intel Core2 Duo 1.6 GHz –
RAM 1 GB –
HDD 40 GB –
Display Color LCD (1024 x 768) –
LAN Port 10/100BASE-T(X) –
USB Port – –

* Windows 7
Item Required Recommend
CPU Intel Core2 Duo 1.6 GHz –
RAM 1 GB –
HDD 40 GB –
Display Color LCD (1024 x 768) –
LAN Port 10/100BASE-T(X) –
USB Port – –

Operation NWD-115476-06E
Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only

2-2 Installation of LCT

2.2 Software Requirements


Operating System: Windows XP® (English version)
Windows Vista® (English version)
Windows7® (English version)

Browsing Software: Microsoft® Internet Explorer 8, Internet Explorer 7


Mozilla Firefox™ 9

NOTE: It is not recommended to use the Zoom function of these browsers while
operating the WebLCT, Using this function may affect the appearances of WebLCT
window.

2.3 OS Environment for Windows


Check if the following configurations have been done on your PC. If not, perform the
following procedures to configure your PC.

 Internet explorer is installed.

 TCP/IP Protocol settings are set appropriately.

NWD-115476-06E Operation
Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only

Installation of LCT 2-3

2.3.1 Confirm Internet Explorer


Confirm that the Internet Explorer is installed on your PC for the use of WebLCT.

 Menu Path (Windows):


Program  Internet Explorer.

Figure 2-1 Windows Start Menu Window

Operation NWD-115476-06E
Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only

2-4 Installation of LCT

2.3.2 Confirming and Setting TCP/IP


Setup the IP address to the WebLCT Computer. The IP address of the WebLCT
Computer will be detected automatically by DHCP server of NE side.

1. Log on to the Windows OS as Administrator.

2. Select Start  Settings  Control Panel from the Start menu of the
Windows.

3. The Control Panel window appears. Double-click the Network


Connections icon in the Control Panel window.

4. The Network Connections window appears. Double-click the Local Area


Connection icon, then click Properties button.

5. The Local Area Connection Properties window appears. Select Internet


Protocol (TCP/IP), then click Properties button.

6. The Internet Protocol (TCP/IP) Properties box appears. Confirm that the
following parameters are set:

 The Obtain an IP address automatically radio button is selected.

 The Obtain DNS server address automatically radio button is selected.

Figure 2-2 Internet Protocol (TCP/IP) Properties Box

NWD-115476-06E Operation
Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only

Installation of LCT 2-5

7. Click OK button of the Internet Protocol (TCP/IP) Properties window.

8. The Local Area Connection Properties window reappears. Click OK


button of the Local Area Connection Properties window.

9. The Network Connections window reappears. Close this window.

2.4 Recommended Browser Settings


Following is the recommended settings for the most popular browsers.

2.4.1 Internet Explorer 8


Tabbed browsing option is recommended.

1. Select Tools -> Internet Options -> General from the Tool Bar menu of
the Internet Explorer 8.

2. Click Settings button of Tabs.

Figure 2-3 Internet Options Box

Operation NWD-115476-06E
Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only

2-6 Installation of LCT

3. The Tabbed Browsing Setting Properties box appears. Select Always


open pop-ups in a new tab radio button, then click OK button.

Figure 2-4 Tabbed Browsing Setting Box

NWD-115476-06E Operation
Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only

Installation of LCT 2-7

Security Setting is recommended.

1. Select Tools -> Internet Options -> Security tab from the Tool Bar menu
of the Internet Explorer 8.

2. Click Custom level…button of Security level for this zone.

Figure 2-5 Internet Options Box

Operation NWD-115476-06E
Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only

2-8 Installation of LCT

3. The Security Settings – Internet Zone box appears. Select Downloads


"Automatic prompting for file downloads": Enable radio button, then
click OK button.

Figure 2-6 Security Settings – Internet Zone Box

NWD-115476-06E Operation
Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only

Installation of LCT 2-9

2.4.2 Firefox 9
1. Select Tools  Options from the Tool Bar menu of the Firefox.

2. The Options box appears. Select Always ask me where to save files radio
button, then click OK button.

Figure 2-7 Options Box

Operation NWD-115476-06E
Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only

2-10/END Installation of LCT

This page is intentionally left blank.

NWD-115476-06E Operation
Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only

System Configuration 3-1

3. SYSTEM CONFIGURATION

3.1 General
iPASOLINK 400 is the equipment that is for medium nodal application, such as
three southbound links are cross connected or aggregated into one northbound link or
vice versa, ring node and large capacity D/I repeater applications, etc., providing
versatile routing of flexible combinatorial native TDM and native Ethernet traffics,
as well as link and each transport level independent ring protections. iPASOLINK
400 provides up to 620 Mbps transmission capacity per link and advanced adaptive
modulation scheme operating in 6, 7, 8, 10, 11, 13, 15, 18, 23, 26, 28, 32, 38 or 42
GHz band.

The iPASOLINK 400 consists of antennas, outdoor units (ODU) and 19 inch one-U
indoor unit (IDU) and accedes to very high performance in very compact units and
ultra high reliability gained through NEC’s rigid TQC activities and vast experience
in wired and wireless communication fields.

The traffic interface of iPASOLINK 400 is a basic D/I interface card and four front
access universal card slots which are connected to TDM cross connect interfaces and
packet switch interfaces with interface buses. These card slots are provided for radio
interface (modem) and additional interface to satisfy various D/I or interface and
topology requirements. Versatility of the iPASOLINK 400 is thus obtained. As the
basic D/I interface configuration, iPASOLINK 400 can be configured up to four 1+0,
two 1+1 twin path, hot standby, diversity radio links or, thanks to NEC’s most
advanced cross polarization interference canceling techniques, double the
transmission capacity up to 1240 Mbps utilizing both polarizations within the same
cost and limited licensed radio frequency channel. All this is achieved without any
header suppression or compression of packet data.

Operation NWD-115476-06E
Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only

3-2 System Configuration

3.2 System Configuration


The system consists of the MDP-400MB-1AA Modulator-Demodulator (Indoor Unit
(IDU)) and TRP-( )G-1/1D Transmitter-Receiver (Outdoor Unit (ODU)), Hybrid
Combiner/Divider and the antenna.

Note: The Combiner/Divider is used in (1+1) single antenna


configuration for antenna direct mount type ODUs.

 IDU with Antenna Direct Connection

 IDU HS/ HS with Antenna Direct Connection

 IDU HS/ Hybrid SD with Antenna Direct Connection

 IDU Twin-path FD with Antenna Direct Connection

NWD-115476-06E Operation
Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only

System Configuration 3-3

 IDU HS SD with Antenna Direct Connection

 2+0

 IDU N way

Operation NWD-115476-06E
Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only

3-4 System Configuration

 1+0 XPIC with Antenna Direct Connection

IDU IDU
IF Cable V(H) V(H) IF Cable
ODU f1 ODU
MD MD
DATA f1 DATA
IN/OUT HYB HYB f1‘ HYB HYB IN/OUT
f1‘
IF Cable IF Cable MD
MD ODU ODU
H(V) H(V)
XIF Cable XIF Cable
XIF Cable

 1+1 XPIC with Waveguide/Coaxial Cable Connection


IDU IDU
V(H) V(H)
IF Cable ODU f1 ODU IF Cable
MD f1 MD
HYB XIF Cable
XIF Cable HYB f1‘
f1‘
ODU ODU
DATA MD H(V) H(V) MD DATA
IN/OUT HYB HYB IN/OUT
MD ODU ODU MD

HYB HYB
MD IF Cable IF Cable MD
ODU ODU

 2U 1+1 XPIC with Waveguide/Coaxial Cable Connection

IDU IDU
V(H) V(H)
IF Cable f1 IF Cable
ODU ODU
MD f1 MD
DATA f1‘ DATA
HYB HYB HYB HYB
IN/OUT f1‘ IN/OUT
MD ODU H(V) H(V) ODU MD

XIF Cable XIF Cable

MD ODU ODU MD
DATA DATA
IN/OUT HYB HYB HYB IN/OUT
HYB
MD IF Cable IF Cable MD
ODU ODU

NWD-115476-06E Operation
Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only

System Configuration 3-5

3.3 System Overview


 ODU-IDU separate-mounting type. Connecting one coaxial cable only.

 No protection or protection system is available using common ODU and IDU.

 Flexible configuration for ODU and antenna, direct mount / remote mount / 1+0
(non redundant) / 1+1 hot stand-by / 1+1 space diversity / 1+1 frequency diversity
(twin path), 2+0, N way, 1+0 XPIC, 1+1 XPIC (1/2 x IDU).

 ACCP, ACAP, CCDP and these combined configurations are available.

 19 inches one rack unit size compact IDU,


> 483 mm (W) x 44 mm (H) x 240 mm (D)

Figure 3-1 IDU Outline

 Small and light weight ODU for easy handling and installation.

13-42GHz

Figure 3-2 ODU Type

 Wide temperature range of ODU and IDU

 DC input voltage nominal rating: -48 VDC

Operation NWD-115476-06E
Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only

3-6 System Configuration

3.3.1 IDU Block Diagram

Native TDM Line


Universal
TDM Card Slot
Optional
E1 XC and MODEM-A
Card Slot
16E1-A
Interface MUX / STM1-A
DEMUX GBE-A
AUX-A

Packet
Native

Line
CPU

LAN Packet
Interface Switch PS -48V
PS

Alarm
Optional AUX Optional
Clock

Figure 3-3 IDU Block Diagram

3.3.2 ODU Block Diagram

TX: 350 MHz


RX: 140 MHz

Figure 3-4 ODU Block Diagram

NWD-115476-06E Operation
Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only

System Configuration 3-7

3.4 Interfaces
Universal Card Slots
- ODU interface (Modem)
- GbE (10/100/1000Base-X)
- 16xE1 TDM
- STM-1 (Up to 2xSTM-1)
- Multi Service Engine
- AUX (DI – DO/ EXT ALM)
- PTP-A
Universal Universal Universal Universal
Slot #1 Slot #2 Slot #3 Slot #4

16xE1 ALM/ USB


LCT/NMS NE1/ ETH3,4 DSC/ Memory Power supply Fan unit
ETH1,2 (SFP) Slot (Redundant option)
Clock

MC-A4 Card

Figure 3-5 IDU Interface Layout

3.4.1 Baseband Interface


iPASOLINK 400 has various interfaces specified by the ITU-T standard and IEEE
standard as listed below:

3.4.1.1 E1 Interface [MC-A4 Card]

 Signal rate: 16 x E1 (2.048 Mbps)

 Interface: HDB-3 (ITU-T G.703)

 Impedance: 75 ohms or 120 ohms (selectable)

 Connector: MDR68

Operation NWD-115476-06E
Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only

3-8 System Configuration

Figure 3-6 MDR-68 Pin Assignment

3.4.1.2 E1 Interface [Universal Card]

 Signal rate: 16 x E1 (2.048 Mbps)

 Interface: HDB-3 (ITU-T G.703)

NWD-115476-06E Operation
Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only

System Configuration 3-9

 Impedance: 75 ohms or 120 ohms (selectable)

 Connector: MDR68

The MDR-68 Pin Assignment is the same as MC-A4 Pin Assignment.

3.4.1.3 LAN Interface 2xGbE (ETH 3,4) (SFP) [MC-A4 Card]

 Type: 1000BASE-SX/LX (SFP) / 10/100/1000BASE-T(X) (auto or fixed) (RJ45)

 Number of Ports: 2

 VLAN: Port-based VLAN / Tag-based VLAN / Tunnel VLAN / IEEE 802.1ad


Provider Bridges

 QoS: 802.1p CoS / ToS / Diffserv / MPLS EXP

 QoS control: Deficit WRR or SP+Deficit WRR, 4/8 classes support

 Bandwidth management: Port and class shaper, policing per VLAN or Port

 Protection: STP/RSTP/MSTP (802.1D/w/s) , LACP (IEEE802.1AX),


ERPS(G.8032v2)

3.4.1.4 LAN Interface 2xETH(RJ-45) [MC-A4 Card]

 Type: 10/100BASE-TX (auto or fixed) / RJ-45


1000BASE-T / RJ45 (Optional)

 Number of Ports: 2

 VLAN: Port-based VLAN / Tag-based VLAN / Tunnel VLAN / IEEE 802.1ad


Provider Bridges

 QoS: 802.1p CoS / ToS / Diffserv / MPLS EXP

 QoS control: Deficit WRR or SP+ Deficit WRR, 4/8 classes support

 Bandwidth management: Port and class shaper, policing per VLAN or Port

 Protection: STP/RSTP/MSTP (802.1D/w/s) , LACP (IEEE802.1AX) ,


ERPS(G.8032v2)

NOTE: ETH1 interface can select "ETH" or "NE1." NE1 is the


management interface for the use of IDU-IDU back-to-back
stacking.

Operation NWD-115476-06E
Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only

3-10 System Configuration

3.4.1.5 LAN Interface 4xGbE(2xSFP+2xRJ-45) [Universal slot]

 Type: 1000BASE-SX/LX (SFP) / 10/100/1000BASE-T(X) (auto or fixed) (RJ45)

 Number of Ports: 4

 VLAN: Port-based VLAN / Tag-based VLAN / Tunnel VLAN / IEEE 802.1ad


Provider Bridges

 QoS: 802.1p CoS / ToS / Diffserv / MPLS EXP, 4/8 classes support

 QoS control: Deficit WRR or SP+3class Deficit WRR

 Bandwidth management: Port and class shaper, policing per VLAN or Port

 Protection: STP/RSTP/MSTP (802.1D/w/s) , LACP (IEEE802.1AX) ,


ERPS(G.8032v2)

3.4.1.6 STM-1 interface [Universal slot]

STM-1 interface card has two SFP interfaces. The Second STM-1 interface is
supported only for APS (Automatic Protection Switching) function.

 Single rate: 1 or 2 x 155.52 Mbps

 Interface: S-1.1/L-1.1 (ITU-T G.957) / CMI (ITU-T G.703)

 Connector: LC (SFP) / IEC 169-29 (1.0/2.3)

NWD-115476-06E Operation
Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only

System Configuration 3-11

3.4.2 ODU Interface (MODEM Card)

3.4.2.1 MODEM-A Card ODU Interface [Universal Card]

This interface is a port used to connect ODU with IDU with the coaxial cable. This
interface card can be added into up to 4 universal slots.

 Connector: TNC female

Several types of MODEM-A cards exist. Specific functions are supported only in
specific MODEM-A Card.

Card Type (NWA-055300-***)


Function 001(HW ver.2 later) 102 322
/ 202

Radio Traffic Aggregation Not Supported Supported Supported


(Physical Layer)

Multi Layer Header Not Supported Supported Supported


Compression

40MHz Channel Separation Not Supported Not Supported Supported

3.4.2.2 MODEM-EA Card ODU Interface [Universal Card]

This interface is a port used to connect ODU with IDU with the coaxial cable. This
interface card can be added into up to 4 universal slots.

 Connector: TNC female

In addition to MODEM-A Card, This Card supports 1024QAM and 2048QAM. Also,
Radio Traffic Aggregation (Physical Layer), Multi Layer Header Compression and
40MHz Channel Separation are supported.

Important Notice: Mixed use of MODEM-EA and MODEM-A does NOT


support the following:
 Radio Link Communication
 - 1+1 pair Configuration
 - XPIC pair Configuration
 - Radio Traffic Aggregation (Physical Layer) pair Configuration

To enable these functions, MODEM cards to be installed must be the same type.

Operation NWD-115476-06E
Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only

3-12 System Configuration

Supported Radio Link Combination

MODEM-EA MODEM-EA

! NOT Supported Radio Link Combination

MODEM-A MODEM-EA

3.4.3 LCT /NMS Interface

3.4.3.1 LCT Interface [MC-A4 Card]

The local craft terminal is a useful tool to the installation and maintenance.
iPASOLINK provides users GUI environment through WEB browser. Moreover, this
tool supports remote connection.

 Type: 10/100BASE-TX / RJ-45

 Port number and interface: 1

3.4.3.2 NMS Interface [MC-A4 Card]

This port is used to connect with the NMS server through the network.

 Type: 10/100BASE-TX / RJ-45

 Port number and interface: 1

NOTE: NMS interface supports “NE1,” which us to be used for IDU-IDU


back-to-back stacking.

NWD-115476-06E Operation
Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only

System Configuration 3-13

3.4.4 Functional card

3.4.4.1 AUX interface [Universal slot]

This interface card supports cluster alarms and DI/DO. (data-in/ data-out)

 Cluster alarm: Alarm extension and combining

 DI: Remote input port for external alarms, etc.

 DO: Remote output from EMS controller

 Connector: D-Sub high density 44 ways female

3.4.4.2 MSE (Multi Service Engine) [Universal slot]

This interface card supports TDM PWE3 (Pseudowire Emulation Edge-to-Edge).

 Protocols: SAToP (RFC4553, MEF8)

 Maximum number of mounting: 1

 Number of E1 paths: Up to 64

 Support Payload size: 32 (+ padding), 64, 96, 128, 160, 192, 224, 256 bytes

 Jitter Buffer size: 2, 4, 8 ,16, 32, 64, 128 ms

 Number of ACR (Adaptive Clock Recovery): 16

3.4.4.3 PTP (Precision Time Protocol) [Universal slot]

This interface card supports frequency / phase synchronization.

 Protocols: IEEE1588v2 (IEEE1588-2008)

 Maximum number of mounting: 2

 Number of Masters for BMC (Best Master Clock): 5 at maximum

 Number of Slaves in BC mode: 32 at maximum (up to PTP rate)

Interfaces: v.11 (1PPS / ToD output on differential I/F)


+2.5V at 50ohm Typ. (1PPS output on single-end I/F)
+7.5dBm at 50ohm Typ. (10MHz output on single-end I/F)

- Connector: RJ-45 / SMA

Operation NWD-115476-06E
Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only

3-14 System Configuration

Function Card Type (NWA-055317-***)

001 Other

RJ-45 PIN ASSIGNMENT Type A


Contact to
NMEA-0183 NEC support
ToD message format
(GPZDA)

12345678
FG1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

FG

PIN# ASSIGNMENT
1 1PPS_OUT (+)
2 1PPS_OUT (-)
3 (Reserved)
4 TOD_OUT (-)
5 TOD_OUT (+)
6 (Reserved)
7 (Reserved)
8 (Reserved)
FG GND

Figure 3-7 RJ-45 Pin Assignment (Type A)

NWD-115476-06E Operation
Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only

System Configuration 3-15

3.4.5 Other Interfaces

3.4.5.1 ALM/SC/CLK Interface

This port is used for alarm outside connection, and for digital service channels and
external clock signal.

 Connector: D-Sub high density 44 ways female

Operation NWD-115476-06E
Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only

3-16 System Configuration

3.4.5.2 USB Memory Interface

USB memory is useful to store the equipment setting and configuration data. This
information storage is used for equipment replacement and recovery of setting and
configuration.

 Connector: USB type 1 female

3.4.5.3 Power supply

Additional power supply can be applied for redundant power system.

 Connector: 4 ways 3.81mm pitch (1-178288-4)

 Input Voltage Range: -48 VDC (-40.5 to -57 VDC)

NWD-115476-06E Operation
Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only

System Configuration 3-17

3.5 IDU (Indoor Unit) Specification

3.5.1 General
NO Item IDU

Operation:-5 to +50 deg.C (ETSI EN300019-1-3 class 3.1E), Humidity: 95% (at 50 deg.C, No condensing)
(Workable: -10 to +55 deg.C)
1 Environmental condition
Transportation ETSI EN300019-1-2 class 2.3
Storage ETSI EN300019-1-1 class 1.2

Power consumption Power consumption Dimension (W x H x D mm) Weight

2 Main card
40 W 300x22x220 0.8 kg
3 Fan unit
5W 30x44x220 0.5 kg
4-1 MODEM-A (ODU Interface)
14 W 100x22x220 0.4 kg

4-2 MODEM-EA (ODU Interface)


17 W 100x22x220 0.4 kg

5 16xE1 Inteface
8W 100x22x220 0.4 kg

6 STM-1 Interface
8W 100x22x220 0.4 kg

7 4xGbE(2xSFP+2xRJ-45)
8W 100x22x220 0.4 kg
Option Multi service engine
8
for PWE 10 W 100x22x220 0.4 kg

9 Option External clock board


3W 40x10x220 0.1 kg

10 Option AUX
3W 100x22x220 0.4 kg

11 Power Supply
- 50x22x220 0.4 kg

12 Chassis
- 44x482x240 0.8 kg
Mechanical Dimensions
13 IDU Size 482(W)x44(H)x240(D) mm, 6kg Approx.
14 EMC Conforms to EN301489-4
15 Safety Conforms to EN60950-1

Operation NWD-115476-06E
Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only

3-18 System Configuration

3.5.2 IDU Data Interface specification


NO Item IDU

E1
16 x E1 (G.703) MDR68 connector (option : up to total 80x E1 ports are available with additional card)
2 x 10/100 BASE-TX RJ45 connector 2 x 1000BASE-SX or LX with optional SFP modules ( connector type :
Main Signal LAN LC)
1
Interface (option : up to 10/100BASE-TX/1000BASE-T available)
1 or 2 x STM-1 (S-1.1, L-1.1 or STM-1e) with optional card, (Up to 4 optional cards)
STM-1
Connector type: LC(S-1.1, L-1.1) / DIN 1.0/2.3 (STM-1e)
Interconnecting Connector, Connector type : TNC female
2 Cable impedance and Cable
length (IDU-ODU) Cable length: Nominal 300 m maximum with 8D-FB-E or equivalent performance cable

-48 VDC (-40.5 to -57 VDC) , Conforms to EN300 132-2


3 Power Line Requirement
Option: +/- (20 to 60 VDC)
Function outline
4 Native IP and Native TDM MODEM has both native IP and Native TDM signal proccessing circuit
MODEM-A: QPSK/ 16QAM/ 32QAM/ 64QAM/ 128QAM/ 256QAM/ 512QAM: 7 modulation schemes changeable
5 Adaptive modulation (AMR) MODEM-EA: QPSK/ 16QAM/ 32QAM/ 64QAM/ 128QAM/ 256QAM/ 512QAM/ 1024QAM/ 2048QAM : 9
modulation schemes changeable
6 Radio protection method 1+1 HS/HS, HS/SD, FD (HS: Hot Stand by, SD: Space Diversity, FD: Frequncy Diversity
7 E1 Ring protection E1 SNCP support
Switching Capacity 48Gbps (Non Blocking)

MAC Learning Independent VLAN Learning(VLAN + MAC),


Table Up to 32K (configurable)
802.1Q Port based, Tag based, Tunnel,
802.1ad Port based, Tag based, Selective,
VLAN
Up to 4094 VLAN per equipment,
MEF 9 Certified EPL, EVPL and ELAN services support with L2CP Tunneling function
Jumbo Frame Support (Up to 9600 byte)
MEF/RFC4115 compliant policing
(CIR/EIR/CBS/EBS)
Ingress
QoS Class Classification: VLAN CoS/IPv4 DSCP/IPv6 DSCP/MPLS
EXP/ETH Port, VLAN ID

8 ETH functions 4/8 Classes SP/D-WRR queues


QoS - per-class rate configurable shaping
- per-class configurable maximum burst length
Egress
- shaping for strict priority queue
Hierarchical shaping (Port and Class)
WRED congestion avoidance and Weighted Tail Drop
ETH OAM 802.1ag Service OAM (CC/LB/LT), Y.1731 PM (LM/DM), IEEE802.3ah (Link OAM)
Protection STP/RSTP, G.8032v2 ERPS
Link Aggregation Radio Link Aggregation (Physical, Logical), 802.1AX, 1:1 LACP redundancy

SyncE G.8261, Ethernet Synchronization Message Channel (ESMC)

TDM PWE RFC4553 SAToP (MEF8)


Link Loss Forwarding, Mirroring, Broadcast Storm Control, L2 Filter, Port Isolation,
Other
Header Compression
MODEM-A: QPSK to 512QAM modulation at 7/14/28/40/56 MHz channel spacing
9 XPIC(CCDP) function support
MODEM-EA: QPSK to 2048QAM modulation at 7/14/28/40/56 MHz channel spacing
AMR, 1+1 and XPIC
10 AMR and 1+1, AMR and XPIC combination available
combination
DXC (E1 cross connect )
11 Up to 168 x 168 E1 non blocking
capacity
External clock interface
12 2.048 MHz or 2.048 Mbps external clock input /output, 75 or 120 orms selectable, D-sup 44 ways connctor
(option)

NWD-115476-06E Operation
Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only

System Configuration 3-19

3.5.3 IDU Management Interface specification

NO Item IDU

1 port, 10/100 BASE-TX RJ 45 (inband or outband connection available)


1 NMS interface
SNMPv1/v2c/v3, http/https, ftp/sftp
2 NE1 1 port, 10/100 BASE-TX, RJ 45
3 RS485 1 port, Serial signal port for legacy equipment, with optional AUX card, D-sub 44 ways
4 LCT (Local craft terminal) 1 port, 10/100BASE-TX, RJ45, DHCP server support
House keeping and cluster
5 Input 4 ch, output 6ch available with optional AUX card, D-sub 44 ways
alarm
6 Service channel 1 2 ports, RS-232C: 9.6kbps async, D-sub 44 ways
7 Service channel 2 2 ports, V-11 (co or contra direction selectalbe) 64kbps sync, D-sub 44 ways

8 Engneering order wire 1 port 4 wires voice channel, D-sub 44 ways

9 User Authentication Radius, local

a) Far End Baseband Loop Back

10 Loop Back b) Near End Baseband Loop Back

c) IF Loop Back

11 Modem TX output Control Manual control, Automatic control (ATPC), Mute control

PMON Items;
a) OFS, b) BBE, c) ES, d) SES, e) SEP, f) UAS

Performance Monitoring Metering Items


12
(PMON)/Metering a) Output power level (TX PWR), b) Received signal level (AGC V), c) Bit error rate (BER MON)

ETH monitoring Items;


a) RX Unicast, b) RX Broadcast, c) RX Multicast, d) RX Pause, e) RX CRC error

13 Other DHCP Server. DHCP Relay Agent for data plane

Operation NWD-115476-06E
Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only

3-20/END System Configuration

This page is intentionally left blank.

NWD-115476-06E Operation
Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only

NE Setup 4-1

4. NE SETUP

4.1 Login, Logout and Exit

4.1.1 Log In to NE
Users are registered by means of login names and their passwords. To protect the
network and network management system from unauthorized access or unauthorized
modifications, three levels with different privileges (refer to the table shown in
section 4.3.2 User Account Management) define users. The available functions to
operate depend on the user’s privilege level. Therefore, some of the functions may or
may not be carried out.

The highest or administrator level (Admin) has the full access to the network and
network management system.

Procedure 4-1

1. Power on the computer.

2. Log in to the Windows as Administrator.

3. Select Start -> Programs -> Internet Explorer from start menu. The
Internet Explorer window appears.

4. Enter an IP address of the NE adding /weblct/ in Address field as an example


shown below, and hit the Return key. The WebLCT login window appears.

Example: http://172.17.254.253/weblct/

Figure 4-1 Internet Explorer Window

Operation NWD-115476-06E
Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only

4-2 NE Setup

5. Enter a user name and his/her password into User Name and Password fields,
then click OK button.

Figure 4-2 WebLCT Login Window

Following are the default user name and its password for iPASOLINK 400:
 User Name : Admin
 Password : 12345678

6. When the user name and password are successfully entered, System Status
progress bar appears till the process is completed..

Figure 4-3 System Status Progress Bar

If the progress bar does not disappear, you may click OK button to close it also.

NWD-115476-06E Operation
Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only

NE Setup 4-3

7. The WebLCT main window appears.

Figure 4-4 WebLCT Main Window

Operation NWD-115476-06E
Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only

4-4 NE Setup

4.1.2 Log Out from NE

Procedure 4-2

1. Click Logout button in the upper right of the WebLCT main window. The
Confirmation dialog box appears.

Figure 4-5 WebLCT Main Window

2. Click OK button to log out.

Figure 4-6 Confirmation Dialog Box

NWD-115476-06E Operation
Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only

NE Setup 4-5

3. The WebLCT Login window appears again.

Figure 4-7 WebLCT Login Window

This step ends the procedure.

4.1.3 Exit WebLCT


Following are the methods to exit the WebLCT:

 Select File (F) -> Close (X) from the Internet Explorer menu bar.

 Click X button in the upper right of the Internet Explorer window.

Operation NWD-115476-06E
Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only

4-6 NE Setup

4.2 WebLCT Main Window


This section describes the contents and structure of the WebLCT main window.

Figure 4-8 WebLCT Main Window

(1) Login User Name


This field indicates a user name that is currently logged in.

(2) Refresh Button


Click Refresh button to manually update the current status displayed in the
WebLCT main window. Click to check Auto Mode check box to enable
refreshing the window automatically.

(3) Equipment Status View


This field shows the current equipment status.

NWD-115476-06E Operation
Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only

NE Setup 4-7

(4) Opposite Site Links


This drop-down list shows a list of NEs on the opposite sites. A user can select
an NE from the list to log in to.

(5) Maintenance Button


Click Maintenance button before starting any maintenance operation.

(6) Logout Button


Click Logout button to log out from NE.

(7) Alarm and Status View


Click a tab to select an event to show its logs.

(8) Menu Tree


This part shows the relevant configuration and provisioning menu of the
equipment by tree view.

Available operations via the WebLCT are listed below:

(a) Current Status


Current Status shows the equipment current status or event histories of
each part of an NE (Active Alarm, Event Log, ODU, IDU, AUX).

(b) Easy Setup Wizard


Follow the Easy Setup Wizard to set up the basic configuration of the
equipment. The wizard includes functions of registering/removing ODU and
IDU packages. This wizard also provides easier steps to set up
cross-connection, VLAN service and other necessary configuration for the
new equipment.

(c) Equipment Setup


Select this menu to register or remove ODU and IDU packages and other
relevant configuration.

(d) Provisioning
Select this menu to configure the detailed settings of IDU and ODU.

Operation NWD-115476-06E
Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only

4-8 NE Setup

(e) Maintenance Control


Select this menu to operate Protection Switch, Loopback, H/W_F/W Reset,
etc.

(f) Maintenance Test


Maintenance Test measures the link quality of Ethernet traffic.

(g) PMON/RMON Report


Select this menu to browse reports of Current, History, PMON and RMON.
User can also export the data to external storage (Local PC, USB Memory).
For more details, refer to Maintenance Manual.

(h) Metering
Metering measures the real time TX power, RX level, ODU power supply
and BER.

(i) Equipment Utility


Select this menu to upload and download equipment configuration data,
software, firmware and FPGA data.

(j) User Account/Security Setting


Select this menu to add, remove and modify user accounts for the equipment,
and set up the security levels for user accounts.

(k) Inventory
Inventory retrieves the information regarding the equipment and software
license.

(l) S/W License Setup

Select this menu to import License key and modify License setting.

NWD-115476-06E Operation
Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only

NE Setup 4-9

4.3 User Management (Security Management)


The user management is a function to manage an authorized user to access to a
network system, and to prevent an unauthorized access.

 Access Level

iPASOLINK provides three user access levels with different privilege as shown
in the table below. For details of each access level and its available operations,
refer to Table 4-3 User Access Privilege Levels.
Table 4-1 Access Level

Access Level Description File Operation SNMP Operation

Operator View configuration and equipment status. Upload only Get

Config Beside the functions available by Operator level, Upload/Download Get/Set


manage radio base band and switching function.

Admin Beside the functions available by Config level, Upload/Download Get/Set


manage user accounts and time adjustments.

NOTES: For the terms, such as Upload and Download mentioned in the table
above, refer to the following description.

1. Upload is to copy a file from NE to external storage, such as WebLCT PC.

2. Download is to copy a file from external storage to the equipment internal


storage.

 User Group

User Group configuration allows a user to manage the protocol type and access
level for each group.

A user of the specified user group in iPASOLINK will be assigned with


pre-defined protocol and access level of the group.

Beside the three default user groups, up to six user groups can be added. The
default user groups are shown below.

NOTE: Options of the default user groups cannot be changed.


Table 4-2 User Group Profile

Group Name Classification TELNET SSH FTP HTTP SNMP Access Level

OPERATOR Unchangeable ― ― √ √ √ Operator


CONFIG Unchangeable ― ― √ √ √ Config
ADMIN Unchangeable ― ― √ √ √ Admin

Operation NWD-115476-06E
Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only

4-10 NE Setup

4.3.1 User Access Levels


Following describes the details of each access level. Remote means that a user makes
an access to the equipment remotely.
R/W: User can browse and modify the setting.
R: User can only browse the setting
O: The functions are available when user accesses to the equipment remotely but
restricted by the assigned access level.
Table 4-3 User Access Privilege Levels

WebLCT Menu Admin Config Operator Remote

Easy Setup Wizard


Easy Setup R/W R R O
MODEM Setup R/W R R O
AMR / Radio Mapping Setup R/W R R O
Management Setup R/W R R O
TDM Setup R/W R R O
ETH Setup R/W R R O
PWE Setup R/W R R O
Equipment Setup
Equipment Configuration R/W R R O
Modem Migration R/W R R O
Radio Configuration R/W R/W R O
AMR Configuration R/W R/W R O
Network General Setting R/W R R O
Management General Setting (Detail) R/W R R O
Configuration Routing Setting R/W R R O
IP Access Control Setting R/W R R O
DHCP Server /Relay Setting R/W R R O
Equipment Cascade Setting R/W R R O
Provisioning
MODEM Function MODEM Port Setting R/W R/W R O
Setting Radio Switch Setting R/W R/W R O
TX Power Setting R/W R/W R O
ALM Mode Setting R/W R/W R O
XPIC Setting R/W R/W R O
AMR Setting R/W R/W R O
ETH Function Bridge Setting R/W R/W R O
Setting ETH Port Setting R/W R/W R O
VLAN Setting R/W R/W R O
FDB Setting R/W R/W R O
ETH OAM Setting R/W R/W R O
RSTP / MSTP Setting R/W R/W R O
ERP Setting R/W R/W R O

NWD-115476-06E Operation
Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only

NE Setup 4-11

WebLCT Menu Admin Config Operator Remote

Link Aggregation Setting R/W R/W R O


QoS/Classification Setting R/W R/W R O
Filter Setting R/W R/W R O
L2CP Transparent / Mirror Setting R/W R/W R O
Port Isolate Setting R/W R/W R O
LLF Setting R/W R/W R O
Broadcast Storm Control Setting R/W R/W R O
E1/STM-1/Cross Cross Connect Setting R/W R/W R O
Connect Setting E1 Port Setting R/W R/W R O
STM-1 Port Setting R/W R/W R O
PWE Setting R/W R/W R O
Equipment Clock / Equipment Clock Setting R/W R/W R O
Synchronization EXT Clock Setting R/W R/W R O
Setting PTP Mode Setting R/W R/W R O
PTP Domain Setting R/W R/W R O
Relay-Alarm Relay Control Setting R/W R/W R O
Mapping Setting Cluster Alarm Setting R/W R/W R O
V.11/OW Setting V.11/SC Setting R/W R/W R O
V.11 Directional Setting R/W R/W R O
OW Setting R/W R/W R O
Alarm/AIS Setting Correlation Setting R/W R/W R O
Alarm Severity Setting R/W R/W R O
AIS Setting R/W R/W R O
BER Threshold Setting R/W R/W R
PMON/RMON PMON Threshold R/W R/W R O
Threshold Setting PMON Other R/W R/W R O
RMON Threshold R/W R/W R O
RMON Other R/W R/W R O
AUX Setting AUX Input Setting R/W R/W R O
AUX Output Setting R/W R/W R O
Maintenance Control
Loopback Control MODEM Loopback Control R/W R/W R O
TDM Loopback Control R/W R/W R O
(E1 Loopback 1)
TDM Loopback Control R/W R/W R O
(E1 Loopback 2)
TDM Loopback Control R/W R/W R O
(STM-1 Loopback 1)
TDM Loopback Control R/W R/W R O
(STM-1 Loopback 2)
Link OAM Loopback Control R/W R/W R O
Protection Control MODEM TX/RX Switch Control R/W R/W R O
RSTP / MSTP Control R/W R/W R O
LAG Revert Control R/W R/W R O

Operation NWD-115476-06E
Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only

4-12 NE Setup

WebLCT Menu Admin Config Operator Remote

ERP Control R/W R/W R O


SNCP Switch Control R/W R/W R O
APS Switch Group Control R/W R/W R O
Timing Source Switch Control R/W R/W R O
1
MODEM Maintenance Control R/W R/W R O:*
Laser Shutdown Control R/W R/W R O
OW Buzzer Control R/W R/W R O
H/W_F/W Reset H/W Reset Control R/W — — O
Control F/W Reset Control R/W — — O
PMON/RMON/FDB Clear R/W R — O
Offline Maintenance Control R/W R — —
PTP Domain Control R/W R/W R O
Maintenance Test ETH OAM LB/LT/LM/DM Control R/W R R O
Current/History PMON/RMON Report
MODEM PMON Report R R R O
E1 PMON Report R R R O
STM-1 PMON Report R R R O
ETH RMON Report R R R O
VLAN Counter Report R R R O
Metering
Current Metering R/W R/W R O
Equipment Utility
Export(NE->Storage) Utility R/W R/W O
Update(Storage->NE) Utility R/W — — O
Program ROM Switching R/W — — O
USB Memory Utility R/W — — O
Shipment R/W — — —
Date/Time Setting R/W R R O
User Account / Security Setting
Login User List R — — O
User Authentication Configuration R/W — — O
User Account Management R/W — — O
User Group Profile Configuration R/W — — O
Security Security Status Setting R/W — — O
Management RADIUS Setting R/W — — O
Inventory
Equipment Inventory Information R R R R
S/W License Information R R R R
S/W License Setup
Import License Key R/W — — O
Radio Capacity Setting R/W R R O
SFP Port License Setting R/W R R O

NOTE *1: CW Control is not editable.

NWD-115476-06E Operation
Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only

NE Setup 4-13

4.3.2 Default User Account


iPASOLINK provides three default user accounts with the pre-defined access levels
and privileges. Up to nine user accounts can be added.

Following describes the details of the default user account.


Table 4-4 Default User Account

User Name Default Password Description Default Group

User 87654321 User is able to confirm the system configuration and OPERATOR
equipment status, but is not able to make any changes
to the configuration.

Config 87654321 Beside the functions available to User, Config user is CONFIG
able to operate radio management, baseband
management, switching management for C-Plane
control.

Admin 12345678 Beside the functions available to Config user, Admin ADMIN
user is able to operate database management, file
management, user management and time adjustment
for M-Plane control.

4.3.3 User Account


Following are the User Management Functions available on iPASOLINK:

 Login User List


Used to display the information of user accounts registered to iPASOLINK,
and to modify user profiles, such as passwords and User Group Profiles.

 User Authentication Configuration


Used to register authentication method selects.

 User Account Management


Used to register new user accounts, and to modify/delete registered user
accounts.

 User Group Profile Configuration


Used to register new user groups, and to modify/delete registered user
groups.

Operation NWD-115476-06E
Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only

4-14 NE Setup

4.3.3.1 Login User List

This function allows users to confirm user accounts registered to iPASOLINK.

Procedure 4-3

1. In the WebLCT menu frame on the left, expand User Account/Security


Setting to select Login User List.

2. The Login User List window appears.

Figure 4-9 Login User List Window

This step ends the procedure.

NWD-115476-06E Operation
Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only

NE Setup 4-15

4.3.3.2 User Authentication Configuration

The user authentication configuration is a function to Setting of an authentication


method.

NOTE: This function is available for Admin access level user only.

 Authentication Setting
This function is setting of an authentication method to Login.

 Privilege ID / Group Name


This function assigns registered Group Name to authority Level.

(1) Authentication Setting

Procedure 4-4

1. In the WebLCT menu frame, expand User Account/Security Setting to


select User Authentication Configuration.

2. The User Authentication Configuration window appears. Click


Authentication Setting link.

Figure 4-10 User Authentication Configuration Window

Operation NWD-115476-06E
Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only

4-16 NE Setup

4. The Authentication Setting option window appears. Enter the proper value
for each parameter.

Figure 4-11 Authentication Configuration Option Window

Table 4-5 Authentication Setting

Item Parameter Description

IDU Only The outside authentication server isn't used,


and Login authentication is done only by the
inner authentication function.

Authentication Method IDU + RADIUS The outside authentication server as well as


the inner authentication function is used for
Login authentication. But, it's necessary to
build RADIUS Server on the RADIUS
Setting screen.

IDU -> RADIUS Server Login authentication is performed by the


order of IDU and RADIUS Server.

(This item can only set when “Authentication


Method” = “IDU + RADIUS”.)
Authentication Sequence
RADIUS Server -> IDU Login authentication is performed by the
order of RADIUS Server and IDU.

(This item can only set when “Authentication


Method” = “IDU + RADIUS”.)

5. Click OK button after configuring the parameters.

6. The Information dialog box appears. Click OK button.

Figure 4-12 Information Dialog Box

NWD-115476-06E Operation
Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only

NE Setup 4-17

7. The User Authentication Configuration window updates the information.


Confirm Authentication Setting information displayed.

Figure 4-13 User Authentication Configuration

This step is the end of the procedure.

Operation NWD-115476-06E
Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only

4-18 NE Setup

(2) Privilege ID / Group Name

Procedure 4-5

1. In the WebLCT menu frame, expand User Account/Security Setting to


select User Authentication Configuration..

2. The User Authentication Configuration window appears. Click Privilege


ID No..

Figure 4-14 User Authentication Configuration Window

3. The Privilege ID option window appears. Enter the proper value for each
parameter.

Figure 4-15 Privilege ID Dialog Option Window

NWD-115476-06E Operation
Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only

NE Setup 4-19

Table 4-6 Privilege ID

Item Parameter

The choices of Group Name are all Group Name registered on the User Group
Profile screen and Default Permissions.
Group Name
When choosing Default Permissions, Group Name set in Default Permissions of
RADIUS Setting screen is used.

5. Click OK button after configuring the parameters.

6. The Information dialog box appears. Click OK button.

Figure 4-16 Information Box

7. The User Authentication Configuration window updates the information.


Confirm Privilege ID information displayed.

Figure 4-17 User Authentication Configuration

This step ends the procedure.

Operation NWD-115476-06E
Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only

4-20 NE Setup

4.3.3.3 User Account Management

This function allows to register new user accounts, and to modify/delete user
accounts registered to iPASOLINK.

NOTE: This function is available for the Admin access level user only.

 Add User Account

This function is used to register a new user account to add.

NOTE: Up to nine user accounts can be added beside the three default user
accounts.

 Modify User Account


This function is used to modify the information of registered user accounts
including his/her password and user group.

 Delete User Account


This function is used to remove registered user accounts.

NWD-115476-06E Operation
Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only

NE Setup 4-21

(1) Add User Account

NOTE: Security Level (Hash Algorithm / Priv (Privacy) Algorithm) is required to


be set when registering a new user account. The security level cannot
be modified after the registration of a user is completed.

Procedure 4-6

1. In the WebLCT menu frame, expand User Account/Security Setting to


select User Account Management.

2. The User Account Management window appears. Click Add User button.
Add User button

Figure 4-18 User Account Management Window

3. The User Setting option window appears. Enter the appropriate value to each
parameter.

Figure 4-19 User Setting Option Window

Operation NWD-115476-06E
Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only

4-22 NE Setup

Table 4-7 Add User Account

Parameter Value/Description

User Name 1 to 31 characters long.

Password 8 to 31 characters long.

Group ADMIN/CONFIG/OPERATOR or GROUP added. (For


more details, refer to 4.3.3.3 User Group Profile
Management)

Parameters for SNMPv3

Security Level NoAuthNoPriv User login without authentication and encryption.

AuthNoPriv User login needs authentication (MD5 or SHA1 based)


but without encryption.

AuthPriv User login needs authentication (MD5 or SHA1 based)


and data are encrypted by DES or AES.

Auth Algorithm Select Authentication Algorithm between MD5 and SHA.


(For more details, refer to (b) For AhthNoPriv).

Auth Key Enter 8 to 16 digits of MD5 or SHA1 public key.

Priv Algorithm Select the encryption method, DES or AES. (For more
details, refer to (c) For AuthPriv)

Priv Key Enter 8 to 16 digits of DES or AES public key.

MD5 One of the Hash Algorithm for authentication and digital


signature. In order to detect the falsification of original
data during the data transmitting, the original data will be
converting the Hash by comparing them at both ends.

SHA One of the Hash Algorithm for authentication and digital


signature. In order to detect the falsification of original
64
data during the data transmitting, less than 2 bits of the
original data will be converting the Hash of 160 bits by
comparing it at both ends.

DES DES is 56 bits encryption key and encryption by 64 bit


block.

AES SPN structured block encryption, block length is 128 bits,


and the length of key is 128 / 192 / 256 bits.

NWD-115476-06E Operation
Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only

NE Setup 4-23

4. Click Set Password in the User Setting option window to open the Set
Password option window.

5. Enter the same passwords into New Password and Re-Enter fields, and then
click OK button.

Figure 4-20 Set Password Option window

6. The window returns to the User Setting option window. Click OK button to
close the option window.

Figure 4-21 User Setting Option Window

7. Select the Security Level.

8. Select the Auth Algorithm

9. Select the Priv Algorithm.

10. Click Set Auth Key button to open the Set Auth Key option window.

Operation NWD-115476-06E
Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only

4-24 NE Setup

11. Enter the same passwords into New Password and Re-Enter fields, and then
click OK button.

Figure 4-22 Set Auth Key Option Window

12. Click Set Priv Key in the User Setting option window to open the Set Priv
Key option window appears.

13. Enter the same passwords into New Password and Re-Enter fields, and then
click OK button.

Figure 4-23 Set Priv Key Option Window

Figure 4-24 User Setting Box

14. Click OK button when completed.

NWD-115476-06E Operation
Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only

NE Setup 4-25

15. The Information dialog box appears. Click OK button.

Figure 4-25 Information Dialog Box

16. The User Account Management updates the information. Confirm the
displayed user account information.

Figure 4-26 User Account Management Window

This step ends the procedure.

Operation NWD-115476-06E
Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only

4-26 NE Setup

(2) Modify User Account

Procedure 4-7

1. In the WebLCT menu frame, expand User Account/Security Setting to


select User Account Management.

2. The User Account Management window appears. Click on a target user


name.

Figure 4-27 User Account Management Window

3. The User Setting option window appears. Modify values:

 Select a user group from Group Name drop-down list to change his/her
user group.

 Click Set Password button on the User Setting box menu bar to change
the current password. Set Password option window appears.

Figure 4-28 User Setting Option Window

NWD-115476-06E Operation
Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only

NE Setup 4-27

 Enter a new password into each New Password and Re-Enter field on the
Set Password option window.

Figure 4-29 Set Password Option Window

 Click OK button. The Set Password option window closes.

4. Click OK button when completed.

Figure 4-30 User Setting Option Window

5. The Information dialog box appears. Click OK button.

Figure 4-31 Information Dialog Box

Operation NWD-115476-06E
Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only

4-28 NE Setup

6. The User Account Management window updates the information. Confirm


the information for the modified user account.

Figure 4-32 User Account Management Window

This step ends the procedure.

NWD-115476-06E Operation
Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only

NE Setup 4-29

(3) Delete User Account

Procedure 4-8

1. In the WebLCT menu frame, expand User Account/Security Setting to


select User Account Management.

2. The User Account Management window appears. Click Delete User


button.
Delete User button

Figure 4-33 User Account Management Window

3. The User Setting option window appears. From drop-down list, select a user
account to be removed, and click OK button. The Confirmation dialog box
appears.

Figure 4-34 User Setting Option Window

4. Confirm the user name to be removed, and then click OK button.

Figure 4-35 Confirmation Dialog Window

Operation NWD-115476-06E
Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only

4-30 NE Setup

5. The Information dialog box appears. Click OK button.

Figure 4-36 Information Dialog Box

6. The User Account Management window updates the information. Confirm


that the selected user account is removed.

Figure 4-37 User Account Management Window

This step ends the procedure.

NWD-115476-06E Operation
Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only

NE Setup 4-31

4.3.3.4 User Group Profile Configuration

This operation registers and modifies user group profiles.

The privilege of iPASOLINK user is subject to change according to the user access
level and protocols that are assigned by the User Group Profile. Only Admin level
user is available to configure the settings.

 Add User Group Profile


This operation registers a new User Group Profile adding to the default User
Group Profile.

NOTE: Up to six User Group Profiles can be registered beside the three default
User Group Profiles.

 Modify User Group Profile


This operation modifies a registered User Group Profile (Access Level and
Protocol).

 Delete User Group Profile


This operation deletes a registered User Group Profile.

Operation NWD-115476-06E
Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only

4-32 NE Setup

(1) Add User Group

Procedure 4-9

1. In the WebLCT menu frame, expand User Account/Security Setting to


select User Group Profile Configuration.

2. The User Group Profile Configuration window appears. Click Add Group
on the menu bar of the User Group Profile Configuration window.
Add Group button

Figure 4-38 User Group Profile Configuration Window

3. The Group Setting option window appears. Specify the appropriate value to
each parameter, then click OK button.

Figure 4-39 Group Setting Option Window

Table 4-8 User Group Profile Configuration

Parameter Description

Group Name 1 to 32 characters long.


FTP Allow or Deny using FTP Protocol to transmit Files.
SFTP Allow or Deny using SFTP Protocol to transmit Files.
HTTP Allow or Deny using HTTP Protocol for WebLCT to access equipment.
HTTPS Allow or Deny using HTTPS Protocol for WebLCT to access equipment.
SNMP Allow or Deny using SNMP Protocol to access to network equipment.
Access Level Specify the user access level (Admin/Config/Operator)
(For more details, refer to Table 4-3 User Access Privilege Levels)

NWD-115476-06E Operation
Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only

NE Setup 4-33

4. The Information dialog box appears. Click OK button.

Figure 4-40 Information Dialog Box

5. The User Group Profile Configuration window updates the information.


Confirm that the information of newly added user group profile is displayed.

Figure 4-41 User Group Profile Configuration Window

This step ends the procedure.

Operation NWD-115476-06E
Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only

4-34 NE Setup

(2) Modify User Group

Procedure 4-10

1. In the WebLCT menu frame, expand User Account/Security Setting to


select User Group Profile Configuration.

2. The User Group Profile Configuration window appears. Click on a desired


group name. The Group Setting option window appears.

Figure 4-42 User Group Profile Configuration Window

3. Modify parameters:

Figure 4-43 Group Setting Option Window

 Click either Allow or Deny radio button to select a protocol.

 Select the appropriate level from Access Level drop-down list to change
the access level of the user group.

NWD-115476-06E Operation
Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only

NE Setup 4-35

4. Click OK button when completed. The Information dialog box appears.

5. Click OK button.

Figure 4-44 Information Dialog Box

6. The User Group Profile Configuration window updates the information.


Confirm the displayed profile information.

Figure 4-45 User Group Profile Configuration Window

This step ends the procedure.

Operation NWD-115476-06E
Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only

4-36 NE Setup

(3) Delete User Group

NOTE: A user group can be deleted only when the user group has no assigned
user.

Procedure 4-11

1. In the WebLCT menu frame, expand User Account/Security Setting to


select User Group Profile Configuration.

2. The User Group Profile Configuration window appears. Click Delete


Group button.
Delete Group button

Figure 4-46 User Group Profile Configuration Window

3. The Group Setting option window appears. Select a target group profile name
from the drop-down list, and click OK button.

Figure 4-47 Group Setting Option Window

4. The Confirmation dialog box appears. Confirm the User Group name to be
deleted, and then click OK button.

Figure 4-48 Confirmation Dialog Box

NWD-115476-06E Operation
Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only

NE Setup 4-37

5. The Information dialog box appears. Click OK button.

Figure 4-49 Information Dialog Box

6. The User Group Profile Configuration window updates the information.


Confirm the displayed User Group Profile information.

Figure 4-50 User Group Profile Configuration Window


This step ends the procedure.

Operation NWD-115476-06E
Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only

4-38 NE Setup

4.3.4 Security Management


iPASOLINK supports the following protocol and security management functions.

(1) SNMPv1 (Simple Network Management Protocol Version 1)

SNMPv1 is a communication protocol to monitor/control NEs on an IP network,


which is specified by the following RFCs:
Table 4-9 RFC Standards

RFC No. Title

RFC 1155 Structure and Identification of Management Information on


TCP/IP-based Internets (SMIv1)

RFC 1157 A Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP)

RFC 1213 Management Information Base on Network Management of


TCP/IP-based internets: MIB-II

iPASOLINK provides SNMPv1 to support the following functions:

 GET/SET of MIB

Following are response to the request of PDU (Protocol Data Unit) supported by
SNMPv1.

Up to ten SNMP managers including the setting of IP address, community name,


security settings, etc., can be registered via the WebLCT.

By default, iPASOLINK uses the port 161 to receive the SNMP request UDP. To
use the other than the default port, change the settings via the WebLCT.
Table 4-10 PDU Supported by SNMPv1

Item Description

GetRequest Requests the specified instance value.

GetNextRequest Requests the subsequent instance value of specified instance value in the list.

GetResponse Responds to the corresponding GetRequest and SetReaquest.

SetRequest Sets the specified instance value.

Trap Informs the change of state and troubles (SNMPv1-Trap).

NWD-115476-06E Operation
Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only

NE Setup 4-39

 Send Trap

iPASOLINK can send SNMPv1 trap initiatively to UDP Port 162. Except for
sending the trap to the connected NMS, user can specify an IP address of one
additional destination. A user can also specify the community name and UDP
Port.

 User Application (Log)

iPASOLINK records the logged-in user names in the log file.

(2) SNMPv2c (Simple Network Management Protocol Version 2c)

SNMPv2c is a communication protocol to monitor/control NEs on an IP network,


and is a revised version of SNMPv1. The differences between v1 and v2c are
that the GetBulk, the inform request, unified packet format of each PDU are
added, conforming to SMIv2 and following RFCs:
Table 4-11 RFC Standards

RFC No. Title

SNMPv2c

RFC 1901 Introduction to Community-based SNMPv2

RFC 3416 Version 2 of the Protocol Operations for the Simple Network Management
Protocol (SNMP)

RFC 3417 Transport Mappings for the Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP)

RFC 3418 Management Information Base (MIB) for the Simple Network Management
Protocol (SNMP)

RFC 3584 Coexistence between Version 1, Version 2, and Version 3 of the


Internet-standard Network Management Framework

SMIv2

RFC 2578 Structure of Management Information Version 2 (SMIv2)

RFC 2579 Textual Conventions for SMIv2

RFC 2580 Conformance Statements for SMIv2

Operation NWD-115476-06E
Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only

4-40 NE Setup

iPASOLINK provides SNMPv2c to support the following functions:

 GET/SET of MIB

iPASOLINK responds to the request of the network management system.

Up to ten SNMP managers including the setting of IP address, community name,


security settings, etc., can be registered via WebLCT.

By default, iPASOLINK uses the port 161 to receive the SNMP request UDP. To
use other than the default port, change the settings via WebLCT.
Table 4-12 PDU Supported by SNMPv2c

Item Description

GetRequest Requests the specified instance value.

GetNextRequest Requests the subsequent instance value of specified instance value in the list.

Response Responds to the corresponding various kinds of Request.

SetRequest Sets the specified instance value.

SNMPv2-Trap Informs the change of state and troubles. The format is different from SNMP v1 trap.

GetBulkRequest Requests a number of instance value.

InformRequest Inform an event.

 Send Trap

iPASOLINK can send SNMPv2 trap and InformRequest initiatively to UDP port
162. Except for sending the trap to the connected NMS, user can specify an IP
address of one additional destination. User can also specify the community name
and UDP Port.

 User Application (Log)

iPASOLINK records the logged-in user name in the log file.

NWD-115476-06E Operation
Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only

NE Setup 4-41

(3) SNMPv3 (Simple Network Management Protocol: Version 3)

SNMPv3 is a communication protocol to monitor/control NEs on an IP network,


and is the newest version of SNMP. The differences between SNMPv1/v2c and
v3 are that the user authentication, ciphered communication, and the
change-packet format are enhanced, conforming to the following RFCs for
SMIv2 that define SNMPv3, SNMPv2c:

Table 4-13 RFC Standards

RFC No. Title

SNMPv3

RFC 3411 An Architecture for Describing Simple Network Management


Protocol (SNMP) Management Frameworks

RFC 3412 Message Processing and Dispatching for the Simple Network
Management Protocol (SNMP)

RFC 3413 Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP) Applications

RFC 3414 User-based Security Model (USM) for version 3 of the Simple
Network Management Protocol (SNMPv3)

RFC 3415 View-based Access Control Model (VACM) for the Simple
Network Management Protocol (SNMP)

RFC 3416 Version 2 of the Protocol Operations for the Simple Network
Management Protocol (SNMP)

RFC 3417 Trans port Mappings for the Simple Network Management
Protocol (SNMP)

RFC 3418 Management Information Base (MIB) for the Simple Network
Management Protocol (SNMP)

RFC 3584 Coexistence between Version 1, Version 2, and Version 3 of the


Internet-standard Network Management Framework

SMIv2

RFC 2578 Structure of Management Information Version 2 (SMIv2)

RFC 2579 Textual Conventions for SMIv2

RFC 2580 Conformance Statements for SMIv2

Operation NWD-115476-06E
Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only

4-42 NE Setup

iPASOLINK provides SNMPv3 to support the following function:

 GET/SET of MIB

Response the request of PDU (Protocol Data Unit) that correspond by SNMPv3
Table 4-14 PDU Supported by SNMPv3

Item Description

GetRequest Required the specified instance value

GetNextRequest Required the subsequent instance value of specified instance value in the list.

Response Response to the corresponding various kinds of Request.

SetRequest Setting the specified instance value.

SNMPv2-Trap Inform the change of state and troubles.

GetBulkRequest Required a number of instance value.

InformRequest Inform the event.

Report Return the packet if the reportableFlag is set to ON .

 Send Trap

iPASOLINK can send SNMPv2-Trap and InformRequest initiatively to UDP


Port 162.

IP address of SNMP entity, security level, and user name are required to set the
Trap.

Authentic method and authentic password are required when the security level is
authNoPriv or authPriv.

Encryption algorithm and encrypted password are required when the security
level is authPriv.

 Security (user authentication, session management and encryption)

SNMPv3 PDU is not authenticated by the community name as v1, v2c., but by
the user name, which requires the user registrations beforehand.

User authentication is carried out when the security level of the sent SNMP
request is authNoPriv or authPriv. The cryptographic hash function of the
password is selectable between MD5 and SHA.

NWD-115476-06E Operation
Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only

NE Setup 4-43

Ciphered communication is enabled by the user authentication when the security


level of the sent SNMP request is authPriv. The cipher algorithm is selectable
between DES and AES. For the ciphered communication, a password must be set
when registering users.

User can also specify an SNMP Engine ID for each NE, which should be 16-byte
long and unique within the network.

(4) NTP (Network Time Protocol)

This protocol synchronizes the clocks of the server and associated clients in a
network, which is specified by the following RFCs:
Table 4-15 RFC Standards

RFC No. Title

RFC 1305 Network Time Protocol (Version 3) Specification, Implementation and Analysis

RFC 2030 Simple Network Time Protocol (SNTP) Version 4 for IPv4, IPv6 and OS

iPASOLINK can be set either as NTP Client or Server. Following shows the
available functions of NTP Client and Server:

 As NTP Client

When the unicast mode is selected on the NTP Client, the client sends a request
to obtain the current time to the pre-configured server, and then adjusts the clock
according to the replied information. Up to four NTP Severs can be registered
via WebLCT.

When the multicast mode is selected on the NTP Client, the client will listen to
the broadcast of the time server and then adjusts the clock according to the first
received valid broadcast and ignores the broadcasts from remaining servers if
exist.

If the NTP Client receives neither a response nor broadcasts, the synchronization
among the Server and Clients cannot be accomplished, which allows to use the
current time of the equipment.

 As NTP Server

When the unicast mode is selected on the NTP Server, Server will respond the
current time information to the Client.

When the multicast mode is selected, the Server will broadcast the current time
information of its own periodically.

Operation NWD-115476-06E
Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only

4-44 NE Setup

(5) FTP (File Transfer Protocol)

This protocol transfers a file among NEs, and specified by the following RFCs.
Table 4-16 RFC Standards

RFC No. Title

RFC 959 Original FTP spec.

RFC 1123 The small FTP related section extends / clarifies RFC-959.

RFC 2228 FTP security extensions (vsftpd implements the small subset
needed to support TLS / SSL connections).

RFC 2389 Proposes FEAT and OPTS commands

RFC 2428 Essentially IPv6 support.

Using iPASOLINK as FTP Server provides the following functions:

 Data upload and download service

Data upload and download service are available; however the data download is
restricted, which can be operated only by a user with the appropriate privilege
files and the directories accessed via FTP protocol are predetermined as well as
the file names and types, which will be downloaded.

 Session management

Upon at accepting the connection from external device, the system proceeds to
the login authentication process. An unauthorized user is denied.

The default setting of TCP Port 21 to listen and transfer a file on TCP port 20
can be changed using WebLCT. When Passive Mode is selected, the port number
is selected by the equipment automatically.

If no command is issued by the Client for ninety seconds, the current TCP
session will be disconnected automatically.

 User authentication function

iPASOLINK supports two types of the authentications:

 External RADIUS Server with internal authentication

 Internal authentication only

NWD-115476-06E Operation
Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only

NE Setup 4-45

(6) HTTP (Hyper Text Transfer Protocol)

HTTP is the protocol for transferring data between Web server and client
(WebLCT).

The HTTP is based on the following RFC standards:


Table 4-17 RFC Standards

RFC No. Title

RFC 1945 Hypertext Transfer Protocol -- HTTP/1.0

RFC 2616 Hypertext Transfer Protocol -- HTTP/1.1

Using iPASOLINK as HTTP server enables the following functions:

 WebLCT

WebLCT operation via HTTP protocol is available.

 Session Management

Upon at accepting the connection from external device, the system proceeds to
the login authentication process. An unauthorized user is not accepted.

The default port number of HTTP Service is 80, which can be changed using
WebLCT.

 User authentication function

iPASOLINK supports the internal authentication only.

Operation NWD-115476-06E
Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only

4-46 NE Setup

4.3.4.1 Service Status Setting

Service Status Setting displays the status of service and protocol:

Procedure 4-12

1. In the WebLCT menu frame, expand User Account/Security Setting, then


its submenu Security Management to select Service Status Setting.

2. The Service Status Setting window appears. Confirm the status of each
Service.

Figure 4-51 Service Status Setting Window (1/2)

NWD-115476-06E Operation
Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only

NE Setup 4-47

Figure 4-52 Service Status Setting Window

Operation NWD-115476-06E
Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only

4-48 NE Setup

Figure 4-53 Service Status Window

Table 4-18 Service Status Indications

Status Description

Running Protocol or service is enabled

Stopped Protocol or service is disabled

This step ends the procedure.

4.3.4.2 SNMP

Procedure 4-13

1. In the WebLCT menu frame, expand User Account/Security Setting, then


its submenu Security Management to select Service Status Setting.

2. The Service Status Setting window appears. Click SNMP.

Click SNMP.

Figure 4-54 Service Status Setting Window

NWD-115476-06E Operation
Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only

NE Setup 4-49

3. The SNMP Setting option window appears. Specify an appropriate value to


each parameter:

Figure 4-55 SNMP Setting Option Window

Table 4-19 SNMP Setting Parameters

Parameter Value Description

SNMPv1/ Enable Enables SNMPv1/v2c (running)


SNMPv2c
Disable Disables SNMPv1/v2c (stopped)

SNMPv3 Enable Enables SNMPv3 (running)

Disable Disables SNMPv3 (stopped)

UDP Port 161 Assigns the UDP Port number. The


default port is 161.
Range: 1 to 65535

Caution

You must reboot the CPU in order to apply the values properly after changing
the UDP port number.

4. Click OK button when completed.

5. The Information dialog box appears. Click OK button.

Figure 4-56 Information Dialog Box

Operation NWD-115476-06E
Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only

4-50 NE Setup

6. The Service Status Setting window updates the information. Confirm the
displayed SNMP information.

Figure 4-57 Service Status Setting Window (1/2)

Figure 4-58 Service Status Setting Window (2/2)

This step ends the procedure.

NWD-115476-06E Operation
Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only

NE Setup 4-51

4.3.4.3 SNMP Community

This operation registers, modifies, or deletes the SNMP Manager information. Only
the registered SNMP managers have the right to access to the equipment. Up to ten
servers can be registered.

(1) Registration of SNMP Community

Procedure 4-14

1. In the WebLCT menu frame, expand User Account / Security Setting, then
its submenu Security Management to select Service Status Setting.

2. The Service Status Setting window appears. Click SNMP Community No.
of the SNMP Community field.
Click SNMP Community No.

Figure 4-59 Service Status Setting Window

3. The SNMP Community option window appears. Specify the appropriate value
to each parameter.

Figure 4-60 SNMP Community Option Window

Operation NWD-115476-06E
Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only

4-52 NE Setup

Table 4-20 SNMP Community Parameters

Parameter Value Description

Community Name 1 to 31 characters Specify an SNMP Community Name. Any request with a
different Community Name will be rejected.
Access Level (Admin/Config/Operator) Specify a user access level. (For details, refer to Table 4-3
User Access Privilege Levels.)
Access Address xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx Specify the valid IP address or network address of the SNMP
manager(s).

Subnet Mask x.x.x.x Specify a Subnet Mask of SNMP manager(s)

4. Click OK button when completed.

5. The Information dialog box appears. Click OK button.

Figure 4-61 Information Dialog Box

6. The Service Status Setting window updates the niformation. Confirm that
the newly added SNMP community information is displayed.

Figure 4-62 Service Status Setting Window

This step ends the procedure.

NWD-115476-06E Operation
Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only

NE Setup 4-53

(2) Modify SNMP Community

Procedure 4-15

7. In the WebLCT menu frame, expand User Account / Security Setting, then
its submenu Security Management to select Service Status Setting.

8. The Service Status Setting window appears. Click Community No. of


SNMP Community field.

Figure 4-63 Service Status Setting Window

9. The SNMP Community option window appears. Modify parameters:

Figure 4-64 SNMP Community Option Window

Operation NWD-115476-06E
Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only

4-54 NE Setup

Table 4-21 SNMP Community Parameters

Parameter Value Description

Community Name 1 to 31 characters Specify an SNMP Community name. Any request


with a different community name will be rejected.

Access Level (Admin/Config/Operator) Specify a user access level. (For more details,
refer to Table 4-3 User Access Privilege Levels.)

Access Address xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx Specify the valid IP address or network address of


the SNMP manager(s).

Subnet Mask x.x.x.x Subnet Mask of management server(s)

10. Click OK button when completed.

11. The Information box appears. Click OK button.

Figure 4-65 Information Dialog Box

12. The Service Status Setting window updates the information. Confirm that
the modified SNMP Community information is displayed.

Figure 4-66 Service Status Setting Window

This step ends the procedure.

NWD-115476-06E Operation
Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only

NE Setup 4-55

(3) Delete SNMP Community

Procedure 4-16

1. In the WebLCT menu frame, expand User Account / Security Setting, then
its submenu Security Management to select Service Status Setting.

2. The Service Status Setting window appears. Click Delete SNMP


Community on top of the window.

Delete SNMP Community button

Figure 4-67 Service Status Setting Window

3. The Delete SNMP Community option window appears. Select an SNMP


Community No. from the drop-down list, and then click OK button.

Figure 4-68 Delete SNMP Community Option Window

Operation NWD-115476-06E
Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only

4-56 NE Setup

4. The Confirmation dialog box appears. Click OK button.

Figure 4-69 Confirmation Dialog Box

5. The Information dialog box appears. Click OK button.

Figure 4-70 Information Dialog Box

6. The Service Status Setting window updates the information. Confirm that
the selected SNMP Community information is removed.

Figure 4-71 Service Status Setting Window

This step ends the procedure.

NWD-115476-06E Operation
Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only

NE Setup 4-57

4.3.4.4 SNMP Trap Entry

This operation configures the SNMP Trap:

(1) SNMP Trap Entry

Procedure 4-17

1. In the WebLCT menu frame, expand User Account / Security Setting, then
its submenu Security Management to select Service Status Setting.

2. The Service Status Setting window appears. Click SNMP Trap Entry No.
of the SNMP Trap Entry field.
SNMP Trap Entry No.

Figure 4-72 Service Status Setting Window

3. The SNMP Trap Entry option window appears. Specify a proper value for each
parameter.

(a) SNMPv1

Figure 4-73 SNMPv1 Trap Entry Option Window

Operation NWD-115476-06E
Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only

4-58 NE Setup

(b) SNMPv2c

Figure 4-74 SNMPv2c Trap Entry Option Window

(c) SNMPv3 (PDU Type: Trap)

Figure 4-75 SNMPv3 (Trap) Entry Option Window

NWD-115476-06E Operation
Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only

NE Setup 4-59

(d) SNMPv3 (PDU Type: Inform)

Figure 4-76 SNMPv3 (Inform) Entry Option Window

Table 4-22 SNMP Trap Entry Parameters

Parameter Value Description

SNMP Version v1/ v2c / v3 Set SNMP version for trap.


PDU Type Trap / Inform Set PDU Type for trap. SNMP Inform PDU is available for
SNMPv2 and SNMPv3 only.
IP Address x.x.x.x Specify the destination IP address of trap
UDP Port 162 Set UDP Port of trap
(Range: 1 - 65535)
CommunityName 1 to 31 characters Set communication name of the trap. This must match on both
SNMP server and agent.
Security Level NoAuthNoPriv User login without authentication and encryption.
AuthNoPriv User login needs authentication (MD5 or SHA1 based) without
encrypted.
AuthPriv User login needs authentication (MD5 or SHA1 based) and the
data is encrypted by DES or AES.
SNMP Engine ID 10 to 64 SNMPv3 local engine id
numeric characters

Operation NWD-115476-06E
Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only

4-60 NE Setup

Parameter Value Description

Auth Algorithm MD5 One of the Auth Algorithms for authentication and digital
signature. In order to detect the falsification of original data during
data transmitting, the original data will be converting the auth by
comparing it at both ends. .
SHA One of the Auth Algorithms for authentication and digital
signature. In order to detect the falsification of original data during
64
the data transmitting, less than 2 bits of original data will be
converting the auth of 160 bits by comparing it at both ends.
Auth Key 8 to 16 Enter 8 to 16 digits Public key of MD5 or SHA1
Priv Algorithm DES The DES function uses the encryption by 64 bit-log and uses 56
bits encryption of key
ASE The encryption of SPN structure, use 128 bit- long length and the
128/192/256 bits of key length
Priv Key 8 to 16 Enter 8 to 16 digits key of DES or AES

NOTE: User needs set Security Level and SNMP Engine ID only if the
settings are SNMPv3(inform)

4. Click OK button when completed.

5. The Information dialog box appears. Click OK button.

Figure 4-77 Information Dialog Box

6. The Service Status Setting window updates the information. Confirm that
the newly added SNMP trap entry information is displayed.

Figure 4-78 Service Status Setting Window

This step ends the procedure.

NWD-115476-06E Operation
Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only

NE Setup 4-61

(2) Modify SNMP Trap Entry

Procedure 4-18

1. In the WebLCT menu frame, expand User Account / Security Setting, then
its submenu Security Management to select Service Status Setting.

2. The Service Status Setting window appears. Click SNMP Trap Entry No.
of the SNMP Trap Entry field.
SNMP Trap Entry No.

Figure 4-79 Service Status Setting Window

3. The SNMP Trap Entry option window appears. Modify parameters:

Figure 4-80 SNMP Trap Entry Option Window

4. Click OK button when completed.

Operation NWD-115476-06E
Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only

4-62 NE Setup

5. The Information dialog box appears. Click OK button.

Figure 4-81 Information Dialog Box

6. The Service Status Settings window updates the information. Confirm that
the modified SNMP trap entry information is displayed.

Figure 4-82 Service Status Setting Window

This step ends the procedure.

NWD-115476-06E Operation
Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only

NE Setup 4-63

(3) Delete SNMP Trap Entry

Procedure 4-19

1. In the WebLCT menu frame, expand User Account / Security Setting, then
its submenu Security Management to select Service Status Setting.

2. The Service Status Setting window appears. Click Delete SNMP Trap
Entry.
Delete SNMP Trap Entry button

Figure 4-83 Service Status Setting Window

3. The Delete SNMP Trap Entry option window appears. From the drop-down
list, select the target SNMP Trap Entry No. to be removed, and then click OK
button.

Figure 4-84 Delete SNMP Trap Entry Option Window

4. The Confirmation dialog box appears. Click OK button.

Figure 4-85 Confirmation Dialog Box

Operation NWD-115476-06E
Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only

4-64 NE Setup

5. The Information dialog box appears. Click OK button.

Figure 4-86 Information Dialog Box

6. The Service Status Setting window updates the information. Confirm that
the selected SNMP Trap Entry information is removed from the display.

Figure 4-87 Service Status Setting Window

This step ends the procedure.

4.3.4.5 NTP

Procedure 4-20

1. In the WebLCT menu frame, expand User Account / Security Setting, then
its submenu Security Management to select Service Status Setting.

2. The Service Status Setting window appears. Click NTP.

Figure 4-88 Service Status Setting Window

NWD-115476-06E Operation
Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only

NE Setup 4-65

3. The NTP Setting option window appears. Assign the appropriate value to each
parameter.

Figure 4-89 NTP Setting Option Window

Table 4-23 NTP Setting Parameters

Parameter Value Description

NTP Disable Enable NTP protocol on the equipment


Enable

NTP Server Mode Unicast Specify NTP Server mode


Multicast
Disabled

NTP Client Mode Unicast Specify NTP Client mode


Multicast NOTE: Only the bridge “1” can receive NTP Multicast
Disabled Message and Synchronize to NTP Multicast Server.

Stratum Range: 2 to 15 Set Stratum level of the NTP Time packets, It should be
received lowest Stratum in NTP PDU plus 1.

Multicast Port Select the port to send out Multicast time information.

Multicast Interval Range: 16 to 131072s Select Multicast Interval

4. Click OK button when completed.

Operation NWD-115476-06E
Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only

4-66 NE Setup

5. The Information dialog box appears, then click OK button.

Figure 4-90 Information Dialog Box

6. The Service Status Setting window updates the information. Confirm the
displayed NTP configuration.

Figure 4-91 Service Status Setting Window (1/2)

Figure 4-92 Service Status Setting Window (2/2)

This step ends the procedure.

NWD-115476-06E Operation
Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only

NE Setup 4-67

4.3.4.6 NTP Server Address

This operation allows a user to register/modify/delete the NTP Server and its
information.

(1) Registration NTP Server Address

Procedure 4-21

1. In the WebLCT menu frame, expand User Account / Security Setting, then
its submenu Security Management to select Service Status Setting.

2. The Service Status Setting window appears. Click NTP Server No. of the
NTP Server Address field.
NTP Server Address No.

Figure 4-93 Service Status Setting Window

3. The NTP Server Address Setting option window appears. Assign the
appropriate value to each parameter.

Figure 4-94 NTP Server Address Setting Option Window

Operation NWD-115476-06E
Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only

4-68 NE Setup

Table 4-24 NTP Server Address Setting Parameters

Parameter Value Description

IP Address x.x.x.x Set IP address of the upper NTP Server.

NTP Version 3 or 4 Specify the NTP message version

Poll Time 64 Sec Set the interval of polling NTP server. Default
(Range: 16 to 131072, 16x2^n) is 64 sec.

4. Click OK button when completed.

5. The Information dialog box appears. Click OK button.

Figure 4-95 Information Dialog Box

6. The Service Status Setting window updates the information. Confirm that
the newly added NTP Server Address information is displayed.

Figure 4-96 Service Status Setting Window

This step ends the procedure.

NWD-115476-06E Operation
Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only

NE Setup 4-69

(2) Modify NTP Server Address

Procedure 4-22

1. In the WebLCT menu frame, expand User Account / Security Setting, then
its submenu Security Management to select Service Status Setting.

2. The Service Status Setting window appears. Click the NTP Server No. of
the NTP Server Address field.
NTP Server Address No.

Figure 4-97 Service Status Setting Window

3. The NTP Server Address Setting option window appears. Modify


parameters:

Figure 4-98 NTP Server Address Setting Option Window

4. Click OK button when completed.

5. The Information dialog box appears. Click OK button.

Figure 4-99 Information Dialog Box

Operation NWD-115476-06E
Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only

4-70 NE Setup

6. The Service Status Setting window updates the information. Confirm that
the modified NTP Server Address information is displayed.

Figure 4-100 Service Status Setting Window

This step ends the procedure.

(3) Clear NTP Server Address

Procedure 4-23

1. In the WebLCT menu frame, expand User Account / Security Setting, then
its submenu Security Management to select Service Status Setting.

2. The Service Status Setting window appears. Click Clear NTP Server
button.

Clear NTP Server button

Figure 4-101 Service Status Setting Window

NWD-115476-06E Operation
Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only

NE Setup 4-71

3. The Clear NTP Server option window appears. From No. drop-down list,
select the number of target NTP Server Address, and then click OK button.

Figure 4-102 Clear NTP Server Option Window

4. The Confirmation dialog box appears. Click OK button.

Figure 4-103 Confirmation Dialog Box

5. The Information dialog box appears. Click OK button.

Figure 4-104 Information Dialog Box

6. The Service Status Setting window updates the information. Confirm that
the selected NTP Server Address information is cleared.

Figure 4-105 Service Status Setting Window

This step ends the procedure.

Operation NWD-115476-06E
Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only

4-72 NE Setup

4.3.4.7 FTP

Procedure 4-24

1. In the WebLCT menu frame, expand User Account / Security Setting, then
its submenu Security Management to select Service Status Setting.

2. The Service Status Setting window appears. Click FTP.


Click FTP.

Figure 4-106 Service Status Setting Window

3. The FTP Setting option window appears. Assign an appropriate value to each
parameter.

Figure 4-107 FTP Setting Option Window

NWD-115476-06E Operation
Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only

NE Setup 4-73

Table 4-25 FTP Setting Parameters

Parameter Value Description

FTP Always Enable FTP is always in service

Service Enable Enable on demand FTP service open and close, useful for work
with PNMSj

Service Disable Disable on demand FTP service open and close, useful for
work with PNMSj

TCP Port 21 Set the TCP Port of FTP Server (for received command).
(Command) (Range: 1 to 65535) Default value is 21.

TCP Port (Data) 20 Set the TCP Port of FTP Server (For data transmit). Default
(Range: 1 to 65535) value is 20.

MAX Session 3 Maximum user connection at same time.


(Range: 1 to 3)

Auto Stop Enable Enable FTP Server to disconnect a session automatically if a


session has no operation for 90 seconds.

Disable Disable FTP Server to disconnect a session automatically if a


session has no operation.

NOTE: Following setting is recommended for control with PNMSj


FTP: Service Enable
TCP Port (Command) : 21
TCP Port (Data) : 20
MAX Session : 1
Auto Stop : Enable

4. Click OK button when completed.

5. The Information dialog box appears. Click OK button.

Figure 4-108 Information Dialog Box

Operation NWD-115476-06E
Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only

4-74 NE Setup

6. The Service Status Setting window updates the information. Confirm the
displayed FTP information.

Figure 4-109 Service Status Setting Window (1/2)

Figure 4-110 Service Status Setting Window (2/2)

This step ends the procedure.

NWD-115476-06E Operation
Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only

NE Setup 4-75

4.3.4.8 SFTP

Procedure 4-25

1. In the WebLCT menu frame, expand User Account / Security Setting, then
its submenu Security Management to select Service Status Setting.

2. The Service Status Setting window appears. Click SFTP.


Click SFTP.

Figure 4-111 Service Status Setting Window (SFTP)

3. SFTP Setting option window appears. Assign an appropriate value to each


parameter.

Figure 4-112 SFTP Setting Option Window

Operation NWD-115476-06E
Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only

4-76 NE Setup

Table 4-26 SFTP Setting Parameters

Parameter Value Description

SFTP Disable Disable SFTP service

Enable Enable SFTP service

Always Enable SFTP is always in service

Auto Disable Enable Enable SFTP Server to disconnect a session automatically if


a session has no operation for 90 seconds.

Disable Disable SFTP Server to disconnect a session automatically if


a session has no operation.

4. Click OK button when completed.

5. The Information dialog box appears. Click OK button

6. The Service Status Setting window updates the information. Confirm the
displayed SFTP information.

Figure 4-113 Service Status Setting Window (SFTP) (1/2)

Figure 4-114 Service Status Setting Window (SFTP) (2/2)

This step ends the procedure.

NWD-115476-06E Operation
Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only

NE Setup 4-77

4.3.4.9 HTTP

Procedure 4-26

1. In the WebLCT menu frame, expand User Account / Security Setting, then
its submenu Security Management to select Service Status Setting.

2. The Service Status Setting window appears. Click HTTP.


Click HTTP.

Figure 4-116 Service Status Setting Window

3. The HTTP/HTTPS Setting option window appears. Assign an appropriate


value to each parameter.

Figure 4-117 HTTP / HTTPS Setting Option Window

Table 4-27 HTTP Setting Parameters

Parameter Value Description

HTTP Enable (Running) Enable HTTP service

Disable (Stopped) Disable HTTP service

TCP Port (upper) 80 Set the port number of HTTP server.


(Range: 1 to 65535) Default is 80.

HTTPS See the table for HTTPS Setting Parameters.

TCP Port (lower)

Operation NWD-115476-06E
Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only

4-78 NE Setup

4. Click OK button when completed.

5. The Information dialog box appears. Click OK button

Figure 4-118 Information Dialog Box

6. The Service Status Setting window updates the information. Confirm the
displayed HTTP information.

Figure 4-119 Service Status Setting Window (1/2)

Figure 4-120 Service Status Setting Window (2/2)

This step ends the procedure.

NWD-115476-06E Operation
Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only

NE Setup 4-79

4.3.4.10 HTTPS

Procedure 4-27

1. In the WebLCT menu frame, expand User Account / Security Setting, then
its submenu Security Management to select Service Status Setting.

2. The Service Status Setting window appears. Click HTTPS.


Click HTTPS.

Figure 4-121 Service Status Setting Window (HTTPS)

3. HTTP / HTTPS Setting option window appears. Assign an appropriate value


to each parameter, then click the OK button.

Figure 4-122 HTTP / HTTPS Setting Option Window

Table 4-28 HTTPS Setting Parameters

Parameter Value Description

HTTP See the table for HTTP Setting Parameters.

TCP Port (upper)

HTTPS Enable (Running) Enable HTTPS service

Disable (Stopped) Disable HTTPS service

TCP Port (lower) 443 Set the port number of HTTPS server.
(Range: 1 to 65535) Default is 443.

Operation NWD-115476-06E
Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only

4-80 NE Setup

4. The Information dialog box appears. Click OK button

Figure 4-123 Information Dialog Box

5. The Service Status Setting window updates the information. Confirm the
displayed HTTPS information.

Figure 4-124 Service Status Setting Window (HTTPS) (1/2)

Figure 4-125 Service Status Setting Window (HTTPS) (2/2)

This step ends the procedure.

NWD-115476-06E Operation
Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only

NE Setup 4-81

4.3.4.11 RADIUS Setting

This function specifies the settings of RADIUS (Remote Authentication Dial In User
Service) Server.

NOTE: This function is available for Admin access level user only.

 RADIUS Setting

This function is setting of Authentication method.

 RADIUS Server Setting

This function is setting about User Service Server.

 Clear RADIUS Server

This function eliminates the setting for the RADIUS Server.

(1) RADIUS Setting

Procedure 4-28

1. In the WebLCT menu frame, expand User Account / Security Setting, then
its submenu Security Management to select RADIUS Setting.

2. The RADIUS Setting window appears. Click RADIUS link.


Click RADIUS.

Figure 4-126 RADIUS Setting Window

Operation NWD-115476-06E
Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only

4-82 NE Setup

3. The RADIUS Setting option window appears. Enter the proper value for each
parameter, then click the OK button.

Figure 4-127 RADIUS Setting Option Window

Table 4-29 Authentication Setting


Item Parameter Description

Timeout 1 to 60 s Setting in time-out period of the outside authentication.

Setting of the retry number of times when time-out of the outside


Retry Count 0 to 5
authentication has happened.

Default Deny Login The choices of Default Permissions are all Group Name
Permissions (registered group names) registered on the User Group Profile screen and Deny Login.

4. The Information dialog box appears. Click OK button.

Figure 4-128 Information Dialog Box

5. The RADIUS Setting window updates the information. Confirm the displayed
RADIUS information.

Figure 4-129 RADIUS Setting Window

This step ends the procedure.

NWD-115476-06E Operation
Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only

NE Setup 4-83

(2) RADIUS Server

Procedure 4-29

1. In the WebLCT menu frame, expand User Account / Security Setting,


then its submenu Security Management to select RADIUS Setting.

2. The RADIUS Setting window appears. Click RADIUS Server No..


Click RADIUS.

Figure 4-130 User Authentication Configuration

3. The RADIUS Server Setting option window appears. Enter the proper value
for each parameter.

Figure 4-131 RADIUS Server Option Window

Table 4-30 Privilege ID

Item Parameter Description

IP Address x.x.x.x Specify the destination IP address of RADIUS Server


Port No. Range: 1 to 65535 Set Port No. of RADIUS Server
Encryption User Communication with a shared key of the outside authentication.
Method CHAP MD5 with a shared key of the outside authentication.
Secret Key 8 to 63 characters Setting of Secret Key used for the outside authentication.

4. Click Set Secret Key in the RADIUS Server Setting option window.

Operation NWD-115476-06E
Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only

4-84 NE Setup

5. The Set Secret Key option window appears. Enter the same passwords into
New Secret Key and Re-Enter boxes, and then click OK button.

Figure 4-132 Set Secret Key Option Window

6. The window returns to RADIUS Server Setting option window. Click OK


button to close the dialog box.

Figure 4-133 RADIUS Server Option Window

7. The Information dialog box appears. Click OK button.

Figure 4-134 Information Dialog Box

8. The RADIUS Setting window updates the information. Confirm the displayed
RADIUS Server informatio.

Figure 4-135 RADIUS Setting


This step is the end of the procedure.

NWD-115476-06E Operation
Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only

NE Setup 4-85

(3) Clear RADIUS Server

Procedure 4-30

1. In the WebLCT menu frame, expand User Account / Security Setting,


then its submenu Security Management to select RADIUS Setting.

2. The RADIUS Setting window appears. Click Clear RADIUS Server button.

Clear RADIUS Server

Figure 4-136 RADIUS Setting Window

3. The Clear SNMP Server option window appears. Select the RADIUS Server
No. from the drop-down list, and then click OK button

Figure 4-137 Clear RADIUS Server Option window

Operation NWD-115476-06E
Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only

4-86 NE Setup

6. The Confirmation dialog box appears. Click OK button.

Figure 4-138 Confirmation Dialog Box

7. The Information dialog box appears. Click OK button.

Figure 4-139 Information Dialog Box

8. The RADIUS Setting window updates the information. Confirm the displayed
RADIUS Server information.

Figure 4-140 RADIUS Setting Window

This step is the end of the procedure.

NWD-115476-06E Operation
Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only

NE Setup 4-87

4.4 Register NE Configuration

4.4.1 Easy Setup Wizard


The Easy Setup Wizard helps a user to make a faster and easier way of provisioning
the equipment, which is available at initially powering on.

The Easy Setup Wizard supports the following operations:

 Easy Setup

Settings for NE Name, Switch Group (System structure) and guide to other
setups. The Easy Setup is a wizard that guides a user to set up the basic
configuration following the appropriate sequences.

 MODEM Setup

Settings for Channel Spacing, Mode, E1/STM-1 Mapping, and RF Frequency


regarding Radio.

 AMR / Radio Mapping Setup

Settings for AMR range and E1 and STM-1 mapping

 Management Setup

Settings for IP address, Subnet mask and default gateway for NE.

 TDM Setup

Settings for TDM cross-connections.

 ETH Setup

Settings for VLAN Services

 PWE Setup

Settings for TDM PWE (SAToP) function

4.4.1.1 Easy Setup

The Easy Setup is a wizard that guides a user to set up the basic configuration
following the appropriate sequences.

Operation NWD-115476-06E
Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only

4-88 NE Setup

Procedure 4-31

1. In the WebLCT menu frame, expand Easy Setup Wizard to select Easy
Setup.

2. The Easy Setup window appears. Click Setup button.

Setup button

Figure 4-141 Easy Setup Window

NWD-115476-06E Operation
Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only

NE Setup 4-89

3. The Easy Setup - Step1 option window appears. Enter the equipment name
then click Next button.

Next button

Figure 4-142 Easy Setup - Step1 Option Window

NOTE: The display on the left shows the current setup, while that on the
right is for a user to edit the configuration.

Table 4-31 Easy Setup Parameters

Parameter Value/Description

Equipment Name 1 to 32 characters long

Operation NWD-115476-06E
Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only

4-90 NE Setup

4. The Easy Setup – Step2 window appears. Assign an appropriate value to


each parameter, then click Next button. Users can also click Auto Detect
button to automatically detect a package currently mounted.

NOTE: STM-1A Package is operated as either the Through mode or the


channelized mode. Select either mode in this step. The Through mode is
selected as default by the Auto Detect button.

Next button

Figure 4-143 Easy Setup – Step2 Window

NWD-115476-06E Operation
Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only

NE Setup 4-91

5. The Easy Setup - Step3 option window appears. The appearance of Step 3
option window depends on the MODEM configuration:

(1) 1+0,

(2) two (1+0)

(3) 1+1 Hot Standby

(4) 1+1 Twin Path

(5) 1+0 XPIC

(6) 1+1 Hot Standby XPIC (Master)

(7) 1+1 Hot Standby XPIC (Slave)

(8) 1+1 Twin Path XPIC (Master)

(9) 1+1 Twin Path XPIC (Slave)

Next button

Figure 4-144 Easy Setup - Step3 Window

6. Check the appropriate SW/XPIC GRP and select 1+1 Hot Standby from the
drop-down list.

7. Click NEXT button when completed.

Operation NWD-115476-06E
Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only

4-92 NE Setup

8. The Easy Setup - Step4 option window appears. The modified parameters are
indicated in the blue fields. Confirm the values of parameters, and then click OK
button.

OK button
Figure 4-145 Easy Setup - Setp4 Option Window

9. The Warning dialog box appears. Click OK button.

Figure 4-146 Warning Dialog Box

During the process, a progress bar appears.

10. When the process is completed, the Information dialog box appears. Click OK
button.

Figure 4-147 Information Dialog Box

11. The MODEM Setup wizard appears. Proceed to the next sub section.

This step ends the procedure.

NWD-115476-06E Operation
Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only

NE Setup 4-93

4.4.1.2 MODEM Setup

Procedure 4-32

1. After the Easy Setup wizard is completed or MODEM Setup is selected from
the Easy Setup Wizard sub menu, the MODEM Setup - Step1 option
window appears. The sample windows here show examples specify8ing 1+1
Hot Standby System. The setting items are same for all Systems.

2. Assign an appropriate value to each parameter.

Next button

Figure 4-148 MODEM Setup - Step1 Option Window

Operation NWD-115476-06E
Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only

4-94 NE Setup

Table 4-32 Modem Setup Parameters

Parameter Value Description

Channel Spacing 7 / 14/ 28/ 40/ 56 [MHz] Specify the radio channel spacing

Reference QPSK Specify the reference modulation from the list


Modulation 16/ 32/ 64/ 128/ 256/ 512/ 1024/
2048 [QAM]

Radio Mode High Capacity / High System Refer to the same item in Radio Configuration.
Gain

E1 Mapping 0 to 152 [CH] Specify the number of E1 CH for mapping. (The


number of CH should not exceed the limitation
of the specified modulation.)

STM-1 Mapping 0 to 2 [CH] Specify the number of STM-1 CH for mapping.

ETH Bandwidth [Mbps] Read only, the value is automatically calculated.

TX RF Frequency [MHz] Set transmit frequency

RX RF Frequency [MHz] Set receive frequency

Frame ID 1 to 32 Set frame ID

TX Power Control MTPC / ATPC Set transmit power control mode

Radio Traffic Not used / Radio GRP Refer to the same item in Radio Configuration.
Aggregation

NOTES:
1. In 1+1 Hot Standby system, the same band must be set to both the ODUs.
2. In 1+1 Twin Path system, a user must specify a different TX RF frequency for each modem.

NWD-115476-06E Operation
Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only

NE Setup 4-95

3. Click Next button when completed.

4. The MODEM Setup - Step2 option window appears. The modified parameters
are indicated in the blue fields. Confirm the values of parameters, and then click
OK button.

Figure 4-149 MODEM Setup - Step2 Window

5. Information dialog box appears. Click OK button.

Figure 4-150 Information Dialog Box

6. Easy Setup Wizard – AMR/Radio Mapping Setup wizard appears.


Proceed to the next sub section.

This step ends the procedure.

Operation NWD-115476-06E
Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only

4-96 NE Setup

4.4.1.3 AMR / Radio Mapping Setup

Procedure 4-33

1. After the MODEM Setup wizard is completed, the AMR/Radio Mapping


Setup window appears.

Figure 4-151 AMR Setting Window

2. Step1 AMR Operation option window appears. Click AMR Mode radio
button.

NWD-115476-06E Operation
Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only

NE Setup 4-97

Figure 4-152 Step1 AMR Operation Box

3. Specify AMR range by clicking the proper radio buttons for reference
modulation (QPSK to 512QAM, Used). Click Next button.
Table 4-33 AMR Operation

Parameter Value Description

AMR AMR Mode Enable AMR (Adaptive Modulation Radio) function.


Operation
Non Operation Disable AMR function

AMR Range QPSK Data transmission for 1 time is 4 values (2 bits)

16 QAM Data transmission for 1 time is 16 values (4 bits)

32 QAM Data transmission for 1 time is 32 values (5 bits)

64 QAM Data transmission for 1 time is 64 values (6 bits)

128 QAM Data transmission for 1 time is 128 values (7 bits)

256 QAM Data transmission for 1 time is 256 values (8 bits)

512 QAM Data transmission for 1 time is 512 values (9 bits)

1024 QAM Data transmission for 1 time is 1024 values (10 bits)

2048 QAM Data transmission for 1 time is 2048 values (11 bits)

Operation NWD-115476-06E
Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only

4-98 NE Setup

4. Step2 E1 / STM-1 Mapping option window appears. Specify E1 (and/or


STM-1) mapping, and then click the Next button.

Figure 4-153 Step2 Window

5. Step3 Setting Confirmation Screen window appears. Confirm that the


fields of modified parameters change to blue, and then click OK button.

Figure 4-154 Step3 Window

NWD-115476-06E Operation
Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only

NE Setup 4-99

6. The Warning dialog box appears. Click OK button.

Figure 4-155 Warning Dialog Box

7. The Information box appears. Click OK button.

Figure 4-156 Information Dialog Box

8. The Management Setup wizard appears. Proceed to the next sub section.

This step ends the procedure.

Operation NWD-115476-06E
Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only

4-100 NE Setup

4.4.1.4 Management Setup

NOTE: When the Warning dialog box appears, click Maintenance button on
top of the LCT window to put the service into the maintenance mode.

Procedure 4-34

1. After the AMR Setup wizard is completed or Management Setup is selected


from the Easy Setup Wizard sub menu, the Management Setup option
window appears.

2. Assign an appropriate value to each parameter, then click OK button.

Figure 4-157 Management Setup Option Window

Table 4-34 Management Network Configuration

Parameter Value Description

IP Address Setting (Bridge1)


IP Address x.x.x.x Enter IP Address of NMS Port
Subnet Mask x.x.x.x Enter Subnet Mask of NMS Port
Default Gateway x.x.x.x Enter Default Gateway IP address
NMS Port Setting
Yes Use NMS Port (for root NE only)
Connect NMS Port to NMS No Not to use NMS Port

3. Information dialog box appears. Click OK button.

Figure 4-158 Information Dialog Box

4. The TDM Setup wizard appears. Proceed to the next sub section.

This step ends the procedure.

NWD-115476-06E Operation
Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only

NE Setup 4-101

4.4.1.5 TDM Setup

Procedure 4-35

1. After the Management Setup wizard is completed or TDM Setup is selected


from the Easy Setup Wizard sub menu, the TDM Setup Wizard window
appears.

2. Click Setup button.

Setup button

Figure 4-159 TDM Setup Wizard Window

3. The TDM Setup window appears. Click Add More XC button.

Add More XC button

Figure 4-160 TDM Setup Window

Operation NWD-115476-06E
Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only

4-102 NE Setup

4. The TDM XC Configuration window appears. Specify an appropriate value to


each parameter, and then click OK button.

Figure 4-161 TDM XC Configuration Window

5. The TDM XC Service Configuration List window appears. Click OK button.

OK button

Figure 4-162 Service Configuration List Window

6. Information dialog box appears Click OK button.

Figure 4-163 Information Dialog Box

NOTE: Change E1 Port usage to enable the E1 interfaces.

7. The ETH Setup wizard appears. Proceed to the next sub section.

This step ends the procedure.

NWD-115476-06E Operation
Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only

NE Setup 4-103

4.4.1.6 ETH Setup

Procedure 4-36

1. After the TDM Setup wizard is completed or ETH Setup is selected from the
Easy Setup Wizard sub menu, the ETH Setup wizard appears.

2. In the E-Line Service Configuration option window, specify an appropriate


value to each parameter, then click Next button.

Next button

Figure 4-164 E-Line Service Configuration Window

Operation NWD-115476-06E
Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only

4-104 NE Setup

Table 4-35 E-Line Service Configuration Parameters

Parameter Value Description

VLAN ID 1 to 4094 Specify an ID of VLAN

VALN Service Name 1 to 32 Character Specify the service name of VLAN

Service Type EPL Refer to Note 1

EVPL Refer to Note 2

Enable ETH Port Check / Uncheck Enables ETH port communication after
Usage setting of Easy Setup
(Default: Uncheck)

NOTES:
1. EPL (Ethernet Private Line)
EPL is a data service defined by the Metro Ethernet Forum, providing a
point-to-point Ethernet connection between a pair of dedicated
User-Network Interfaces (UNIs), with a high degree of transparency.
EPL service is specified using an E-Line service type, with an expectation of
low frame delay, frame delay variation and frame loss ratio. EPL is
implemented as a point-to-point Ethernet Virtual Connection (EVC), which,
unlike Ethernet Virtual Private Line (EVPL), does not allow for Service
Multiplexing, i.e., a dedicated UNI (physical interface) is used to accept all
service frames and to map them to a single EVC (a.k.a. All-to-one bundling).
Due to a high degree of transparency, EPL is often used to provide
point-to-point Transparent LAN Service (TLS), where the Service Frame’s
header and payload are identical at both the source and destination UNI.
EPL is not fully transparent, as it must filter IEEE 802.3x Pause frames.
2. EVPL (Ethernet Virtual Private Line)
Ethernet Virtual Private Line (EVPL) is a data service defined by the Metro
Ethernet Forum, providing a point-to-point Ethernet connection between a
pair of User-Network Interfaces (UNIs).
EVPL service is specified using an E-Line service type, very similar to a
Ethernet Private Line (EPL) service, via a point-to-point Ethernet Virtual
Connection (EVC). However, unlike EPL, EVPL allows for Service
Multiplexing, i.e., multiple EVCs or Ethernet services per UNI.
Other difference between the EVPL and EPL is the degree of transparency -
while EPL is highly transparent, filtering only the Pause frames, EVPL is
required to either peer or drop most of the Layer 2 Control Protocols.

NWD-115476-06E Operation
Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only

NE Setup 4-105

3. The E-LAN Service Configuration window appears. Click OK button.

OK button

Figure 4-165 E-LAN Service Configuration Window

Operation NWD-115476-06E
Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only

4-106 NE Setup

Table 4-36 E-LAN Service Configuration Parameters

Parameter Value Description

VLAN ID 1 to 4094 Specify an ID of VLAN

VALN Service 1 to 32 Character Specify the service name of VLAN


Name

Service Type EP-LAN Refer to NOTE 1

EVP-LAN Refer to NOTE 2

Enable ETH Port Checked / unchecked Enables ETH port communication after
Usage setting of Easy Setup

NOTES
1. Ethernet Private LAN (EPLAN) is a Metro Ethernet service type defined by
the Metro Ethernet Forum.
Because E-LAN services implement multipoint-to-multipoint Ethernet virtual
connections (EVC), multiple locations can be interconnected using an
EPLAN service. However, each location can be a member of one and only
one EVC. If a given location requires connection to a second EVC, it will
require a second UNI.
Because there is only one EVC per UNI, the EVC can be invisible to the
customer (e.g., the customer will not see an 802.1p VLAN tag).

2. Ethernet Virtual Private LAN (EVPLAN) is a Metro Ethernet service type


defined by the Metro Ethernet Forum.
Because E-LAN services implement multipoint-to-multipoint Ethernet virtual
connections (EVC), this service provides Metro Ethernet with a multipoint
service that can support multiple overlapping closed-user groups. For
example, a district school system with elementary, middle, and high schools
could put on of the high schools on one EVC, all of the middle schools on a
second EVC, and all of the elementary schools on a third EVC, using
EPLAN services at each school. The district data center and administrative
offices could have EVPLAN service and be made a member of all three
EVCs without the need for three UNIs.
Because there are multiple EVCs per UNI in an EVPLAN service, the EVCs
must be visible to the customer. To do this, the service provider expects
customer traffic to have an appropriate 802.1p VLAN tag when submitted.
The network will also deliver tagged traffic to that location so that the
customer knows which EVC traffic is arriving from.

NWD-115476-06E Operation
Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only

NE Setup 4-107

4. Warning dialog box appears. Click OK button.

Figure 4-166 Warning Dialog Box

5. Information dialog box appears. Click OK button.

Figure 4-167 Information Dialog Box

6. The ETH Setup window updates the information.

Figure 4-168 ETH Setup Window

This step ends the procedure.

Operation NWD-115476-06E
Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only

4-108 NE Setup

4.4.1.7 PWE Setup

Procedure 4-37

1. After the ETH Setup wizard is completed or PWE Setup is selected from the
Easy Setup Wizard sub menu, the PWE Setup Wizard window appears.

2. Click Setup button.


Setup button

Figure 4-169 PWE Setup Window

3. The PWE Connection Setting option window appears. Specify an


appropriate value to each parameter, and then click Next button.

Figure 4-170 PWE Connection Setting Option Window

Table 4-37 PWE Configuration Parameters

Parameter Value Description

Service Name 1 to 32 Character Specify the service name of PWE

NWD-115476-06E Operation
Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only

NE Setup 4-109

4. The PWE Parameter Setting option window appears. Specify an appropriate


value to each parameter, and then click Next button.

Figure 4-171 PWE Parameter Setting Option Window

Table 4-38 PWE Configuration Parameters

Parameter Value Description

Jitter buffer 2ms, 4ms, 8ms, Jitter Buffer size (8ms setting value means ±4ms
16ms, 32ms, 64ms, Jitter Buffer)
128ms,

PWE Clock Mode ACR, NE Clock, Transmit TDM synchronization source clock select
Sync E1
ACR: Adaptive Clock Recovery

NE Clock: NE Clock

Sync E1: recovered clock of the E1 port (loop timing)

Destination MAC Opposing MSE-A or Value of display to PWE setup window or Broadcast
Broadcast Address MAC Address (ff:ff:ff:ff:ff:ff)
Address

VLAN ID 1 to 4094 Specify an ID of VLAN

ECID 1 to 1048575 Specify an ID of PWE

Operation NWD-115476-06E
Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only

4-110 NE Setup

5. The Setting Confirmation Screen appears. Check the Enable E1 CH / ETH


Port Usage box and OK button.

Figure 4-172 Setting Confirmation Screen window

6. Warning dialog box appears. Click OK button.

Figure 4-173 Warning Dialog Box

During the process, a progress bar appears.

7. Information box appears. Click OK button.

Figure 4-174 Information Dialog Box

NWD-115476-06E Operation
Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only

NE Setup 4-111

8. The PWE Setup window updates the information.

Figure 4-175 PWE Setup window

This step ends the procedure.

NOTE: PWE path is generated only by the unconfigured XC ports.

Operation NWD-115476-06E
Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only

4-112 NE Setup

4.4.2 Equipment Setup


The Equipment Setup provides more detailed settings than those done by the Easy
Setup Wizard. Some parameters are included in the Easy Setup Wizard.

 Equipment Configuration
Setting for NE Name, Switch Group (System structure)

 MODEM Migration

This process is required when updating a MODEM-A package to a MODEM-EA


package.

 Radio Configuration
Setting for Channel Spacing, Mode, E1/STM-1 Mapping, RF Frequency for
Radio.

 AMR Configuration
Setting for the mode type and range for AMR

 Network Management Configuration


Setting for IP Address of each port and functions that mounted at the front face
of iPASOLINK

NWD-115476-06E Operation
Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only

NE Setup 4-113

4.4.2.1 Equipment Configuration

Procedure 4-38

1. In the WebLCT menu frame, expand Equipment Setup to select Equipment


Configuration.

2. The Equipment Configuration window appears. Click Setup button.


Setup button

Figure 4-176 Equipment Configuration Window

Operation NWD-115476-06E
Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only

4-114 NE Setup

3. The Step1 option window appears. Enter an Equipment Name, and then click
Next button.

Next button

Figure 4-177 Step1 Window

NOTE: The display on the left shows the current setup, while that on the
right is for a user to edit the configuration.

Table 4-39 Equipment Configuration Step 1 Parameter

Parameter Value/Description

Equipment Name 1 to 32 characters

NWD-115476-06E Operation
Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only

NE Setup 4-115

4. The Step2 option window appears. Assign an appropriate value to each


parameter, then click Next button. Users can also click Auto Detect button to
automatically detect a package that is currently mounted.

NOTE: STM-1A Package is operated as either the Through mode or the


channelized mode. Select either mode in this step. The Through
mode is selected as default by the Auto Detect button.

Auto Detect button

Next button

Figure 4-178 Step2 Window

Operation NWD-115476-06E
Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only

4-116 NE Setup

5. The Step3 window appears. Step 3 window depends on the MODEM


configuration: (1) 1+0 System, (2) 1+1 Hot Standby System, (3) 1+1 Twin Path
System, etc.

(1) 1+0 System

Uncheck the SW / XPIC GRP (Slot01/02) check box.

Next button

Figure 4-179 Step3 Window

(2) Other than 1+0 System

Check the proper SW/XPIC GRP and select the desired configuration from the
drop-down list.

6. Click Next button after the selection.

NWD-115476-06E Operation
Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only

NE Setup 4-117

7. The Step4 Setting Confirmation Screen window appears. Confirm that the
fields of setup parameters change to blue, then click OK button.

OK button
Figure 4-180 Step4 Window (1+0 System)

8. Warning dialog box appears. Click OK button.

Figure 4-181 Warning Dialog Box

9. During the process, a progress bar appears.

10. When the process is completed, the Information dialog box appears. Click OK
button.

Figure 4-182 Information Dialog Box

Operation NWD-115476-06E
Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only

4-118 NE Setup

11. The Equipment Configuration window updates the information.

Figure 4-183 Equipment Configuration Window (2x(1+0) System)

This step ends the procedure.

NWD-115476-06E Operation
Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only

NE Setup 4-119

4.4.2.2 MODEM Migration

Procedure 4-39

1. In the WebLCT menu frame, expand Equipment Setup to select MODEM


Migration.

2. The MODEM Migration window appears. Click MODEM Migration button.

Figure 4-184 MODEM Migration Window

Operation NWD-115476-06E
Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only

4-120 NE Setup

3. The Step1 option window appears. Assign an appropriate value to each slot,
then click Next button. Users can also click Auto Migration button to
automatically detect a package that is currently mounted.

Figure 4-185 Step1 Window

4. The Step2 Setting Confirmation Screen window appears. IF the


Migration Status is Not Ready, turn off the MODEM. Click Refresh
button.

Figure 4-186 Step2 Window

NWD-115476-06E Operation
Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only

NE Setup 4-121

5. The window returns to Step2 Setting Confirmation Screen window.


Confirm the Migration Status is Ready, then Click OK button.

Figure 4-187 Step2 Window

6. Warning dialog box appears. Click OK button.

Figure 4-188 Warning Dialog Box

7. When the process is completed, the Information dialog box appears. Click OK
button.

Figure 4-189 Information Dialog Box

8. Replace the MODEM package to update.

This step ends the procedure.

Operation NWD-115476-06E
Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only

4-122 NE Setup

4.4.2.3 Radio Configuration

The example used in the following procedure is the 1+0 System. The setting items
are basically same for all 1+0, 1+1 Hot Standby, 1+1 Twin Path Systems, etc.

Procedure 4-40

1. In the WebLCT menu frame, expand Equipment Setup to select Radio


Configuration.

2. The Radio Configuration window appears. Click Setup button.

Figure 4-190 Radio Configuration Window

NWD-115476-06E Operation
Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only

NE Setup 4-123

3. The Step1 option window appears. Specify all necessary parameters, and then
click Next button.

Figure 4-191 Step1 Window

Operation NWD-115476-06E
Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only

4-124 NE Setup

Table 4-40 Radio Configuration Parameters

Parameter Value Description

Channel Spacing 7 / 14/ 28/ 40/ 56 Specify the radio channel spacing *
[MHz]

Reference QPSK / 16/ 32/ 64/ Specify the reference modulation from the list *
Modulation 128/ 256/ 512/
1024/ 2048 [QAM]
Radio Mode High Capacity / High System Gain can be selected when the channel
High System Gain spacing is 28 MHz or more.

E1 Mapping 0 to 152 [CH] Specify the number of E1 CH for mapping. (The number of
CH should not exceed the limitation of the specified
modulation.)

STM-1 Mapping 0 to 2 [CH] Set STM-1 CH to the specify frequency function

ETH Bandwidth [Mbps] Read only, the value is automatically calculated.

TX RF Frequency [MHz] Setup transmit RF Frequency

RX RF Frequency [MHz] Setup receive RF Frequency

Frame ID 1 to 32 Setup Frame ID

TX Power Control MTPC/ ATPC Set transmit power control mode.

Radio Traffic Not Used / This function is available when the MODEM configuration is
Aggregation Radio GRP1 2(1+0 System) or 1+0 XPIC System. When Radio GRP1
is selected, radio LAG can be configured. Refer to 5.1.2.7
Link Aggregation.

Support Version Version 2 (fixed)

Distribution Packet Layer / This function is available when the RTA is set to Radio
Mode Physical Layer GRP1. When Packet Layer or Physical Layer is selected,
RTA (Packet Layer) or RTA (Physical Layer) is configured,
respectively.

NOTES: According to the S/W License, Channel Spacing and Reference


Modulation may not be selectable.

In 1+1 Hot Standby system, the same band must be set to both
the ODUs.

In the 1+1 Twin Path system, a user must specify a different TX


RF frequency for each modem.

NWD-115476-06E Operation
Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only

NE Setup 4-125

4. The Step2 Setting Confirmation Screen window appears. Confirm that the
fields of setup parameters change to blue then click OK button.

Figure 4-192 Step2 Window

5. The Information box appears. Click OK button.

Figure 4-193 Information Dialog Box

Operation NWD-115476-06E
Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only

4-126 NE Setup

6. The Radio Configuration window updates the information.

Figure 4-194 Radio Configuration Window

This step ends the procedure.

NWD-115476-06E Operation
Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only

NE Setup 4-127

4.4.2.4 AMR Configuration

Procedure 4-41

1. In the WebLCT menu frame, expand Equipment Setup to select AMR


Configuration.

2. The AMR Configuration window appears. Click the Setup button.

Figure 4-195 AMR Configuration Window

Operation NWD-115476-06E
Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only

4-128 NE Setup

3. The Step1 option window appears. Specify parameters in the New Setting
options:

 Click AMR Mode radio button to enable this option.

 Select other modulations to be used during AMR operation by clicking its/their


Used radio button(s).

Figure 4-196 Step1 AMR Operation Option Window (example: MODEM1)

Table 4-41 AMR Operation

Parameter Value Description

AMR Operation AMR Mode Enable AMR (Adaptive Modulation Radio)


Non function.AMR function
Disable
AMR Range Operation
QPSK Data transmission for 1 time is 4 values(2 bits)
16 QAM Data transmission for 1 time is 16 values(4 bits)
32 QAM Data transmission for 1 time is 32 values(5 bits)
1024 QAM and 2048 64 QAM Data transmission for 1 time is 64 values(6 bits)
QAM are available for
128 QAM Data transmission for 1 time is 128 values(7 bits)
MODEM-EA only.
256 QAM Data transmission for 1 time is 256 values(8 bits)
512 QAM Data transmission for 1 time is 512 values(9 bits)
1024 QAM Data transmission for 1 time is 1024 values(10
2048 QAM bits) transmission for 1 time is 2048 values(11
Data
bits)
NOTE: A modulation highlighted by light green is the reference modulation,
which is specified by the Radio Configuration.

NWD-115476-06E Operation
Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only

NE Setup 4-129

4. Click Next button when completed.

5. Step2 option window appears. Specify parameters in the New Setting options:

 Enter priorities to modulations under the E1 Mapping for the use during the
AMR operation.

 For the STM-1 through mode, select a modulation scheme to be used during
AMR operation, and enter the available radio capacity. The remaining capacity
of Ethernet bandwidth is calculated automatically.

Figure 4-197 Step2 Option Window (MODEM1)


Table 4-42 E1 Mapping

Parameter Value Description

E1 Mapping QPSK Select following items.


16 QAM
32 QAM - E1 Mapping (Range: 0 - 152)
64 QAM - STM-1 Mapping (Range: 0 - 2)
128 QAM - ETH Bandwidth is calculated from E1 and STM-1 mapping
256 QAM
512 QAM
1024 QAM 1024 QAM and 2048 QAM are MODEM-EA only.
2048 QAM

Operation NWD-115476-06E
Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only

4-130 NE Setup

6. Click Next button when completed.

7. The Step3 Setting Confirmation Screen option window appears. Confirm


that the fields of modified parameters change to blue, and then click OK button.

Figure 4-198 Step3 Option Window

8. The Warning dialog box appears. Click OK button.

Figure 4-199 Warning Dialog Box

9. The Information dialog box appears. Click OK button.

Figure 4-200 Information Dialog Box

NWD-115476-06E Operation
Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only

NE Setup 4-131

10. The Step 3 Setting Confirmation Screen window updates the information.

Figure 4-201 Step 3 Setting Confirmation Screen Window

This step ends the procedure.

Operation NWD-115476-06E
Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only

4-132 NE Setup

4.4.2.5 Network Management Configuration

This menu allows a user to check and configure the network management parameters
of NEs to be managed by the network management system.

 General Setting
In order to connect the iPASOLINK to NMS, execute the setting to use or not to
use the NMS Port, and assign the IP Address.

 General Setting (Detail)


Setting for IP Address of each internal port (NE2, Inband Management VLAN)
and NE Branch (NMS/NE/MODEM)

 Routing Setting
Configure the static route information.

 IP Access Control Setting


This setting allows a user to filter IP packets on both the incoming and outgoing
interfaces. The filter can be effective on all the interfaces except Bridge, LCT
Port, NE2 Port and Inband Management VLAN.

 DHCP Server / Relay Setting

This setting allows a user to give out IP addresses to a user port. Via inband
VLAN.

DHCP Server: up to 3 IP subnets


DHCP Relay: up to 16 IP subnets

 Equipment Cascade Setting

This setting allows the PNMSj to manage a number of iPASOLINK IDUs as one
NE group, useful for 1+1 XPIC configuration with two IDUs.Refer to the manual
of PNMSj.

NWD-115476-06E Operation
Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only

NE Setup 4-133

(1) General Setting

Procedure 4-42

11. In the WebLCT menu frame, expand Equipment Setup, then its submenu
Network Management Configuration to select General Setting.

12. The General Setting window appears. Click Setup button.

Figure 4-202 General Setting Window

13. The General Setting option window appears. Specify parameters:

Figure 4-203 General Setting Option Window

Table 4-43 General Setting

Parameter Value Description

IP Address Setting (Bridge1)


IP Address x.x.x.x Enter IP Address of NMS port
Subnet Mask x.x.x.x Enter Subnet Mask of NMS port
Default Gateway x.x.x.x Enter Default Gateway IP address
NMS Port Setting
Connect NMS Port to NMS Yes Use NMS port
No Not to use MNS port

Operation NWD-115476-06E
Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only

4-134 NE Setup

14. Click OK button when completed.

15. Information dialog box appears. Click OK button.

Figure 4-204 Information Dialog Box

16. The General Setting window updates the information. Confirm that all the
parameters are set.

Figure 4-205 General Setting Window

This step ends the procedure.

NWD-115476-06E Operation
Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only

NE Setup 4-135

(2) General Setting (Details)

Procedure 4-43

1. In the WebLCT menu frame, expand Equipment Setup, then its submenu
Network Management Configuration to select General Setting (Detail).

2. The General Setting (Detail) window appears. Click Setup button.

Figure 4-206 General Setting (Detail) Window

Operation NWD-115476-06E
Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only

4-136 NE Setup

3. The General Setting (Detail) option window appears. Assign an appropriate


value to each parameter.

Figure 4-207 General Setting (Detail) Option Window

NWD-115476-06E Operation
Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only

NE Setup 4-137

Table 4-44 NE2 / Inband Management VLAN / Ethernet Port Parameters

Parameter Value Description

NE2 Port Setting


NE2 Port IP Address x.x.x.x Enter IP Address of NE2 Port when NE2 (RJ-45) Port is
used for serial connection to other PASOLINK.
NE2 Port Usage Used Use NE2 port
Not Used Not to use NE2 port
NE2 Port Speed 9600 Specify the line speed of NE2 Port.
19200
Inband Management VLAN Setting (Inband Management 1-16)
Management VLAN Used Use/ Not use Inband Management VLAN
Usage Not Used
VLAN ID 1 to 4094 VLAN ID of the Inband Management VLAN
(Default values are set to each VLAN, overwrite default
values)
CoS 0 to 7 Give a priority to L2 frames in the 802.1q VLAN tag
sent from the IDU internal CPU.
Ethernet Port Setting (NMS / NE1 Port)
Port Mode User Port Use as User (Data) Port
(NE1) Management Port Use as Management Port
Usage Used Use Ethernet port
Not Used Not to use Ethernet port
Auto Negotiation Enabled Enable the Auto Negotiation of Ethernet Port
Disabled Disable the Auto Negotiation of Ethernet port
Auto Discovery Setting
Discovery Usage Used Enable/Disable search of the network access
machinery using Ethernet connect
Not Used
LLDP Mode Standard Enable working with standard LLDP MAC
Proprietary MAC Enable working with NEC Proprietary LLDP MAC. This
setting is useful when other layer 2 switch that discards
standard LLDP frames, and connects two iPASOLINK
management port.
NE Branch Setting
Bridge Number Select the Bridge Number
Default Gateway x.x.x.x Input the Default Gateway
Bridge IP Address x.x.x.x Input IP Address of Inband Management VLAN

Assign an IP address for each item so as to configure a


different sub network. NOTE 1.
Bridge Subnet Mask x.x.x.x Input Subnet Mask of Inband Management VLAN

Operation NWD-115476-06E
Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only

4-138 NE Setup

Table 4-48 NE2/Inband Management VLAN/Ethernet Port Parameter (2/2)

Item Parameter Description

M-Plane Bandwidth Limitation


Bandwidth Limitation Enable Total bandwidth of frames transmitted from CPU
Disable to radio ports. NOTE 1
Bandwidth [kbps] 500 - 10000
M-Plane Priority
CoS 5 to 7 Priority of transmit frame (Default: 7)
Note 3, Note 4
NMS Port Setting
Connect NMS Port Yes Use / Not use NMS Port
to NMS No
LCT Port Setting
Restrict LCT Any Connection from Local/Remote to LCT Port
Connection Only to Local NE only connection from Local to LCT Port

NOTES:
1. When this function is enabled, bandwidth of traffic from CPU is reserved.

2. Even as the ETH side is 4-Class mode, the M-Plane Mode can be selected
from 5 to 7.

4-Class: M-Plane (7, 6) > User (3), M-Plane (5) > User (2)

3. In the case the radio transmission band is occupied by delay sensitive user
traffic, such as PWE, decrease the M-Plane Priority even if the Bandwidth
Limitation is disabled.

4. Click the items on the NE Branch Setting field. The Bridge No. Setting box
appears. Select the bridge No. from the drop- down list and then click OK
button.

Figure 4-208 General Setting Option Window (Specify Bridge No.)

NWD-115476-06E Operation
Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only

NE Setup 4-139

5. The window returns to General Setting (Detail) option window. In the NE


Branch Setting options, click a number under the Bridge No.

Item

Bridge
No.

Figure 4-209 General Setting (Detail) Option Window

6. The Bridge IP Address Setting option window appears. Input the IP address
and the subnet mask, and then click OK button.

Figure 4-210 General Setting Option Window (Specify Bridge IP Address)

7. The window returns to General Setting (Detail) option window.

8. Click OK button after configuring the parameters.

Operation NWD-115476-06E
Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only

4-140 NE Setup

9. The Information dialog box appears. Click OK button.

Figure 4-211 Information Dialog Box

10. The General Setting (Detail) window updates the information. Confirm that
all the parameters are set.

This step ends the procedure.

NOTE: When the NE is configured as the “Root NE” for the


PNMSj, set the bridge No. of the modem towards
downstream to “1”, and set the bridge No. except “1”
towards upstream interface (ex: NMS port).

Root NE
PNMSj

Modem 1
NMS
Bridge 1
Bridge 2 Primary IP
Secondary IP

NWD-115476-06E Operation
Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only

NE Setup 4-141

(3) Routing Setting

This operation specifies the static route for the particular network or IP address.

(a) Add Routing Setting

Procedure 4-44

1. Click the Maintenance button on top of the LCT window to put the system into
the maintenance mode.

2. In the WebLCT menu frame, expand Equipment Setup, then its submenu
Network Management Configuration to select Routing Setting.

3. The Routing Setting window appears. Click Setup button.

Figure 4-212 Routing Setting Window

4. The Routing Setting option window appears. Click Add button.

Figure 4-213 Routing Setting Option Widnow

5. The Routing Setting (Add) option window appears. Enter the IP Address,
Subnet Mask address, and Gateway address, and then click OK button.

Operation NWD-115476-06E
Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only

4-142 NE Setup

Figure 4-214 Routing Setting (Add) Option Window

6. The window returns to Routing Setting option window. Confirm that the
newly added route information is displayed.

Figure 4-215 Routing Setting Option Window

7. Click OK button when completed.

8. The Confirmation dialog box appears. Click OK button.

Figure 4-216 Confirmation Dialog Box

NWD-115476-06E Operation
Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only

NE Setup 4-143

9. The Information dialog box appears. Click OK button.

Figure 4-217 Information Dialog Box

10. The Routing Setting window updates the information. Confirm that the newly
added route information displayed.

Figure 4-218 Routing Setting Window

11. When Routing Setting is completed, click Maintenance button on top of the
WebLCT window to exit from the maintenance mode.

12. Confirm that the MAINT changes from yellow to white.

This step ends the procedure.

Operation NWD-115476-06E
Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only

4-144 NE Setup

(b) Modify Routing Setting

Procedure 4-45

1. Click the Maintenance button on top of the WenLCT window to put the
system into the maintenance mode.

2. In the WebLCT menu frame, expand Equipment Setup, then its submenu
Network Management Configuration to select Routing Setting.

3. The Routing Setting window appears. Click Setup button.

Figure 4-219 Routing Setting Window

4. The Routing Setting option window appears. Click an IP Address to be


modified.

Figure 4-220 Routing Setting Option Window

NWD-115476-06E Operation
Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only

NE Setup 4-145

5. The Routing Setting (Modify) option window appears. Modify the IP


Address, subnet mask and gateway, then click OK button.

Figure 4-221 Routing Setting (Modify) Option Window

6. The window returns to Routing Setting option window. Confirm the modified
route information.

Figure 4-222 Routing Setting Option Wnidow

7. Click OK button when completed.

8. The Confirmation dialog box appears. Click OK button.

Figure 4-223 Confirmation Dialog Box

Operation NWD-115476-06E
Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only

4-146 NE Setup

9. The Information dialog box appears. Click OK button.

Figure 4-224 Information Dialog Box

10. The Routing Setting window updates the information. Confirm the display for
the modified route information.

Figure 4-225 Routing Setting Window

11. When Routing Setting is completed, click Maintenance button on top of the
WebLCT window to exit from the maintenance mode.

12. Confirm that the MAINT changes from yellow to white.

This step ends the procedure.

NWD-115476-06E Operation
Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only

NE Setup 4-147

(c) Delete Routing Setting

Procedure 4-46

1. Click the Maintenance button on top of the WebLCT window to put the
system into the maintenance mode.

2. In the WebLCT menu frame, expand Equipment Setup, then its submenu
Network Management Configuration to select Routing Setting.

3. The Routing Setting window appears. Click Setup button.

Figure 4-226 Routing Setting Window

4. The Routing Setting option window appears. Click Delete button.

Figure 4-227 Routing Setting Option Window

Operation NWD-115476-06E
Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only

4-148 NE Setup

5. The Routing Setting (Delete) option window appears. Enter the target
network address into the field, and then click OK button.

Figure 4-228 Routing Setting (Delete) Option Window

6. The window returns to Routing Setting option window. Confirm that the
selected network has been removed, then click OK button.

Figure 4-229 Routing Setting Option Window

7. The Confirmation dialog box appears. Click OK button.

Figure 4-230 Confirmation Dialog Box

NWD-115476-06E Operation
Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only

NE Setup 4-149

8. The Information dialog box appears. Click OK button.

Figure 4-231 Information Dialog Box

9. The Routing Setting window updates the information. Confirm the displayed
route information.

Figure 4-232 Routing Setting Window

10. When Routing Setting is completed, click Maintenance button on top of the
WebLCT window to exit from the maintenance mode.

11. Confirm that the MAINT changes from yellow to white.

This step ends the procedure.

Operation NWD-115476-06E
Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only

4-150 NE Setup

(4) IP Access Control Setting

(a) Input Filter List -— Add Entry

Procedure 4-47

1. Click the Maintenance button on top of the WebLCT window to put the
system into the maintenance mode.

2. In the WebLCT menu frame, expand Equipment Setup, then its submenu
Network Management Configuration to select IP Access Control
Setting.

3. IP Access Control Setting window appears. On the Input Filter List tabbed
page, click Add Entry button.

Add Entry button

Figure 4-233 IP Access Control Setting window

NWD-115476-06E Operation
Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only

NE Setup 4-151

4. The Input Filter Entry (Add) option window appears. Specify the filter
condition, then click OK button.

Figure 4-234 Input Filter Entry (Add) Option Window

Table 4-45 Input Filter Entry (Add) Parameters

Parameter Value Description

Entry No. 1-50 Specify the entry number.


Input Index Any, NE2, Bridge 1 to Select the ingress port
Bridge 20
Source IP Address x.x.x.x Specify the source IP address of the input packets
0.0.0.0: Any
Source Subnet Mask x.x.x.x Specify the subnet mask of the source IP address of the
input packets
0.0.0.0: Any
Protocol Any, ICMP, TCP, Specify the protocol of the IP packets. If Other is selected,
UDP, Other user is requested to specify the port number.
Destination Port Range: 1 to 65535 Check Any or specify Destination Port.
Action Permit Allows the packet that meets the conditions above.
Deny Discards the packet if it matches the conditions above.

NOTE: The filter entries applied to whole DCN traffic except from the LCT port.
"The traffic from LCT is controlled by the LCT Port Setting in the General
Setting (Detail) of the Network Management Configuration sub menu."
For inband interface, filter entries are applied to only traffic towards the
CPU of the IDU, transit traffic is sent to next hop.

Operation NWD-115476-06E
Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only

4-152 NE Setup

5. The Information box appears. Click OK button

Figure 4-235 Information Dialog Box

6. The IP Access Control Setting window updates the information. Confirm


that the newly added filter information displayed.

Figure 4-236 IP Access Control Setting window

This step ends the procedure.

NWD-115476-06E Operation
Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only

NE Setup 4-153

(b) Input Filter List — Modify Entry

Procedure 4-48

1. Click the Maintenance button on the top of the WebLCT window to put the
system into the maintenance mode.

2. In the WebLCT menu frame, expand Equipment Setup, then its submenu
Network Management Configuration to select IP Access Control
Setting.

3. The IP Address Control Setting window appears. In the Input Filter Rule
tabbed page, click to select an Entry No.
Entry No

Figure 4-237 IP Access Control Setting window

Operation NWD-115476-06E
Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only

4-154 NE Setup

4. The Input Filter Entry (Modify) option window appears. Specify the filter
condition, then click OK button.

Figure 4-238 Input Filter Entry (Modify) Option Window

Table 4-46 Input Filter Entry (Modify) Parameters

Parameter Value Description

Entry No. 1-50 Not editable.

Input Index Any, NE2, Select the ingress port


Bridge1 to Bridge20

Source IP Address x.x.x.x Specify the source IP address of the input packets
0.0.0.0: Any

Source Subnet x.x.x.x Specify the subnet mask of the source IP address of the
Mask incoming packets
0.0.0.0: Any

Protocol Any, ICMP, TCP, Specify the protocol of the IP packets. Selecting Other
UDP, Other requires specifying the port number.

Destination Port (Range: 1 to 65535) Not available

Action Permit Allows the packet that matches the conditions above.

Deny Discards the packet that matches the conditions above.

NWD-115476-06E Operation
Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only

NE Setup 4-155

5. The Information dialog box appears. Click OK button

Figure 4-239 Information Dialog Box

6. The IP Access Control Setting window updates the information. Confirm


that the modified filter information is displayed.

Figure 4-240 IP Access Control Setting window

This step ends the procedure.

Operation NWD-115476-06E
Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only

4-156 NE Setup

(c) Input Filter List - Delete Entry

Procedure 4-49

1. Click the Maintenance button on the top of the WebLCT window to put the
system into the maintenance mode.

2. In the WebLCT menu frame, expand Equipment Setup , then its submenu
Network Management Configuration to select IP Access Control
Setting.

3. The IP Access Control Setting window appears. In the Input Filter List
tabbed page, click Delete Entry button.
Delete Entry button

Figure 4-241 IP Access Control Setting window

4. The Input Filter Entry (Delete) option window appears. Specify the Entry
No. of the filter to be deleted, and then click OK button.

Figure 4-242 Input Filter Entry (Delete) Option window

NWD-115476-06E Operation
Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only

NE Setup 4-157

5. The Confirmation dialog box appears. Click OK button.

Figure 4-243 Confirmation Dialog Box

6. The Information dialog box appears. Click OK button

Figure 4-244 Information Dialog Box

7. The IP Access Control Setting window updates the information. Confirm


that the selected filter information is removed.

Figure 4-245 IP Access Control Setting window

This step ends the procedure.

Operation NWD-115476-06E
Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only

4-158 NE Setup

(d) Input Filter List - Modify Rule

Procedure 4-50

1. Click the Maintenance button on the top of the WebLCT window to put the
system into the maintenance mode.

2. In the WebLCT menu frame, expand Equipment Setup. then its submenu
Network Management Configuration to select IP Access Control
Setting.

3. The IP Access Control Setting window appears. In the Input Filter List
tabbed page, click Modify Rule button.

Modify Rule button

Figure 4-246 IP Access Control Setting window

4. The Input Filter Rule option window appears. Specify the filter condition,
then click OK button.

Figure 4-247 Input Filter Rule Option Window

NWD-115476-06E Operation
Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only

NE Setup 4-159

Table 4-47 Input Filter Rule Parameters

Parameter Value Description

Input Filter Rule Enable Enables the configured Input filters.

Disable Disables the configured input filters

Default Action Permit Forwards an IP packet that meets the configured conditions.

Deny Discards an IP packet if it does not match the configured conditions

5. The Information dialog box appears. Click OK button

Figure 4-248 Information Dialog Box

6. The IP Access Control Setting window updates the information. Confirm


that the modified filter information is displayed.

Figure 4-249 IP Access Control Setting Window

This step ends the procedure.

Operation NWD-115476-06E
Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only

4-160 NE Setup

(e) Forwarding Filter List - Add Entry

Procedure 4-51

1. Click the Maintenance button on the top of the WebLCT window to put the
system into the maintenance mode.

2. In the WebLCT menu fame, expand Equipment Setup then its submenu
Network Management Configuration to select IP Access Control
Setting.

3. The IP Access Control Setting window appears. In the Forwarding Filter


List tabbed page, click Add Entry button.
Add Entry button

Figure 4-250 IP Access Control Setting window

4. The Forwarding Filter Entry (Add) option window appears. Specify the
filter condition, then click OK button.

Figure 4-251 Forwarding Filter Entry (Add) Option Window

NWD-115476-06E Operation
Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only

NE Setup 4-161

Table 4-48 Forwarding Filter Entry (Add) Parameters

Parameter Value Description

Entry No. 1-50 Set the number of the entry


Input Index Any, NE2, Select the ingress port
Output Index Bridge1 to Bridge20 Select the egress port
Source IP Address x.x.x.x Specify the source IP address of the output packets
Source Subnet Mask x.x.x.x Specify the subnet mask of the source IP address
of the output packets
Destination IP Address x.x.x.x Specify the destination IP address of the output
packets

Destination Subnet Mask x.x.x.x Specify the subnet mask of the destination IP
address of the output packets

Protocol Any, ICMP, TCP, Specify the protocol of the IP packets. If Other is
UDP, Other selected, user need to specify the port number.
Source Port (Range: 1 to 65535) Not available
Destination Port (Range: 1 to 65535) Not available
Action Permit Forwards a packet that meets the conditions above.
Deny Discard a packet if it matches the conditions above.

5. The Information box appears. Click OK button

Figure 4-252 Information Dialog Box

6. The IP Access Control Setting window updates the information. Confirm


that the newly added filter information is displayed.

Figure 4-253 IP Access Control Setting window

This step ends the procedure.

Operation NWD-115476-06E
Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only

4-162 NE Setup

(f) Forwarding Filter List - Modify Entry

Procedure 4-52

1. Click the Maintenance button on the top of the WebLCT window to put the
system into the maintenance mode.

2. In the WebLCT menu frame, expand Equipment Setup then its submenu
Network Management Configuration to select IP Access Control
Setting.

3. The IP Access Control Setting window appears. In the Forwarding


Filter List tabbed page, click to select an Entry No..
Entry No.

Figure 4-254 IP Access Control Setting window

4. The Forwarding Filter Entry (Modify) option window appears. Modify the
filter condition, then click OK button.

Figure 4-255 Forwarding Filter Entry (Modify) Option Window

NWD-115476-06E Operation
Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only

NE Setup 4-163

Table 4-49 Forwarding Filter Entry (Modify) Parameters

Parameter Value Description

Entry No. 1-50 Set the number of the entry.


Input Index Any, NE2, Select the ingress port.
Bridge1 to Bridge20
Output Index Select the egress port.
Source IP Address x.x.x.x Specify the source IP address of the outgoing packets.
Source Subnet x.x.x.x Specify the subnet mask of the source IP address of the
Mask outgoing packets
Destination IP x.x.x.x Specify the destination IP address of the outgoing
Address packets.
Destination Subnet x.x.x.x Specify the subnet mask of the destination IP address of
Mask the outgoing packets
Protocol Any, ICMP, TCP, Specify the protocol of the IP packets. Selecting Other
UDP, Other requires to set the port number.
Source Port (Range: 1 to 65535) Not available.
Destination Port (Range: 1 to 65535) Not available.
Action Permit Forwards a packet that meets the conditions above.
Deny Discards a packet if it matches the conditions above.

5. The Information box appears. Click OK button

Figure 4-256 Information Dialog Box

6. The IP Access Control Setting window updates the information. Confirm the
display for the modified filter information.

Figure 4-257 IP Access Control Setting window

This step ends the procedure.

Operation NWD-115476-06E
Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only

4-164 NE Setup

(g) Forwarding Filter List - Delete Entry

Procedure 4-53

1. Click the Maintenance button on the top of the WebLCT window to put the
system into the maintenance mode.

2. In the WebLCT menu frame, expand Equipment Setup, then its submenu
Network Management Configuration to select IP Access Control
Setting.

3. The IP Access Control Setting window appears. In the Forwarding Filter


List tabbed page, click Delete Entry button.

Delete Entry button

Figure 4-258 IP Access Control Setting window

4. The Forwarding Filter Entry (Delete) option window appears. Enter the
Entry No. of the filter to be deleted, and then click OK button.

Figure 4-259 Forwarding Filter Entry (Delete) Option Window

NWD-115476-06E Operation
Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only

NE Setup 4-165

5. The Confirmation dialog box appears. Click OK button.

Figure 4-260 Confirmation Dialog Box

6. The Information dialog box appears. Click OK button

Figure 4-261 Information Dialog Box

7. The IP Access Control Setting window updates the information. Confirm


that the selected filter information is removed.

Figure 4-262 IP Access Control Setting window

This step ends the procedure.

Operation NWD-115476-06E
Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only

4-166 NE Setup

(h) Forwarding Filter List - Modify Rule

Procedure 4-54

1. Click the Maintenance button on the top of the LCT window to put the system
into the maintenance mode.

2. In the WebLCT menu frame, expand Equipment Setup, then its submenu
Network Management Configuration to select IP Access Control
Setting.

3. The IP Access Control Setting window appears. In the Forwarding Filter


List tabbed page, click Modify Rule button.
Modify Rule button

Figure 4-263 IP Access Control Setting window

4. The Forwarding Filter Rule option window appears. Modify the filter
condition, then click OK button.

Figure 4-264 Forwarding Filter Rule (Modify) Option window

NWD-115476-06E Operation
Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only

NE Setup 4-167

Table 4-50 Forwarding Filter Rule (Modify) Parameters

Parameter` Value Description

Forwarding Filter Enable Enables the configured Forwarding filters.


Rule
Disable Disables the configured Forwarding filters

Default Action Permit Forwards an IP packet that does not match the configured conditions.

Deny Discards an IP packet that does not match the configured conditions

5. The Information dialog box appears. Click OK button

Figure 4-265 Information Dialog Box

6. The IP Access Control Setting window updates the information. Confirm the
display for the modified filter information.

Figure 4-266 IP Access Control Setting window

This step ends the procedure.

Operation NWD-115476-06E
Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only

4-168 NE Setup

(5) DHCP Server / Relay Setting

(a) DHCP Server Setting

Procedure 4-55

1. In the WebLCT menu frame, expand Equipment Setup, then its submenu
Network Management Configuration to select DHCP Server / Relay
Setting.

2. The DHCP Server / Relay Setting window appears. Click DCHP No. .

DHCP No.

Figure 4-267 DHCP Server / Relay Setting Window

NWD-115476-06E Operation
Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only

NE Setup 4-169

3. DHCP Server / Relay Setting option window appears. Select DHCP Server
from the Server / Relay pull down menu. Then, specify a proper value for each
parameter.

Figure 4-268 DHCP Server / Relay Setting (DHCP No.01) Box

Table 4-51 DHCP Server / Relay Setting Parameters

Item Parameter Description

Sever / Relay Disable / DHCP Server / Specify DHCP Server


DHCP Relay
Bridge No. Bridge01 to 20 Select the Bridge No.(IP Address) which was set at
(IP Address) Network Management Configuration - Detail Setting
DHCP Server Class C private IP This item is for DHCP Relay setting.
Address address
IP Address Range 192.168.xxx.xxx Class C private IP address. Specify IP Address
(Start) Range (Start).

IP Address Range 192.168.yyy.yyy Class C private IP address. Specify IP Address


(End) Range (End).

Exception (Start) Specify Exception IP Address within the specified “IP


***.***.***.***
Address Range” (Start)
Exception (End) Class C private IP address. Exception IP Address
***.***.***.***
within the specified “IP Address Range” (End)
Security Any / Only Registered - Only Registered : Only clients which have
registered MAC address can be allowed to lease IP
address
- Any : No MAC address limitation

Operation NWD-115476-06E
Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only

4-170 NE Setup

4. Click Detail button. DHCP Server Detail Setting box appears. Then, specify
a proper value for each parameter, then click OK button.

Figure 4-269 DHCP Server Detail Setting Box

Table 4-52 DHCP Server Detail Setting Parameters

Item Parameter Description

Lease Time 0 – 72 [h] Specify lease time of leased IP Address


Default Gateway Same as Bridge Same as IP address of Bridge Interface will be leasedSelect
Address Interface the Bridge No.(IP Address) which was set at Network
Management Configuration - Detail Setting
Specify Specify Default Gateway Address
Disabled No Default Gateway Address will be leased
DNS Server Address Used / Not Used DNS Server AddressThis item is for DHCP Relay setting.
will be leased
Primary Specify Primary DNS Server Address
Secondary Specify Secondary DNS Server Address
Not Used No DNS Server Address will be leased
Other Option Used DHCP Option will be leased. iPASOLINK can lease one
DHCP option This item is for DHCP Relay setting.
ID The ID of DHCP options defined in the IETF RFC 2132.
Please refer the RFC for detail.
Type, Value IP Address: ex) 192.168.1.1
String: ex) NEC
Octet String: ex) 123456789abcdef

Not Used No Option will be leased

NWD-115476-06E Operation
Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only

NE Setup 4-171

5. The DHCP Server / Relay Setting window updates the information. Confirm
the display for the modified DHCP information.

Figure 4-270 DHCP Server / Relay Setting Window

This step ends the procedure.

Operation NWD-115476-06E
Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only

4-172 NE Setup

(b) DHCP Relay Setting

Procedure 4-56

1. In the WebLCT menu frame, expand Equipment Setup , then its submenu
Network Management Configuration to select DHCP Server / Relay
Setting.

2. The DHCP Server / Relay Setting window appears. Click DCHP No.
DHCP No.

Figure 4-271 DHCP Server / Relay Setting Window

NWD-115476-06E Operation
Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only

NE Setup 4-173

3. DHCP Server / Relay Setting option window appears. Select DHCP Relay
from the Server / Relay pull down menu. Then, specify a proper value for each
parameter. Click OK button.

Figure 4-272 DHCP Server / Relay Setting Option Window

4. The Information dialog box appears. Click OK button

Figure 4-273 Information Dialog Box

Operation NWD-115476-06E
Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only

4-174 NE Setup

5. The DHCP Server / Relay Setting window updates the information.

Figure 4-274 DHCP Server / Relay Setting Window

This step ends the procedure.

NWD-115476-06E Operation
Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only

NE Setup 4-175

(c) Add MAC Address

Procedure 4-57

1. In the WebLCT menu frame, expand Equipment Setup., then its submenu
Network Management Configuration to select DHCP Server / Relay
Setting.

2. The DHCP Server / Relay Setting window appears. Click Add MAC
Address button.
Add MAC Address button

Figure 4-275 DHCP Server / Relay Setting Window

3. The Add MAC Address option window appears. Specify a proper value for
each parameter then click OK button.

Figure 4-276 Add MAC Address (DHCP N0.01) Box

Operation NWD-115476-06E
Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only

4-176 NE Setup

Table 4-53 Add MAC Address Parameters

Item Parameter Description

MAC Address aa:bb:cc:dd:ee:ff specify MAC Address.


Distribution Rule Auto / Reject / Fixed Auto: IP address is assigned automatically
Reject: Specified MAC address will be
rejected
IP Address Class C private address Specify IP address when the Distribution Rule
is set to “Fixed”192.168.

4. The Information dialog box appears. Click OK button

Figure 4-277 Information Dialog Box

5. The DHCP Server / Relay Setting window updates the information. Click
OK button.

Figure 4-278 DHCP Server / Relay Setting Window

This step ends the procedure.

NWD-115476-06E Operation
Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only

NE Setup 4-177

(6) Equipment Cascade Setting

Procedure 4-58

1. In the WebLCT menu frame, expand Equipment Setup, then its submenu
Network Management Configuration to select Equipment Cascade
Setting.

2. The Equipment Cascade Setting window appears. Click Setup button.

Figure 4-279 Equipment Cascade Setting Window

3. Equipment Cascade Setting option window appears. Specify a proper value


for each parameter, and then click OK button..

Figure 4-280 Equipment Cascade Setting Option Window

Table 4-54 Equipment Cascade Setting Parameters

Parameter Value Description

Number of Cascaded NEs Not Used,2-3 Specify the total number of cascaded NEs .
Own Cascade ID 1-3 Select the ID of this NE.
IP Address x.x.x.x Specify the IP address of the Bridge-1 (Primary IP Address
for PNMSj).

Operation NWD-115476-06E
Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only

4-178/END NE Setup

4. The Information dialog box appears. Click OK button

Figure 4-281 Information Dialog Box

5. The Equipment Cascade Setting window updates the information. Confirm


the display for the modified cascade information.

Figure 4-282 Equipment Cascade Setting Window

This step ends the procedure.

NWD-115476-06E Operation
Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only

System Operation 5-1

5. SYSTEM OPERATION

5.1 Provisioning
This setup is for further system fundamental configuration after the equipment setup.
The setting items are listed as follows:

 MODEM Function Setting

User can configure the port, radio switch, ATPC/MTPC power, E1/STM-1
threshold, and so on for each selected MODEM.

 ETH Function Setting

User can configure the Ethernet port, VLAN ETH OAM, RSTP, QOS, link loss
forwarding and so on.

 E1/STM-1/Cross Connect Setting

User can configure the E1 port/STM-1 port and cross connect.

 PWE Setting

User can configure the TDM PWE (SAToP) function.

 Equipment Clock/Synchronization Setting

User can configure the internal clock, external clock, timing source and
IEEE1588v2 function.

 Relay-Alarm Mapping Setting

User can configure relay control setting and cluster alarm setting.

 V.11/OW Setting

User can configure the user interface of iPASOLINK (V.11,RS-232C) and OW


buzzer.

 Alarm/AIS Setting

User can configure the alarm delay, severity, color and relevant settings of AIS.

 PMON/RMON Setting

User can configure the threshold of PMON (except Ethernet)/ RMON (Ethernet).

Operation NWD-115476-06E
Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only

5-2 System Operation

 AUX Setting

User can configure the relevant settings of the auxiliary (AUX).

For details, refer to the relevant sections accordingly.

5.1.1 MODEM Function Setting


User can configure the port, radio switch, ATPC/MTPC power, E1/STM-1 threshold,
and so on for each selected MODEM.

 MODEM Port Setting

Specify the port name of each MODEM.

 Radio Switch Setting

Specify the TX/RX switch priority that prevents from unnecessary switching.

 TX Power Setting

Specify the threshold of TX power and RX power in MTPC/ATPC


configuration.

 ALM Mode Setting

Specify the ATPC power mode and ALM mode when ODU communication
fails.

 XPIC Setting

Specify the XPIC Condition.

 AMR Setting

Specify the AMR switching mode.

5.1.1.1 MODEM Port Setting

Specify the Port Name of each MODEM.

Procedure 5-1

1. Expand Provisioning from the WebLCT menu.

NWD-115476-06E Operation
Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only

System Operation 5-3

2. Expand MODEM Function Setting from the Provisioning sub menu.

3. Select MODEM Port Setting from the MODEM Function Setting sub
menu.

4. The MODEM Port Setting window appears. Click the desired MODEM to
configure.

Figure 5-1 MODEM Port Setting Window

5. The MODEM Port Setting dialog box appears. Assign a proper name for
the MODEM.

Figure 5-2 MODEM Port Setting Dialog Box

Operation NWD-115476-06E
Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only

5-4 System Operation

Table 5-1 MODEM Port Setting

Item Parameter Note


Port Name 0 to 32 characters Specify the port name of the MODEM
Header Disable Enables or disables Header
Compression MAC Compress function that increases
Mode packet rate throughput on radio
transmission.
MAC with IPv4 These parameters can be specified for
MAC with IPv6 MODEM-A/EA card version:

MAC with MPLS - NWA-055300-102


- NWA-055300-322
- NWA-074398-322
Enhanced Check Enhanced Mode enables higher packet
Mode(Expert Only) Uncheck rate throughput by disabling CRC
check in microwave transmission
process.
These parameters can be specified for
MODEM-A/EA card version:
- NWA-055300-102
- NWA-055300-322
- NWA-074398-322

Radio Low Latency This mode is for suppressing delay in


Transmission packet transmission of a radio section.
Mode Usually choose this mode.

Low PDV This mode is for suppressing Packet


Delay Variation (PDV) in packet
transmission of a radio section.
This mode can be specified for
MODEM-EA FPGA version and
MODEM parameter.
- FPGA ver. :6.16
- MODEM parameter :8

6. Click OK button after setting the parameters.

NWD-115476-06E Operation
Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only

System Operation 5-5

7. The Information box appears. Click OK button.

Figure 5-3 Information Box

8. The MODEM Port Setting window appears again. Confirm the displayed
parameters.

Figure 5-4 MODEM Port Setting Window

This step ends the procedure.

5.1.1.2 Radio Switch Setting

Specify the TX/RX SW priority and TXSW lock-in usage, and TX SW reverse
function usage.

The configurable items are listed as follows:

 TX SW Priority

Specify the TX switch priority in transmit direction. (Hot-standby System only)

 TXSW Lockin Usage

This function is to prevent the TX switch from switching over frequently in case
of cable problem between IDU and ODU.

 TX SW Reverse Function Usage

This function is to enable local TX switch in case the opposite station detects the
TX transmit trouble of local station.

Operation NWD-115476-06E
Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only

5-6 System Operation

 RX SW Priority

Specify the RX switch priority. (Hot-standby system and Twin-path system only)

Procedure 5-2

1. Expand Provisioning from the WebLCT menu.

2. Expand MODEM Function Setting from the Provisioning sub menu.

3. Select Radio Switch Setting from the MODEM Function Setting sub
menu.

4. The Radio Switch Setting window appears. Click the desired SW GRP to
configure.

Figure 5-5 Radio Switch Setting Window

5. The Radio Switch Setting dialog box appears. Assign a proper value for
each parameter.

Figure 5-6 Radio Switch Setting Dialog Box

NWD-115476-06E Operation
Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only

System Operation 5-7

Table 5-2 Radio Switch Setting

Item Parameter Description


TX SW Priority Non Priority Select this for no homing switch.
No.1 Select this for homing switch. When both No.1 and
No.2 are normally operating, use No.1 as online.
When No.1 failed switch to No.2, and if No.1 is
normalized, switch back to No.1 is performed
automatically.
TX SW Lock-in Used Enables TX SW Lock-in function. Only available
Usage when TX SW Priority is configured as No.1. During
10 Minutes if switching occurred over 10 times, TX
will be locked on No.2, it will be released after 24
hours in case no alarm detected on No.1.
Not Used Disable TX SW Lock-in function.
TX SW Reverse Used Enable Reverse Function. Only available when TX
Function Usage SW Priority is configured as Non Priority. When
both of the ODUs of local sites failed receiving
signal from the opposite site, send a silent alarm to
the opposite site to perform the forced switch to the
working ODU to standby ODU.
Not Used Disable Reverse Function.
RX SW Priority Non Priority Select this for no homing switch.
No.1 Select this for homing switch. When both No.1 and
No.2 are normally operating, use No.1 as online.
When No.1 failed switch to No.2, and if No.1 is
normalized, switch back to No.1 is performed
automatically.
RX SW Condition Included Early Include Early Warning in the switch factor by an
Early Warning Warning automatic switch.
Excluded Do not include Early Warning in the switch factor
Early Warning by an automatic switch.

6. Click OK button after setting the parameters.


When the Included Early Warning radio button is selected, the following
warning message appears. Then, click OK button.

Operation NWD-115476-06E
Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only

5-8 System Operation

7. The Information box appears. Click OK button.

Figure 5-7 Information Box

8. The Radio Switch Setting window appears again. Confirm the displayed
parameters.

Figure 5-8 Radio Switch Setting Window

This step ends the procedure.

5.1.1.3 TX Power Setting

Specify the thresholds of TX power and RX power in MTPC/ATPC configuration.

(1) ATPC Mode

Procedure 5-3

1. Expand Provisioning from the WebLCT menu.

2. Expand MODEM Function Setting from the Provisioning sub menu.

3. Select TX Power Setting from the MODEM Function Setting sub


menu.

NWD-115476-06E Operation
Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only

System Operation 5-9

4. The TX Power Setting window appears. Click the desired MODEM No.
(or SW GRP) to configure.

Figure 5-9 TX Power Setting Window

5. The TX Power Setting dialog box appears. Assign a proper value for each
parameter.

Figure 5-10 TX Power Setting Dialog Box

Table 5-3 TX Power Setting (for ATPC and MTPC)

Item Parameter Description


ATPC Range (MAX) Depends on the type Set ODU maximum TX power level in ATPC
of the ODU mode.
ATPC Range (MIN) Depends on the type Set ODU minimum TX power level in ATPC mode
of the ODU
MTPC TX Power Depends on the type Set threshold of RX LEVEL when opposite site is
of the ODU in MTPC mode.
RX Threshold Depends on Set threshold of RX LEVEL when opposite site is
modulation method in ATPC mode. This parameter can be set when
AMR configuration is disabled in ATPC mode.

Operation NWD-115476-06E
Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only

5-10 System Operation

6. Click OK button after setting the parameters.

7. The Information box appears. Click OK button.

Figure 5-11 Information Box

8. The TX Power Setting window appears again. Confirm the displayed


parameters.

Figure 5-12 TX Power Setting Window

This step ends the procedure.

(2) MTPC Mode

Procedure 5-4

1. Expand Provisioning from the WebLCT menu.

2. Expand MODEM Function Setting from the Provisioning sub menu.

3. Select TX Power Setting from the MODEM Function Setting sub


menu.

4. The TX Power Setting window appears. Click the desired MODEM No.
(or SW GRP) to configure.

NWD-115476-06E Operation
Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only

System Operation 5-11

Figure 5-13 TX Power Setting Window

5. The TX Power Setting dialog box appears. Assign a proper value for each
parameter.

Figure 5-14 TX Power Setting Dialog Box

6. Click OK button after setting the parameters.

7. The Information box appears. Click OK button.

Figure 5-15 Information Box

8. The TX Power Setting window appears again. Confirm the displayed


parameters.

Operation NWD-115476-06E
Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only

5-12 System Operation

Figure 5-16 TX Power Setting Window

This step ends the procedure.

5.1.1.4 ALM Mode Setting

Specify the ATPC power mode and ALM mode when IDU fails to communicate
with ODU.

Procedure 5-5

1. Expand Provisioning from the WebLCT menu.

2. Expand MODEM Function Setting from the Provisioning sub menu.

3. Select ALM Mode Setting from the MODEM Function Setting sub
menu.

4. The ALM Mode Setting window appears. Click the desired MODEM No.
(or SW GRP) to configure.

Figure 5-17 ALM Mode Setting Window

NWD-115476-06E Operation
Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only

System Operation 5-13

5. The ALM Mode Setting dialog box appears. Assign a proper value for each
parameter.

Figure 5-18 ALM Mode Setting Dialog Box

Table 5-4 ALM Mode Setting

Item Parameter Description


ATPC Power Mode MAX Increase TX Power to Max. value
MIN Decrease TX Power to Min. value.
Hold Hold the current TX Power value.
ODU COMM ALM Mute Mute TX power when IDU fails to
Mode communicate with ODU
Hold Hold TX power when IDU fails to
communicate with ODU

Note: In case user has selected MTPC, “ATPC Power Mode” is not available.

6. Click OK button after setting the parameters.

7. The Information box appears. Click OK button.

Figure 5-19 Information Box

8. The ALM Mode Setting window appears again. Confirm the displayed
parameters.

Operation NWD-115476-06E
Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only

5-14 System Operation

Figure 5-20 ALM Mode Setting Window

This step ends the procedure.

5.1.1.5 XPIC

Configure XPIC as follows:

Procedure 5-6

1. Expand Provisioning from the WebLCT menu.

2. Expand MODEM Function Setting from the Provisioning sub menu.

3. Select XPIC Setting from the MODEM Function Setting sub menu.

4. The XPIC Setting window appears. Click the XPIC GRP to configure.

NWD-115476-06E Operation
Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only

System Operation 5-15

XPIC GRP1

Figure 5-21 XPIC Setting Window

5. The XPIC Setting dialog box appears.

Figure 5-22 XPIC Setting Dialog Box

6. When the Lo signal to ODU from IDU becomes out of synchronization,


either ODU operation MUTE (default) or Self Lo (ODU self Lo operation)
can be selected

7. Click OK button after setting the parameter.

Figure 5-23 Information Box

Operation NWD-115476-06E
Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only

5-16 System Operation

8. The XPIC Setting window appears again. Confirm the displayed parameter.

Figure 5-24 XPIC Setting Window

This step ends the procedure.

5.1.1.6 AMR Setting

Specify AMR function usage as follows:

Procedure 5-7

1. Expand Provisioning from the WebLCT menu.

2. Expand MODEM Function Setting from the Provisioning sub menu.

3. Select AMR Setting from the MODEM Function Setting sub menu.

4. The AMR Setting window appears.

NWD-115476-06E Operation
Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only

System Operation 5-17

Figure 5-25 AMR Setting Window

5. Click SW GRP (MODEM) (Slot01/02 or Slot03/04) to configure.

6. The AMR Setting dialog box appears. Assign a proper value for each
parameter.

Figure 5-26 AMR Setting Dialog Box

Operation NWD-115476-06E
Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only

5-18 System Operation

Table 5-5 AMR Mode Setting

Item Parameter Description


AMR Switch CNR+RSL AMR Switching mode with CNR+RSL.
Condition CNR AMR Switching mode only with CNR.
When using this mode, AMR Range must be set as
continuously "Used" as following sample, 16QAM to
64QAM setting.

AMR Sensitive AMR Switching Sensitivity(TX Power) , Sensitive AMR


Transition Transition mode
Normal AMR Switching Sensitivity(TX Power) , Normal AMR
Transition mode

7. Information box appears after setting the parameter. Click OK button.

Figure 5-27 Information Box

8. The AMR Setting window appears again. Confirm the displayed


parameters.

This step ends the procedure.

NWD-115476-06E Operation
Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only

System Operation 5-19

5.1.2 ETH Function Setting


The ETH Function setting menu list is as follows:

 Bridge Setting

Bridge function is also known as switching function that enables the device in
the multiple network segments can communicate with each other. User can
configure the FDB (forward database) aging time, default VLAN ID and VLAN
mode here.

 ETH Port Setting

This function provides the abilities that configure the attributes of the Ethernet
port on the front panel of iPASOLINK, including port name, line speed, Mode,
Flow Control etc.

 VLAN Setting

VLAN (Virtual Local Area Network) enables multiple devices which are
separated physically can communicate as they are located in a same broadcast
domain and also protect the data from sending to other domain even they may
connect physically.

This function provides the abilities of creating, configuring and deleting the
VLAN.

 FDB Setting

iPASOLINK can learn the MAC address of the Ethernet frame dynamically and
save the port – MAC address mapping information into FDB (Forwarding
DataBase) based on IEEE802.1d for each VLAN. User can also add the static
mapping information manually by this function.

 ETH OAM Setting

iPASOLINK supports Ethernet OAM function based on ITU-T Y.1731,


IEEE802.1ag, and IEEE802.3ah, which enables operator to measure the Ethernet
link quality such as delay, throughput, jitter, loss and so on, greatly help network
operator in maintenance and troubleshooting.

Also, IEEE802.3ah link OAM function on iPASOLINK supports coordination of


LLF function, sending critical event frame instead of “Link Shut Down”.

 RSTP Setting

iPASOLINK supports RSTP (Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol) which prevents

Operation NWD-115476-06E
Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only

5-20 System Operation

from layer 2 level link loop with a faster manner comparing to legacy STP
protocol.

User can set the priority of the bridge; specify the role of the Ethernet port and
other parameters.

 MSTP Setting

The MSTP (Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol) defined in the IEEE802.1s is the
spanning tree protocol work with logical instances. One instance can include
multiple VLANs. Blocking port is decided per logical instance, and then
physically configured redundant Ethernet topology can be utilized efficiently.

In addition to standard MSTP features, the iPASOLINK supports "root guard"


feature which prevents unexpected node becomes to root node, and "BPDU
guard" feature which disable ports when BPDU frame arrives to ports not
allowing BPDU reception.

Note: MSTP and ETH-Ring functions are not configured at the same time.

 ERP Setting

High-speed protection switch and load balancing can be realized by G.8032


Ethernet Ring Protection. And, the maintenance can be done with minimum
service influence by administrative operation such as manual/forced switching.

 Load balancing works under the normal operation, and the higher priority
traffic can be secured by QoS management.

 Fast Switchover (<50ms) with 3.3ms period, hardware based ETH-CC

 Administrative operation

 Forced switching

 Manual switching

 Revertive / Non-revertive

The combination of logical ring set-up and load balancing achieves double
capacity transmission.

 Link Aggregation Setup

Link Aggregation achieves high capacity and resiliency transport with bundling
several radio links. The distribution algorithm distributes the packet according
to:

NWD-115476-06E Operation
Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only

System Operation 5-21

 L2 based: Source & Destination MAC, VLAN ID, Ethernet type, Physical
Port ID

 L3&L4 based: Source & Destination IP, Source & Destination TCP/UDP
Port Number

 MPLS label based: Tunnel Label & VC Label

Also, ETH Ports support Both of LACP and Non-LACP operation with carrier
class 1:1 LACP Protection.

 Radio Traffic Aggregation: Packet and Physical Layer

iPASOLINK has two types of Radio Traffic Aggregation function, packet layer
and physical layer. Radio Traffic Aggregation (packet layer) is similar with Link
Aggregation without LACP.

Radio Traffic Aggregation (Physical Layer) function achieves high capacity and
resiliency transport with bundling two Modem links.

 Fragments the packet with variable length, and distributes the


fragmentation packets to two radio links fairly with a patent pending
algorithm.

 Provides redundancy to the radio link the traffic can be transmitted by


the remaining links though the bandwidth decreases when the failure
occurs.

 Enables single antenna high capacity transport with using Radio Traffic
Aggregation (Physical Layer) and XPIC simultaneously

 QoS/Classification Setting

iPASOLINK supports QoS control function that provides different priority to


different applications, users, or data flow or to guarantee a certain level of
performance to a data flow. User can configure Class Classification, Ingress
Policer, Egress QoS and SP, TDM E1 QoS on MODEM to realize differential
service strategy.

 Filter Setting

This function provides layer2 filtering parameter database based user-plane


discarding filter for solving security issue.

 Parameters multiple combination of MAC DA/SA, CoS, Ethertype, VLAN


ID with “any” or “wildcards” description

 Filter profile based easy to use configuration

Operation NWD-115476-06E
Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only

5-22 System Operation

 L2CP Transparent / Mirroring Setting

L2CP Transparent transport function is useful for L2CP tunneling, especially


MEF 9 Compliant ETH Private Line (EPL) Service. Transported L2CP protocols
can be specified by checking boxes independently.

Port Mirroring enables to monitor the traffic at another (mirrored) port without
traffic of source port interruption. Ingress, egress or both direction of the port to
be mirrored to the destination port can be specified

 Port Isolate Setting

Port isolation can restrict the transmission even within the same VLAN. Ports
which are configured as port isolation cannot communicate with another same
VLAN port. Also, broadcast traffic is not transmitted. This function can protect
the user traffic from the attacks such as being executed from inside own network
(same subnet).

 LLF Setting

LLF (Link Loss Forwarding) is the function that mandatory shuts down the port
on the opposite device when local device detects unidirectional link problem.
iPASOLINK supports to send Critical Event message using IEEE802.3ah link
OAM function instead of “Link Shut Down”.

 Broadcast Storm Control Setting

This function discards flooding frames in a specific interface without transferring.


This function can set also flooding transferring control in unit of ETH port
including MODEM port. By specifying the bandwidth of broadcast frame,
multicast frame, and unknown address unicast frame collectively, frames beyond
the specified band are discarded at the circuit input.

Be careful with configuring the function. Ethernet OAM function uses multicast
MAC address, ETH-CC with 3.3ms period configuration sends frames 230Kbps
bandwidth. Ethernet Ring function floods frames when switchover process is
running, flooded frames are treated as "Unknown Unicast"

5.1.2.1 Bridge Setting

Procedure 5-8

1. Expand Provisioning from the WebLCT menu.

2. Expand ETH Function Setting from the Provisioning sub menu.

3. Select Bridge Setting from the ETH Function Setting sub menu.

NWD-115476-06E Operation
Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only

System Operation 5-23

4. The Bridge Setting window appears. Click Modify button.

Modify button

Figure 5-28 Bridge Setting Window

5. The Bridge Setting dialog box appears. Assign a proper value for each
parameter.

Figure 5-29 Bridge Setting Dialog Box

Operation NWD-115476-06E
Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only

5-24 System Operation

Table 5-6 Bridge Setting

Item Parameter Description


Aging On / Off On Enable the FDB (Forwarding Data Base) to delete the
learnt MAC address if it is not updated for a certain
amount of time (FDB Aging Time).
Off Disable Aging function.
FDB Aging Time 5 to 163680 s Specify the aging time when aging function is enabled.
GbE MAX Frame Size 64 to 9600 Byte Set the maximum frame size of GbE (Giga bit Ethernet)
port.
FE MAX Frame Size 64 to 2000 Byte Set the maximum frame size of FE (Fast Ethernet) port
VLAN Mode 802.1Q Allow the port on different VLAN to communicate with
each other through layer 2 network.
802.1.ad Allow the switches in a service provider network to
transparently carry a customer’s Layer 2 control frames,
separate from the service provider’s traffic and from other
customer traffic in the service provider’s network.
Default VID Default = 1 Specify the default VLAN ID of the equipment.
1 to 4094
Default VLAN TPID Default = Set the value of TPID (Tag Protocol Identifier) of the
8100(802.1Q) VLAN.
/88a8(802.1ad)
8100 to FFFF

6. Click OK button after setting the parameters.

7. The Information box appears. Click OK button.

Figure 5-30 Information Box

8. The Bridge Setting window appears again. Confirm the displayed


parameters.

NWD-115476-06E Operation
Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only

System Operation 5-25

Figure 5-31 Bridge Setting Window

This step ends the procedure.

5.1.2.2 ETH Port Setting

Procedure 5-9

1. Expand Provisioning from the WebLCT menu.

2. Expand ETH Function Setting from the Provisioning sub menu.

3. Select ETH Port Setting from the ETH Function Setting sub menu.

4. The ETH Port Setting window appears. Click the desired Port No. to
configure.

Port No.

Figure 5-32 ETH Port Setting Window – 1/2

Operation NWD-115476-06E
Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only

5-26 System Operation

Figure 5-33 ETH Port Setting Window – 2/2

5. The ETH Port Setting dialog box appears. Assign a proper value for each
parameter.

Figure 5-34 ETH Port Setting Dialog Box

NWD-115476-06E Operation
Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only

System Operation 5-27

Table 5-7 ETH Port Setting

Item Parameter Description


Port Usage Enable Turn on the port administratively.
Disable Shut down the port administratively.
Port Name 0 to 32 Characters Specify the name of the Ethernet port.
Media Type Electrical Specify the port SFP type as Electrical.
(SFP Port) Optical Specify the port SFP type as Optical.
(RJ45 Port or AUTO Set the line speed of Ethernet port among
Electrical SFP) 10MB 10 Mbit/s, 100 Mbit/s or negotiate with the
100MB opposite side (Auto Negotiation).
*1
Duplex Half Specify the port work on half-duplex mode.
Full Specify the port work on full-duplex mode.
*1
MDI / MDIX MDI Specify the port media type as MDI.
MDIX Specify the port media type as MDIX.
Flow Control Enable Enable flow control.
Disable Disable flow control.
SyncETH Enable Enables or disables SyncETH, valid when the
Disable parameter of the Media Type is Optical, Speed
is AUTO. Also, RJ45 ports support SyncETH
with 1000Mbps, 100Mbps-full, Auto
Negotiation is not mandatory.

Note1: When AUTO of Speed is selected, Duplex and MDI and MDIX are not selectable.

6. Click OK button after setting the parameters.

7. The Information box appears. Click OK button.

Figure 5-35 Information Box

8. The ETH Port Setting window appears again. Confirm the displayed
parameters.

Operation NWD-115476-06E
Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only

5-28 System Operation

Figure 5-36 ETH Port Setting Window – 1/2

Figure 5-37 ETH Port Setting Window – 2/2

This step ends the procedure.

5.1.2.3 VLAN Setting

(1) VLAN List Tab

(a) Add VLAN ID

Procedure 5-10

1. Expand Provisioning from the WebLCT menu.

2. Expand ETH Function Setting from the Provisioning sub menu.

NWD-115476-06E Operation
Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only

System Operation 5-29

3. Select VLAN Setting from the ETH Function Setting sub menu.

4. The VLAN Setting window appears. Click VLAN List tab.

5. The VALN List tab appears. Click Add VLAN ID button to create a new
VLAN ID.

Add VLAN ID button NOTE 1

Figure 5-38 VLAN List Tab

6. The Add VLAN ID dialog box appears. Refer to the table below to assign a
proper value for each parameter accordingly.
NOTE 2

Figure 5-39 Add VLAN ID Dialog Box

Operation NWD-115476-06E
Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only

5-30 System Operation

Table 5-8 Add VLAN ID Parameter

Item Parameter Description


VLAN ID * 1 to 4094 Specify VLAN ID.
VALN Service Name 1 to 32 Character Specify the service name of the VLAN.

Notes:
1. When the VLAN mode setting at Bridge Setting is 802.1ad,
802.1ad is indicated instead of 802.1Q, and S-VLAN ID is
indicated instead of VLAN ID, following as well.
2. Plural VLAN IDs can be entered using comma(s) and/or hyphen in the
following patterns.
VLAN ID: 1,2,3,1000-4094
LAN Service Name: VLAN Name
(1) Plural IDs can be registered by using comma(s) and/or a hyphen, and in the above
example, VLAN IDs 1, 2, 3, and 1000 to 4094 are registered (totally 3098 IDs).
Entering 1000-4094,1,2,3 is also possible.
(2) The maximum input number of characters for the VLAN Service Name is 27
characters.
(3) If there is a VLAN ID already registered in the range of registration, a new VLAN
ID can be registered in a skip number.
(4) The VLAN Service Name of the skipped VLAN ID is not overwritten.
(5) When VLAN IDs are entered in a range, register the VLAN Service Name, adding
a suffix -xxxx (xxxx=0001-4094) to the entered value.
(6) When the VLAN Service Name is already registered, the new VLAN Service
Name should be blank.
(7) When VLAN IDs are not entered in a range, the name that was registered in the
VLAN Service Name field should be registered as-is.

7. Click OK button after setting the parameters.

8. The Information box appears. Click OK button.

Figure 5-40 Information Box

NWD-115476-06E Operation
Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only

System Operation 5-31

9. The VLAN Setting window appears again. Confirm the displayed


parameters.

Figure 5-41 VLAN List Tab in the VLAN Setting Window

This step ends the procedure.

Operation NWD-115476-06E
Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only

5-32 System Operation

(b) Modify VLAN Service Name

Procedure 5-11

1. Expand Provisioning from the WebLCT menu.

2. Expand ETH Function Setting from the Provisioning sub menu.

3. Select VLAN Setting from the ETH Function Setting sub menu.

4. The VLAN Setting window appears. Click VLAN List tab.

5. The VALN List tab appears. Click the VLAN Service Name to be
modified.

Figure 5-42 VLAN List Tab

6. The Modify VLAN Service Name box appears. Modify the VLAN
Service Name accordingly.

NWD-115476-06E Operation
Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only

System Operation 5-33

Figure 5-43 Modify VLAN Service Name Box

7. Click OK button after setting the parameters.

8. The Information box appears. Click OK button.

Figure 5-44 Information Box

9. The VALN List tab appears again. Confirm the modified VLAN Service
Name.

Figure 5-45 VLAN List Tab

This step ends the procedure.

Operation NWD-115476-06E
Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only

5-34 System Operation

(c) Delete VLAN ID

Procedure 5-12

1. Expand Provisioning from the WebLCT menu.

2. Expand ETH Function Setting from the Provisioning sub menu.

3. Select VLAN Setting from the ETH Function Setting sub menu.

4. The VLAN Setting window appears. Click VLAN List tab.

5. The VLAN List tab appears. Click Delete VLAN ID button.


Delete VLAN ID button

Figure 5-46 VLAN List Tab

6. The Delete VLAN ID box appears. Input the VLAN ID or VLAN Service
Name to be deleted.

Figure 5-47 Delete VLAN ID Box (1/2)

NWD-115476-06E Operation
Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only

System Operation 5-35

Figure 5-48 Delete VLAN ID Box (2/2)

7. Click OK button after setting the parameters.

8. The Confirmation box appears. Click OK button.

Figure 5-49 Confirmation Box

9. The Information box appears. Click OK button.

Figure 5-50 Information Box

10. The VLAN List tab appears again. Confirm the VLAN ID has been deleted.

Operation NWD-115476-06E
Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only

5-36 System Operation

Figure 5-51 VLAN List Tab

This step ends the procedure.

(2) VLAN Setting Tab (802.1Q Mode)

(a) Set VLAN ID

Procedure 5-13

1. Expand Provisioning from the WebLCT menu.

2. Expand ETH Function Setting from the Provisioning sub menu.

3. Select VLAN Setting from the ETH Function Setting sub menu.

4. The VLAN Setting window appears. Click Port No.

NWD-115476-06E Operation
Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only

System Operation 5-37

Click a Port No.

Figure 5-52 VLAN Setting Window

5. The VLAN Setting window (Port type: Access) appears. Assign a proper
value for each VLAN Assignment field parameter.

Note: The views are different according to the configuration (Access/ Tunnel/
Trunk). MODEM can be configured as Trunk only.

Operation NWD-115476-06E
Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only

5-38 System Operation

 Access

Specify the type of the port among Access, Trunk, Tunnel, Assign the VLAN ID
to the port being configured. The untagged frame passes through the port. The
received tagged frame will be discarded.

Figure 5-53 VLAN Setting Window (Port Type: Access)

NWD-115476-06E Operation
Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only

System Operation 5-39

 Tunnel

If the port is configured as Tunnel, any frame type on this port, either untagged
or tagged with any VLAN ID, will be unconditionally tagged (Outer Tag) with
the VLAN ID which is checked in the list. When the port is configured as Tunnel,
all of check boxes in the L2CP Transparency windows are enabled automatically.
This setting remains when the port is configured from tunnel to access or trunk.

Figure 5-54 VLAN Setting Window (Port Type: Tunnel)

Operation NWD-115476-06E
Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only

5-40 System Operation

 Trunk

If the port is configured as Trunk, the tagged frame with the VLAD ID that are
checked in the list will be allowed to pass through; the untagged frame will be
assigned with a VLAN ID of the selected VLAN in UntagFrame
Assignment column. The other frames will be discarded.

Figure 5-55 VLAN Setting Window (Port Type: Trunk)

Table 5-9 VLAN Assignment Parameter

Item Parameter Description


Port Type Access Only allow that untagged frame passes
through.
Tunnel Allow tagged and untagged frame pass
through.
Trunk Allow the selected tagged frame and
untagged frame pass through. Untagged
frame will be assigned with a specified
VLAN ID.
Enable check box Check If available, check it to allow that the
Uncheck selected VLAN frame passes through.
UntagFrame Assignment Check If available, check it to assign the selected
(Access Port) Uncheck VLAN ID to the untagged frame.

NWD-115476-06E Operation
Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only

System Operation 5-41

6. Click OK button after setting the parameters.

7. The Information box appears. Click OK button.

Figure 5-56 Information Box

8. The VLAN Setting window appears again. Confirm the displayed


parameters.

Figure 5-57 VLAN Setting Window

This step ends the procedure.

(3) VLAN Setting Tab (802.1ad Mode)

(a) Set VLAN ID

Procedure 5-14

1. Expand Provisioning from the WebLCT menu.

Operation NWD-115476-06E
Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only

5-42 System Operation

2. Expand ETH Function Setting from the Provisioning sub menu.

3. Select VLAN Setting from the ETH Function Setting sub menu.

4. The VLAN Setting window appears. Click Port No.

Figure 5-58 VLAN Setting Window

5. The VLAN Setting window (Port type: C-Access) appears. Assign a proper
value for each VLAN Assignment field parameter

Note: The views are different according to the configuration (C-Access/


S-Trunk/C-Bridge). MODEM can be configured as S-Trunk only.

NWD-115476-06E Operation
Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only

System Operation 5-43

 C-Access

If the port is configured as C-Access, any frame type on this port, either
untagged or tagged with any VLAN ID, will be tagged (Outer Tag) with the
VLAN ID which is checked in the list.

Figure 5-59 VLAN Setting Window (Port Type: C-Access)

Operation NWD-115476-06E
Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only

5-44 System Operation

 S-Trunk

If the port is configured as S-Trunk, only S-tagged frame will be passed through
the port. The received untagged frame will be discarded.

Figure 5-60 VLAN Setting Window (Port Type: S-Trunk)

NWD-115476-06E Operation
Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only

System Operation 5-45

 C-Bridge

If the port is configured as C-Bridge, C-tagged frames will be assigned with


S-tag VLAN ID in C-tag Frame Assignment column. The other frames will
be discarded.

Figure 5-61 VLAN Setting Window (Port Type: C-Bridge)

Table 5-10 VLAN Assignment Parameter

Item Parameter Description


Port Type C-Access Any frame type on this port, either
untagged or tagged with any VLAN ID, will
be tagged (Outer Tag) with the VLAN ID
which is checked in the list.
S-Trunk Only S-tagged frame will be passed
through the port. The received untagged
frame will be discarded.
Both of C-Access and S-Trunk can be
assigned to the same port.

Operation NWD-115476-06E
Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only

5-46 System Operation

Item Parameter Description


C-Bridge C-tagged frame will be assigned with a
specified S-tag VLAN ID.
Enable check box Check If available, check it to allow that the
Uncheck selected VLAN frame passes through.
C-tagFrame Assignment Check If available, check it to assign the selected
(C-Access Port) Uncheck VLAN ID to the C-tagged frame.
All Fixed All for C-Access and S-Trunk
C-VLAN ID 1-4094 Available when the Port type is C-Bridge.
Maximum 15 items

6. Click OK button after setting the parameters

7. The Information box appears. Click OK button.

Figure 5-62 Information Box

8. The VLAN Setting window appears again. Confirm the displayed


parameters.

Figure 5-63 VLAN Setting Window

This step ends the procedure.

NWD-115476-06E Operation
Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only

System Operation 5-47

5.1.2.4 FDB Setting

(1) FDB Setting Tab

(a) FDB Setting (Equipment)

Procedure 5-15

1. Expand Provisioning from the WebLCT menu.

2. Expand ETH Function Setting from the Provisioning sub menu.

3. Select FDB Setting from the ETH Function Setting sub menu.

4. The FDB Setting window appears. Click on Equipment to configure.

(1) FDB Setting Tab


Click Equipment.
(2) Static Entry Tab

(1)(c) Port Tab

(1)(a) Equipment

(1)(b) Service Tab

Figure 5-64 FDB Setting Tab

Operation NWD-115476-06E
Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only

5-48 System Operation

5. The FDB Setting (Equipment) dialog box appears. Assign a proper value
for each parameter.

Figure 5-65 FDB Setting (Equipment) Dialog Box

Table 5-11 FDB Setting (Equipment)

Item Parameter Description


Learning MAX Size 1 to 32384 Set the learning MAX entries of MAC Address
Learning Limit Mode Forwarding When frames coming from new MAC
addresses exceed the maximum size of FDB,
the frame without learning this source MAC
address will be forwarded.
Discard When frames coming from new MAC
addresses exceed the maximum size of FDB,
the frame will be discarded.
Learning Limit Trap Enable Enable equipment to send trap when the
learning MAC Address reaches to the
specified MAX number.
Disable Disable above feature.

6. Click OK button after setting the parameters.

7. The Information box appears. Click OK button.

Figure 5-66 Information Box

NWD-115476-06E Operation
Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only

System Operation 5-49

8. The FDB Setting tab window appears again. Confirm the displayed
parameters.

Figure 5-67 FDB Setting Tab

This step ends the procedure.

(b) FDB Setting – Service Tab - (VLAN ID)

Procedure 5-16

1. Expand Provisioning from the WebLCT menu.

2. Expand ETH Function Setting from the Provisioning sub menu.

3. Select FDB Setting from the ETH Function Setting sub menu.

4. The FDB Setting window appears. Click on the desired VLAN ID No. to
configure in the Service tab in the FDB Setting tab.

Operation NWD-115476-06E
Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only

5-50 System Operation

Click VLAN ID.

Figure 5-68 Service Tab in FDB Setting Tab

5. The FDB Setting box appears. Assign a proper value for each parameter.

Figure 5-69 FDB Setting Box

NWD-115476-06E Operation
Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only

System Operation 5-51

Table 5-12 FDB Setting (VLAN ID)

Item Parameter Description


Learning MAX Size 0 to 32384 Set the learning MAX entries of MAC Address
for the specified VLAN.
Learning Limit Mode Forwarding When frames coming from new MAC
addresses exceed the maximum size of
FDB, the frame without learning this source
MAC address will be forwarded.
Discard When frames coming from new MAC
addresses exceed the maximum size of FDB,
the frame will be discarded.

6. Click OK button after setting the parameters.

7. The Information box appears. Click OK button.

Figure 5-70 Information Box

Operation NWD-115476-06E
Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only

5-52 System Operation

8. The FDB Setting tab appears again. Confirm the displayed parameters.

Figure 5-71 FDB Setting Tab

This step ends the procedure.

(c) FDB Setting – Port Tab –

Procedure 5-17

1. Expand Provisioning from the WebLCT menu.

2. Expand ETH Function Setting from the Provisioning sub menu.

3. Select FDB Setting from the ETH Function Setting sub menu.

4. The FDB Setting window appears. Click the Port tab.

NWD-115476-06E Operation
Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only

System Operation 5-53

Port tab

Figure 5-72 FDB Setting Window

5. The Port tab appears. Click desired Port No.

Port No

Figure 5-73 Port Tab in FDB Setting Tab

6. The FDB Setting box appears. Assign a proper value for each parameter.

Operation NWD-115476-06E
Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only

5-54 System Operation

Figure 5-74 FDB Setting (Port)

7. Click OK button after setting the parameters.

8. The Information box appears. Click OK button.

Figure 5-75 Information Box

9. The FDB Setting tab appears again. Confirm the displayed parameters.

Figure 5-76 FDB Setting (Confirmation)

This step ends the procedure.

NWD-115476-06E Operation
Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only

System Operation 5-55

(2) Static Entry Tab

(a) Add Static Entry

Procedure 5-18

1. Expand Provisioning from the WebLCT menu.

2. Expand ETH Function Setting from the Provisioning sub menu.

3. Select FDB Setting from the ETH Function Setting sub menu.

4. The FDB Setting window appears. Click the Static Entry tab.

Static Entry tab

Figure 5-77 FDB Setting Window

5. The Static Entry tab appears. Click Add button.

Operation NWD-115476-06E
Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only

5-56 System Operation

Add button

(2)(a) Add Static Entry

(2) Static Entry Tab

Figure 5-78 Static Entry Tab

6. The Static Entry (Add) dialog box appears. Refer to the table below to
assign a proper value for each parameter accordingly.

Figure 5-79 Static Entry (Add) Dialog Box

NWD-115476-06E Operation
Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only

System Operation 5-57

Table 5-13 FDB Setting (Static Entry)

Item Parameter Description


Item Select the object from drop-down list.
Port Select the port from drop-down list.
MAC Address xx:xx:xx:xx:xx:xx Enter the object MAC address
Enable check box Check Check the box to assign the port to the
specified VLAN.
Uncheck Not assign the port to the VLAN.

7. Click OK button after setting the parameters.

8. The Information box appears. Click OK button.

Figure 5-80 Information Box

9. The Static Entry tab appears again. Confirm the displayed parameters.

Figure 5-81 Static Entry Tab

This step ends the procedure.

Operation NWD-115476-06E
Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only

5-58 System Operation

(b) Modify Static Entry

Procedure 5-19

1. Expand Provisioning from the WebLCT menu.

2. Expand ETH Function Setting from the Provisioning sub menu.

3. Select FDB Port Setting from the ETH Function Setting sub menu.

4. The FDB Setting window appears. Click the Static Entry tab.

Static Entry tab

Figure 5-82 FDB Setting Window

5. The Static Entry tab appears. Click the desired Entry No. to configure.

NWD-115476-06E Operation
Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only

System Operation 5-59

Entry No.

Figure 5-83 Static Entry Tab

6. The Static Entry dialog box appears. Modify the MAC address accordingly.

Figure 5-84 Static Entry Dialog Box

7. Click OK button after setting the MAC address.

Operation NWD-115476-06E
Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only

5-60 System Operation

8. The Information box appears. Click OK button.

Figure 5-85 Information Box

9. The Static Entry tab appears again. Confirm the modified parameters of the
MAC address.

Figure 5-86 Static Entry Tab

This step ends the procedure.

(c) Delete Static Entry

Procedure 5-20

1. Expand Provisioning from the WebLCT menu.

2. Expand ETH Function Setting from the Provisioning sub menu.

3. Select FDB Port Setting from the ETH Function Setting sub menu.

NWD-115476-06E Operation
Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only

System Operation 5-61

4. The FDB Setting window appears. Click the Static Entry tab.

Static Entry tab

Figure 5-87 FDB Setting Window

5. The Static Entry tab appears. Click the Delete button.

Delete button

Figure 5-88 Static Entry Tab

Operation NWD-115476-06E
Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only

5-62 System Operation

6. The Static Entry (Delete) dialog box appears. Select the Static Entry
No(s). to be deleted. If all entry numbers are to be deleted, click the check
box for collective deletion. All entry numbers are checked and can be deleted
at one time.

Check box for collective deletion


Static Entry No.

Figure 5-89 Static Entry (Delete) Dialog Box

7. Click OK button after setting the parameters.

8. The Confirmation box appears. Click OK button.

Figure 5-90 Confirmation Box

NWD-115476-06E Operation
Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only

System Operation 5-63

9. The Information box appears. Click OK button.

Figure 5-91 Information Box

10. The Static Entry tab appears again. Confirm the static entry No. has been
deleted.

Figure 5-92 Static Entry Tab

This step ends the procedure.

Operation NWD-115476-06E
Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only

5-64 System Operation

5.1.2.5 ETH OAM Setting

(1) OAM MEG Tab

(a) Add OAM MEG Index

Procedure 5-21

1. Expand Provisioning from the WebLCT menu.

2. Expand ETH Function Setting from the Provisioning sub menu.

3. Select ETH OAM Setting from the ETH Function Setting sub menu.

4. The ETH OAM Setting window appears. Click the OAM MEG tab.

OAM MEG tab

Figure 5-93 ETH OAM Setting Window

5. The OAM MEG tab appears. Click the Add MEG button.

NWD-115476-06E Operation
Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only

System Operation 5-65

Add MEG button

Figure 5-94 OAM MEG Tab

6. The OAM MEG Setting (Add) box appears. Refer to the table below to
assign a proper value for each parameter accordingly.

Figure 5-95 OAM MEG Setting (Add) Box

Table 5-14 MEG Configuration Parameter

Item Parameter Description


MEG Index 1 to 128 Specify MEG (Maintenance Entity
Group) Index.
Maintenance String of a maximum of 42 Specify the Name of the Maintenance
Domain Name characters (Maintenance Domain.

Operation NWD-115476-06E
Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only

5-66 System Operation

Item Parameter Description


Short MA Name Domain Name + Short MA Specify the Short MA Name.
Name)
MEG Level 0 to 7 Specify the Level of the MEG.
CCM Enable Enable sending and monitoring CCM.
Disable Disable sending and monitoring CCM.
ETH-CC Period 3.3ms/10ms/100ms/1s/10s/60s Set the period of ETH-CC(Continuity
Check) message.
CCM Priority 0 to 7 Specify the priority of the CCM.

7. Click OK button after setting the parameters.

8. The Information box appears. Click OK button.

Figure 5-96 Information Box

9. The OAM MEG tab appears again. Confirm the newly added MEG Index
information is displayed.

Figure 5-97 OAM MEG Tab

This step ends the procedure.

NWD-115476-06E Operation
Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only

System Operation 5-67

(b) Delete OAM MEG

Procedure 5-22

1. Expand Provisioning from the WebLCT menu.

2. Expand ETH Function Setting from the Provisioning sub menu.

3. Select ETH OAM Setting from the ETH Function Setting sub menu.

4. The ETH OAM Setting window appears. Click the OAM MEG tab.

OAM MEG tab

Figure 5-98 ETH OAM Setting Window

5. The OAM MEG tab appears. Click the Delete MEG button.

Delete MEG button

Figure 5-99 OAM MEG Tab

Operation NWD-115476-06E
Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only

5-68 System Operation

6. The OAM MEG Setting (Delete) box appears. Select the OAM MEG
Index No. to be deleted.

Figure 5-100 OAM MEG Setting (Delete) Box

7. Click OK button.

8. The Confirmation box appears. Click OK button.

Figure 5-101 Confirmation Box

9. The Information box appears. Click OK button.

Figure 5-102 Information Box

10. The OAM MEG tab appears again. Confirm the OAM MEG has been
deleted.

NWD-115476-06E Operation
Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only

System Operation 5-69

Figure 5-103 OAM MEG Tab

This step ends the procedure.

(2) OAM MEP Tab

(a) Add OAM MEP Index

Procedure 5-23

1. Expand Provisioning from the WebLCT menu.

2. Expand ETH Function Setting from the Provisioning sub menu.

3. Select ETH OAM Setting from the ETH Function Setting sub menu.

4. The ETH OAM Setting window appears. Click Add MEP button in the
OAM MEP tab.

Operation NWD-115476-06E
Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only

5-70 System Operation

Add MEP button

Figure 5-104 OAM MEP Tab

5. The OAM MEP Setting (Add) dialog box appears. Select the Enable
check box in the MEG Configuration field.
Enable check box

Add Peer MEP button

Figure 5-105 OAM MEP Setting (Add) Dialog Box

6. Click Add Peer MEP button in the Peer MEP Configuration field.

7. The Peer MEP Add box appears. Input the Peer MEP ID.

NWD-115476-06E Operation
Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only

System Operation 5-71

Figure 5-106 Peer MEP Add Box

8. Click OK button after setting the parameters.

9. The OAM MEP Setting (Add) dialog box appears again. Refer to the table
below to assign a proper value for each parameter accordingly.

Figure 5-107 OAM MEP Setting (Add) Dialog Box

Operation NWD-115476-06E
Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only

5-72 System Operation

Table 5-15 MEP Configuration field Parameter

Item Parameter Description


Peer MEP Add
Peer MEP ID 1 to 8191 Specify the MEP (MEG End Point) ID of the
peer equipment.
MEP Configuration
MEP Index 1 to 128 Specify the local MEP Index.
MEP ID 1 to 8191 Specify the ID of the MEG Index.
Item Select the object item from drop-down list.
Port Select the port from drop-down list.
Assignment VLAN Check Check the box of the VLAN ID to associate
ID List Ethernet OAM message to the VLAN.
Uncheck Not associate the MEP to the VLAN ID.
MEG Configuration
Enable Check box Check Check the box of the MEG Index to
associate MEG Configuration.
Uncheck Not associate the MEP to the MEG
Configuration.

10. Click OK button after setting the parameters.

11. The Confirmation box appears. Click OK button.

Figure 5-108 Confirmation Box

12. The Information box appears. Click OK button.

Figure 5-109 Information Box

NWD-115476-06E Operation
Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only

System Operation 5-73

13. The OAM MEP tab appears again. Confirm the newly added MEP Index
information is displayed.

Figure 5-110 OAM MEP Tab

This step ends the procedure.

(b) Modify OAM MEP Index

Procedure 5-24

1. Expand Provisioning from the WebLCT menu.

2. Expand ETH Function Setting from the Provisioning sub menu.

3. Select ETH OAM Setting from the ETH Function Setting sub menu.

Operation NWD-115476-06E
Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only

5-74 System Operation

4. The ETH OAM Setting window appears. Click the MEP Index No. to be
modified in the OAM MEP tab.

MEP Index No.

Figure 5-111 OAM MEP Tab

5. The OAM MEP Setting (Modify) dialog box appears. Modify the
parameter by referring to the table below.

Figure 5-112 OAM MEP Setting (Modify) Dialog Box

NWD-115476-06E Operation
Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only

System Operation 5-75

Table 5-16 OAM MEP Index Parameter

Item Parameter Description


Peer MEP Add
Peer MEP ID 1 to 8191 Specify the MEP (MEG End Point) ID of
the peer equipment.
MEP Configuration
MEP Index 1 to 128 Specify the Number of the MEP Index.
MEP ID 1 to 8191 Specify the ID of the MEP Index.
Item Select the object item from drop-down list.
Port Select the object port from drop-down list.
Assignment VLAN ID Check Check the box of the VLAN ID to
List associate Ethernet OAM message to the
VLAN.
Uncheck Not associate the MEP to the VLAN ID.
MEG Configuration
Enable Check box Check Check the box of the MEG Index to
associate MEG Configuration.
Uncheck Not associate the MEP to the MEG
Configuration.

6. Click OK button after setting the parameters.

7. The Confirmation box appears. Click OK button.

Figure 5-113 Confirmation Box

8. The Information box appears. Click OK button.

Figure 5-114 Information Window

Operation NWD-115476-06E
Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only

5-76 System Operation

9. The OAM MEP tab appears again. Confirm the modified parameters of the
OAM MEP Index information are displayed.

Figure 5-115 OAM MEP Tab

This step ends the procedure.

(c) Delete OAM MEP

Procedure 5-25

1. Expand Provisioning from the WebLCT menu.

2. Expand ETH Function Setting from the Provisioning sub menu.

3. Select ETH OAM Setting from the ETH Function Setting sub menu.

4. The ETH OAM Setting window appears. Click Delete MEP button in the
OAM MEP tab.

Figure 5-116 OAM MEP Tab

NWD-115476-06E Operation
Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only

System Operation 5-77

5. The OAM MEP Setting (Delete) box appears. Select the OAM MEP Index
No. to be deleted.

Figure 5-117 OAM MEP Setting (Delete) Box

6. Click OK button.

7. The Confirmation box appears. Click OK button.

Figure 5-118 Confirmation Box

8. The Information box appears. Click OK button.

Figure 5-119 Information Box

Operation NWD-115476-06E
Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only

5-78 System Operation

Note: In case that CCM Transmit / CCM Receive is enabled, if user tries to delete the
MEP Index, the following error message will appear:

Follow the procedure of (2) Modify OAM MEP Index, to disable CCM
Transmit / CCM Receive first, and then delete the MEP Index.

9. The OAM MEP tab appears again. Confirm the OAM MEP has been
deleted.

Figure 5-120 OAM MEP Tab

This step ends the procedure.

NWD-115476-06E Operation
Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only

System Operation 5-79

(3) OAM MIP Tab

(a) Add OAM MIP

Procedure 5-26

1. Expand Provisioning from the WebLCT menu.

2. Expand ETH Function Setting from the Provisioning sub menu.

3. Select ETH OAM Setting from the ETH Function Setting sub menu.

4. The ETH OAM Setting window appears. Click the OAM MIP tab.

OAM MIP tab

Figure 5-121 ETH OAM Setting Window

5. The OAM MIP tab appears. Click Add MIP button.

Figure 5-122 OAM MIP Tab

Operation NWD-115476-06E
Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only

5-80 System Operation

6. The OAM MIP Setting (Add) box appears. Refer to the table below to
assign a proper value for each parameter accordingly.

Figure 5-123 OAM MIP Setting (Add) Box

Table 5-17 OAM MIP Index Parameter

Item Parameter Description


MIP Index 1 to 32 Specify the MIP (MEG Intermediate Point)
Index.
MEG Level 0 to 7 Specify the MEG level for the MIP.
Item Select the object item from drop-down list.
Port - Select the object port from drop-down list.
Assignment VLAN ID Check Check the box of the VLAN ID to
List associate MEP to the VLAN.
Uncheck Not associate the MEP to the VLAN ID.

7. Click OK button after setting the parameters.

NWD-115476-06E Operation
Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only

System Operation 5-81

8. The Information box appears. Click OK button.

Figure 5-124 Information Box

9. The OAM MIP tab appears again. Confirm the newly added OAM MIP
information is displayed.

Figure 5-125 OAM MIP Tab

This step ends the procedure.

(b) Modify OAM MIP Index

Procedure 5-27

1. Expand Provisioning from the WebLCT menu.

2. Expand ETH Function Setting from the Provisioning sub menu.

3. Select ETH OAM Setting from the ETH Function Setting sub menu.

4. The ETH OAM Setting window appears. Click the OAM MIP tab.

Operation NWD-115476-06E
Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only

5-82 System Operation

OAM MIP tab

Figure 5-126 ETH OAM Setting Window

5. The OAM MIP tab appears. Click the desired MIP Index No. to configure.

MIP Index No.

Figure 5-127 OAM MIP Tab

6. The OAM MIP Setting (Modify) box appears. Modify the parameter.

NWD-115476-06E Operation
Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only

System Operation 5-83

Figure 5-128 OAM MIP Setting (Modify) Box

Table 5-18 OAM MIP Index Parameter

Item Parameter Description


MEG Level 0 to 7 Specify the MEG level for the MIP.
Item Select the object from drop-down list.
Port - Select the port from drop-down list.
Assignment VLAN ID Check Check the box of the VLAN ID to
List associate MEP to the VLAN.
Uncheck Not associate the MEP to the VLAN ID.

7. Click OK button after setting the parameters.

8. The Information box appears. Click OK button.

Figure 5-129 Information Box

9. The OAM MIP tab appears again. Confirm the modified parameters of the
OAM MIP information are displayed.

Operation NWD-115476-06E
Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only

5-84 System Operation

Figure 5-130 OAM MIP Tab

This step ends the procedure.

(c) Delete OAM MIP Index

Procedure 5-28

1. Expand Provisioning from the WebLCT menu.

2. Expand ETH Function Setting from the Provisioning sub menu.

3. Select ETH OAM Setting from the ETH Function Setting sub menu.

4. The ETH OAM Setting window appears. Click the OAM MIP tab.

NWD-115476-06E Operation
Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only

System Operation 5-85

OAM MIP tab

Figure 5-131 ETH OAM Setting Window

5. The OAM MIP tab appears. Click Delete MIP button.

Delete MIP button

Figure 5-132 OAM MIP Tab

6. The OAM MIP Setting (Delete) box appears. Select the OAM MIP Index
No. to be deleted.

Operation NWD-115476-06E
Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only

5-86 System Operation

Figure 5-133 OAM MIP Setting (Delete) Box

7. Click OK button.

8. The Confirmation box appears. Click OK button.

Figure 5-134 Confirmation Box

9. The Information box appears. Click OK button.

Figure 5-135 Information Box

10. The OAM MIP tab appears again. Confirm the OAM MIP Index has been
deleted.

NWD-115476-06E Operation
Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only

System Operation 5-87

Figure 5-136 OAM MIP Tab

This step ends the procedure.

(4) Link OAM Tab

(a) Link OAM Setting

Procedure 5-29

1. Expand Provisioning from the WebLCT menu.

2. Expand ETH Function Setting from the Provisioning sub menu.

3. Select ETH OAM Setting from the ETH Function Setting sub menu.

4. The ETH OAM Setting window appears. Click the Link OAM tab.

Operation NWD-115476-06E
Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only

5-88 System Operation

Link OAM tab

Figure 5-137 ETH OAM Setting Window

5. The Link OAM tab appears. Click desired Port No.

Figure 5-138 Port Tab in ETH OAM Setting Window

6. The Link OAM Setting box appears. Assign a proper value for each
parameter.

NWD-115476-06E Operation
Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only

System Operation 5-89

Figure 5-139 Link OAM Setting Box

Table 5-19 Link OAM Setting Parameter

Item Parameter Description


Link OAM Enable Enable Link OAM function
Disable Disable Link OAM function
Link OAM Mode Active Set Active Link OAM Mode
Passive Set Passive Link OAM Mode
Dying Gasp Enable Enable Dying Gasp notification
Disable Disable Dying Gasp notification
Critical Event Enable Enable Critical Event notification
Disable Disable Critical Event notification

7. Click OK button after setting the parameters.

8. The Information box appears. Click OK button.

Figure 5-140 Information Box

9. The Link OAM tab appears again. Confirm the modified parameters of the
Link OAM information are displayed.

Operation NWD-115476-06E
Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only

5-90 System Operation

Figure 5-141 Link OAM Tab

This step ends the procedure.

5.1.2.6 RSTP / MSTP Setting

Note: STP/RSTP tunnel enabling function is not supported for RSTP enabled
port.

(1) Modify RSTP Port

Procedure 5-30

1. Expand Provisioning from the WebLCT menu.

2. Expand ETH Function Setting from the Provisioning sub menu.

3. Select RSTP / MSTP Setting from the ETH Function Setting sub menu.

4. The RSTP / MSTP Setting window appears. Click Modify STP Mode
button. STP Mode Setting box appears.

NWD-115476-06E Operation
Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only

System Operation 5-91

Modify STP Mode button

Figure 5-142 RSTP / MSTP Setting Window

5. Select the RSTP from the pull-down menu. Click OK button.

Figure 5-143 STP Mode Setting Box

Table 5-20 STP Mode Setting Parameter

Item Parameter Description


STP Mode Disable Disable RSTP (Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol)
and MSTP (Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol)
RSTP Enable RSTP with RSTP and STP bilingual mode.
MSTP Enable MSTP (Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol)
with STP, RSTP and MSTP trilingual mode

6. The Information box appears. Click OK button.

Operation NWD-115476-06E
Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only

5-92 System Operation

Figure 5-144 Information Box

7. RSTP / MSTP Setting (RSTP Mode) window appears. Click Modify STP
Port button.

Modify STP Port button

Figure 5-145 RSTP / MSTP Setting (RSTP Mode) Window

8. The STP Port Setting (STP Mode: RSTP) window appears. Assign a
proper value for each parameter.

Figure 5-146 STP Port Setting (RSTP) Window

NWD-115476-06E Operation
Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only

System Operation 5-93

Table 5-21 STP Port (RSTP) Setting

Item Parameter Description


Port Name 1 to 32 Specify the port name.
Characters
STP Port Path Cost Auto Enable equipment to calculate the path
cost automatically.
Manual Enter the path cost manually.
STP Port Path Cost 1 to 200000000 Enter the cost of path when Path Cost is
(Value) set to Manual.
STP Port Priority 0 to 240 Specify the RSTP priority of the port.
(16 steps)
Edge Port Enable Set the Port as Edge port.
Disable Remove Edge port feature.

9. Click OK button after setting the parameters.

10. The Information box appears. Click OK button.

Figure 5-147 Information Box

11. The RSTP / MSTP Setting window appears again. Confirm the displayed
parameters.

Figure 5-148 RSTP / MSTP Setting Window

This step ends the procedure.

Operation NWD-115476-06E
Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only

5-94 System Operation

(2) Modify Detail RSTP Parameter

Procedure 5-31

1. Expand Provisioning from the WebLCT menu.

2. Expand ETH Function Setting from the Provisioning sub menu.

3. Select RSTP / MSTP Setting from the ETH Function Setting sub menu.

4. The RSTP / MSTP Setting window appears. Click Modify Detail STP
Parameter button.

Modify Detail STP Parameter button

Figure 5-149 RSTP / MSTP Setting Window

5. The Detail STP Parameter Setting box appears. Assign a proper value
for each parameter.

Figure 5-150 Detail STP Parameter Setting Box

NWD-115476-06E Operation
Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only

System Operation 5-95

Table 5-22 Detail RSTP Parameter


Item Parameter Description
Bridge Priority (RSTP) 0 to 61440 Set STP priority of the bridge.
(4096 steps)
STP Bridge MAX Age 6 to 40 s Set the expiration of the Configuration BPDU stored. Bridge
will notice that a topology change has occurred after the Max
Age time elapses and the BPDU is aged out.
STP Bridge Hello Time 1 [s] Set the period of sending Configuration BPDUs from Root
Bridge.
2 [s]
STP Bridge Forward 4 to 30 s Set the delay when the port is going to change the state from
Delay Listening to Learning.
STP TX Hold Count 1 to 10 Set the number of BPDU which can be sent per second.

6. Click OK button after setting the parameters.

7. The Information box appears. Click OK button.

Figure 5-151 Information Box

8. The RSTP / MSTP Setting window appears again. Confirm the displayed
parameters.

Figure 5-152 RSTP / MSTP Setting Window

This step ends the procedure.

Operation NWD-115476-06E
Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only

5-96 System Operation

(3) Confirmation of MSTP Operation

Procedure 5-32

[Sample Configuration]

1. First referring to VLAN Setting, set VLAN ID=10 and 20 for Port 01 and
Port 02 at local and equipments:

VLAN ID=10 for Port 01, Port 02 for both local and remote terminals
VLAN ID=20 for Port 02 for both local and remote terminals

Connect the same port numbers each other using LAN cables.

2. Expand Provisioning from the WebLCT menu.

3. Expand ETH Function Setting from the Provisioning sub menu.

4. Select RSTP / MSTP Setting from the ETH Function Setting sub menu.

5. The RSTP / MSTP Setting window appears.

6. Click Modify STP Mode button. STP Mode Setting box appears.
Modify STP Mode button

Figure 5-153 RSTP / MSTP Setting Window

NWD-115476-06E Operation
Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only

System Operation 5-97

Figure 5-154 STP Mode Setting Box

7. Select the MSTP from the pull-down menu. RSTP / MSTP Setting (STP
Mode: MSTP) window appears. Click Modify STP Port button.

Modify STP Port button

Figure 5-155 RSTP / MSTP Setting (MSTP Mode) Window

8. STP Port Setting box (STP Mode: MSTP, IST tab) appears. Assign a
proper value for each parameter.

Operation NWD-115476-06E
Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only

5-98 System Operation

Figure 5-156 STP Port Setting Box

Table 5-23 STP Port Setting Parameter (1/2)

Item Parameter Description


Region Name 1 to 32 Character Specify region name
Revision No. 0 to 65535 Specify revision number
BPDU Guard Timer Used /
Usage Not Used
BPDU Guard Timer
Bridge Priority (IST) 1 to 61440
(4096 steps)
Port Name 1 to 32 Characters Specify the port name.
STP Port Path Cost Auto Enable equipment to calculate the path cost
automatically.
Manual Enter the path cost manually.
STP Port Path Cost 1 to 200000000 Enter the cost of path when Path Cost is set to
(Value) Manual.
STP Port Priority 0 to 240 Specify the RSTP priority of the port.
(16 steps)

NWD-115476-06E Operation
Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only

System Operation 5-99

Table 5-22 STP Mode Setting Parameters (2/2)

Item Parameter Description


Edge Port Enable Set the Port as Edge port.
Disable Remove Edge port feature.
BPDU Guard Enable Enable BPDU Guard.
Disable Disable BPDU Guard.
Root Guard Enable Enable Root Guard.
Disable Disable Root Guard.

9. Set the following parameters same for the two iPASOLINKs:


 Region Name (in STP Port Setting box - IST tab)
 Revision Number (in STP Port Setting box - IST tab)
 Instance Number (in STP Port Setting box - MSTI1, MSTI2 tab)
 VLAN Mapping (in VLAN Setting box)

10. In STP Port Setting box - IST tab, set Enable for Port 01 to Port 03.

Operation NWD-115476-06E
Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only

5-100 System Operation

Figure 5-157 STP Port Setting Box - IST tab

11. In STP Port Setting box - MSTI1 tab, set MSTI1 to Enable, and check the
Enable check box for Port 01 and Port 02.

NWD-115476-06E Operation
Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only

System Operation 5-101

Figure 5-158 STP Port Setting Box - MSTI1 Tab

12. In STP Port Setting box - MSTI2 tab, set MSTI2 to Enable, and check the
Enable check box for Port 01 and Port 03.

Operation NWD-115476-06E
Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only

5-102 System Operation

Figure 5-159 STP Port Setting Box - MSTI2 Tab

13. Click the OK button. The RSTP / MSTP Setting window - IST tab
appears again. Confirm the Status column for Port01 and Port02 of both
iPASOLINKs.

NWD-115476-06E Operation
Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only

System Operation 5-103

Confirm at the Local and


remote NEs.

Figure 5-160 RSTP / MSTP Setting Window (Port Status)

This step ends the procedure.

Operation NWD-115476-06E
Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only

5-104 System Operation

Notes on MSTP Operation


1. MSTP cannot be operated with ETH-Ring simultaneously in an equipment.
2. At the initial condition, all VLAN belong to IST.
3. Under 802.1ad mode, MSTP can not operate at the port that has
C-Access/C-bridge.
4. Adjusting the default value concerning Timer, Hop, etc.

 The default value for the Timer is a recommended value by


Recommendation.
5. There is no dependence relationship between the VLAN assigned to instance and
the VLAN assigned to port.

 NEC Recommends that VLAN is assigned to all ports which oppose to the
MSTP equipment.

NWD-115476-06E Operation
Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only

System Operation 5-105

5.1.2.7 Link Aggregation Setup

(a) Add Link Aggregation (ETH GRP)

Procedure 5-33

1. Expand Provisioning from the WebLCT menu.

2. Expand ETH Function Setting from the Provisioning sub menu.

3. Select Link Aggregation Setting from the ETH Function Setting sub
menu.

4. The Link Aggregation Setting window appears. Click Add LAG button.

Add LAG button

Figure 5-161 Link Aggregation Setting Window

5. Add LAG window appears. Assign a proper value for each parameter.

Operation NWD-115476-06E
Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only

5-106 System Operation

Figure 5-162 Add LAG

Table 5-24 Add LAG Parameter

Item Parameter Description


Link Aggregation Group
LAG Indicates the Link Aggregation Group
LAG Name 0-32 Characters Specify the service name of the Link
Aggregation Group
Mode LACP – Active Active LACP indicates the ETH port’s
(Valid only for ETH LAG. preference to participate in the protocol
Fixed static mode is set in the regardless of the Partner’s control value.
Radio LAG mode.) LACP – Passive Passive LACP indicates the ETH port’s
preference for not transmitting LACPDUs
unless its Partner’s control value is Active LACP
Static Without LACP, static operation mode
TX Interval Short Fast periodic (1 second) transmission of
LACPDUs mode
Long Slow periodic (30 seconds) transmission of
LACPDUs mode
Revertive Revertive / Non revertive Valid when the Mode is static
When a failure of the active specified port is
cleared, revertive mode automatically switches
the line back to the active port.

NWD-115476-06E Operation
Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only

System Operation 5-107

Item Parameter Description


Distribution Rule L2 Base Distribution is based on Source & Destination
MAC, VLAN ID, Ethernet type, Physical Port ID.
L3 Base Distribution is based on Source & Destination
IP, Source & Destination TCP/UDP Port
Number.
MPLS Base Distribution is based on MPLS Tunnel and VC
Label.
Link Aggregation Port
LAG Pull-down menu Specify ports for the Link Aggregation Group.
Port Role Active / Standby In LACP Mode, each port can be assigned as
active or standby. At least, one active port is
needed in the Link Aggregation Group. 1:1
ACT/Standby configuration is supported.
(In Radio LAG, this is not selectable, and the
LAG Port Status is fixed to Standby.)

6. Click OK button after setting the parameters.

7. The Information box appears. Click OK button.

Figure 5-163 Information Box

8. Click OK button. The Link Aggregation Setting window appears again.


Confirm the displayed parameters.

Operation NWD-115476-06E
Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only

5-108 System Operation

Figure 5-164 Link Aggregation Setting Window

This step ends the procedure

(b) Add Radio LAG (Packet Layer)

In the Radio Configuration (subsection 4.4.2.2), if the Radio GRP1 is selected,


and further the Packet Layer is selected at Radio Traffic Aggregation
pulldown menu, Radio LAG (Packet Layer) can be made. The following figure is
an example for the Link Aggregation Setup window including Radio LAG
(Packet Layer).

NWD-115476-06E Operation
Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only

System Operation 5-109

Figure 5-165 Add Radio LAG (Packet Layer)

(c) Modify

Procedure 5-34

1. Expand Provisioning from the WebLCT menu.

2. Expand ETH Function Setting from the Provisioning sub menu.

3. Select Link Aggregation Setting from the ETH Function Setting sub
menu.

4. The Link Aggregation Setting window appears. Click Modify Link


Aggregation button.

Operation NWD-115476-06E
Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only

5-110 System Operation

Figure 5-166 Link Aggregation Setting Window

5. Link Aggregation Setting box appears. Assign proper value for each
parameter.

Figure 5-167 Link Aggregation Setting Box

NWD-115476-06E Operation
Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only

System Operation 5-111

6. Click OK button. Information box appears.

Figure 5-168 Information Box

7. Click OK button. The Link Aggregation Setting window appears again.

Figure 5-169 Link Aggregation Setting Window

8. Click OK button. The Link Aggregation Setting window appears again.


Confirm the displayed parameters.

This step ends the procedure.

Operation NWD-115476-06E
Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only

5-112 System Operation

(d) Delete LAG

Procedure 5-35

1. Expand Provisioning from the WebLCT menu.

2. Expand ETH Function Setting from the Provisioning sub menu.

3. Select Link Aggregation Setting from the ETH Function Setting sub
menu.

4. The Link Aggregation Setting window appears. Click Delete LAG button.

Delete LAG button

Figure 5-170 Link Aggregation Setting Window

5. Delete LAG box appears. Click the check box of LAG to be deleted.

NWD-115476-06E Operation
Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only

System Operation 5-113

Figure 5-171 Delete LAG Box

6. Click OK button. Information box appears.

Figure 5-172 Information Box

7. Click OK button. The Link Aggregation Setting window appears again.


Confirm the LAG item(s) after deletion.

Operation NWD-115476-06E
Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only

5-114 System Operation

Figure 5-173 Link Aggregation Setting Window

This step ends the procedure.

(e) Radio LAG (Physical Layer)


In the Radio Configuration, if the Radio GRP is selected at Radio Traffic
Aggregation pull down menu, Radio LAG can be made.

Procedure 5-36

1. Expand Provisioning from the WebLCT menu.

2. Expand ETH Function Setting from the Provisioning sub menu.

3. Select Link Aggregation Setting from the ETH Function Setting sub
menu.

4. The Link Aggregation Setting window appears. In the window, you can
confirm that the Distribution Rule is L1 Base (Physical Layer). Click the
Modify Link Aggregation button.

NWD-115476-06E Operation
Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only

System Operation 5-115

Modify Link Aggregation button

Figure 5-174 Link Aggregation Setting Window

5. The Link Aggregation Setting box appears. In the window, LAG Name
only can be changed.

Figure 5-175 Link Aggregation Setting Box

This step ends the procedure.

Operation NWD-115476-06E
Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only

5-116 System Operation

Notes on Radio Traffic Aggregation (Physical Layer) Operation


1. In an opposing radio system configuring RTA, a signal cannot be transmitted as
far as the radio settings do not coincide.

 In an opposing radio system, when either RTA function is set to valid, an


alarm is reported till the setting coincides.
2. When only one radio channel is available because of a failure, etc., the effective
band width may reduce comparing with the system without RTA function.
3. When replacing MODEM, use Lockin command similarly to 1+1 MODEM
system.
4. NEC recommends an operation whose channel separation and modulation rate fit
both of MODEM cards.
5. With RTA set condition, if an old MODEM is equipped, Setting mismatch alarm
is issued.
6. Actual Ethernet bandwidth depends on the packet size.

NWD-115476-06E Operation
Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only

System Operation 5-117

5.1.2.8 ERP Setting

Procedure 5-37

1. Expand Provisioning from the WebLCT menu.

2. Expand ETH Function Setting from the Provisioning sub menu.

3. Select ERP Setting from the ETH Function Setting sub menu.

4. The ERP Setting windows appears. Click Modify ERP Mode button.

Figure 5-176 ERP Setting Window

5. ERP Mode Setting box appears. Click the Enable radio button. Then click
OK button.

Figure 5-177 ERP Mode Setting Box

6. Information box appears. Click OK button.

Figure 5-178 Information Box

Operation NWD-115476-06E
Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only

5-118 System Operation

7. In the ERP Setting window, Add ERP button becomes valid. Click Add ERP
button.

Figure 5-179 ERP Setting Window

8. Step1 ERP Setting box will appear. Assign a proper value for each
parameter

Figure 5-180 Step1 ERP Setting Box

NWD-115476-06E Operation
Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only

System Operation 5-119

Table 5-25 Step1 ERP Setting

Item Parameter Description


Ring ID 01 – 16 Specify the Ring ID of the ring.
Ring Name 1 – 32 characters Specify the port name of the ring.
Ring Type Major Ring Fixed configuration.
ERP Version G.8032v1 / G.8032v2 Specify the version. G.8032v2 only supports
multiple rings ID for the port.
Ring Port 0
Item Specify the card.
Port Specify the port.
Ring Port 1
Item Specify the card.
Port - Specify the port.
RPL Owner Enable / Disable The RPL owner node is an ETH ring node
adjacent to the RPL that is responsible for
blocking its end of the RPL under normal
conditions. Only one RPL owner node
should exist in the ring.
RPL Port Port 0 / Port 1 Valid when the RPL Owner setting is
enabled. Specify the RPL port.
Item Parameter Description

Revertive Mode Revertive / Non revertive Valid when the RPL Owner setting is
enabled. When a failure of the active
specified port is cleared, revertive mode
automatically switches the line back
WTR Timer Pull-down menu Valid when the RPL Owner setting is
enabled. In the case of clearing of a defect,
the traffic instance reverts after the expiry of
this WTR timer.
Guard Timer 10 – 2000 msec The guard timer is activated whenever an
(default: 500 msec) ETH ring node receives an indication that a
local switching request has cleared.

9. Click Next button. Step2 ERP VLAN Setting box appears. Assign a
proper value for each parameter.

Operation NWD-115476-06E
Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only

5-120 System Operation

Figure 5-181 Step2 ERP VLAN Setting Box

Table 5-26 Step2 ERP VLAN Setting

Item Parameter Description

Control VLAN ID 1 – 4094 The VLAN ID is used for R-APS transmission.


Different control VLAN IDs are needed to be
specified for each ring.
R-APS Message Priority 0 – 7 (default: 7) VLAN CoS field of R-APS frame.
R-APS Message MEG Level 0 – 7 (default: 2) MEG level of R-APS message.
Traffic VLAN ID
Enable (check box) Check / uncheck

10. Click Next button. Step3 ERP LOC Detection MEP Index Setting box
appears. Assign a proper value for each parameter.

NWD-115476-06E Operation
Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only

System Operation 5-121

Figure 5-182 Step3 ERP LOC Detection MEP Index Setting Box

Table 5-27 Step3 ERP LOC Detection MEP Index Setting Box

Item Parameter Description


LOC Detection Enable / Disable Enables failure detection and switching of the
ring using ETH-CC. For fast switching under
50ms, this setting is required with 3.3ms
ETH-CC setting.
Ring Port 0
LOC Detection MEP Index Check / Uncheck Specify the MEP index to be used.
Ring Port 1
LOC Detection MEP Index Check / Uncheck Specify the MEP index to be used.

11. Click Next button. Step4 Setting Confirmation Screen appears.

Operation NWD-115476-06E
Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only

5-122 System Operation

Figure 5-183 Step4 Setting Confirmation Screen

12. Click OK button.

13. Information box appears. Click OK button.

Figure 5-184 Information Box

14. ERP Setting window appears again. Confirm the displayed parameters

NWD-115476-06E Operation
Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only

System Operation 5-123

Figure 5-185 ERP Setting Window

This step ends the procedure.

Operation NWD-115476-06E
Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only

5-124 System Operation

5.1.2.9 QoS/Classification Setting

 Classify Setting

iPASOLINK supports QoS based on MEF10 and REC4115 which classifies the
traffic into eight classes with the proper Internal Priority according to the
predetermined Policer. Except the default Policer, user can configure up to three
additional Policers which provide user the capability of realizing the
user-orientation QoS strategy flexibly. The Internal Priority is used for the
following purposes:

1) Indentify Ingress traffic properly according to the predetermined Policer.

2) Mapping the eight classes of ingress traffic to four classes when queueing the
Egress traffic.

3) Copy the original internal priority to the capsulated frame to prevent the
traffic priority from changing unexpectedly. (VLAN c-tag CoS/VLAN s-tag
CoS)

Three modes are available for QoS Classification.

1) Equipment Based QoS Mode (default)


QoS classification policies are determined by per-equipment basis. One
classification profile is activated, and up to three profiles are stored on the
equipment configuration. In this mode, most outer QoS field of the packet
can be specified for the classification policy.

2) Port Based QoS Mode


QoS classification policies are determined by per-port basis. In this mode,
inner QoS field of the packet can be specified for the classification policy.

3) VLAN ID Based QoS Mode


QoS classification policies are determined by per-VLAN ID basis. In this
mode, VLAN ID field of the packet can be specified for the classification
policy.

 Ingress

At the Ingress of the traffic, assign the internal priority and then perform flow
control according to the predetermined policer, coloring the frame with Yellow
or Green which decides the QoS queue at the egress, discarding the frames of the
traffic that exceed the designated bandwidth (EIR, Excess Information Rate).

 Egress

Queueing the frame according to the internal priority and the color assigned at

NWD-115476-06E Operation
Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only

System Operation 5-125

ingress, determine forwarding or discarding the frame.

(1) Classify Setting Tab [Equipment Based QoS Mode]

(a) Classification Mode Setting

Procedure 5-38

1. Expand Provisioning from the WebLCT menu.

2. Expand ETH Function Setting from the Provisioning sub menu.

3. Select QoS / Classification Setting from the ETH Function Setting


sub menu.

4. The QoS / Classification Setting window appears. Click the


Classification Mode button.

Classification Mode button

Figure 5-186 QoS/Classification Setting Window

5. The Classification Mode window appears. Select the Equipment Based


QoS Mode.

Operation NWD-115476-06E
Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only

5-126 System Operation

6. The Information box appears. Click OK button.

Figure 5-187 Information Box

7. The QoS/Classification Setting window appears again. Confirm the


parameters displayed.

This step ends the procedure.

(b) Classify Entry Setting

Procedure 5-39

1. Expand Provisioning from the WebLCT menu.

2. Expand ETH Function Setting from the Provisioning sub menu.

3. Select QoS/Classification Setting from the ETH Function Setting sub


menu.

4. The QoS/Classification Setting window appears. Select the object from


Classify Profile No. drop-down list.

NWD-115476-06E Operation
Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only

System Operation 5-127

Classify Profile No. drop-down list

Figure 5-188 QoS/Classification Setting Window

5. The QoS/Classification Setting window appears again. Click the desired


Entry No. to configure.

Operation NWD-115476-06E
Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only

5-128 System Operation

Entry No

Figure 5-189 QoS/Classification Setting Window

6. The Classify Entry Setting box appears. Assign a proper value for each
parameter.

Figure 5-190 Classify Entry Setting Box

Table 5-28 Classify Entry Setting Parameter

Item Parameter Description


Classify Field type VLAN CoS Select field to be used when classifying
IPv4 Precedence the packets.
IPv4 DSCP
IPv6 DSCP
MPLS EXP
Other

NWD-115476-06E Operation
Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only

System Operation 5-129

Item Parameter Description

Classify Priority 0 t0 7
(Classify Field type = VLAN CoS, IPv4
Precedence, MPLS EXP, or Other)
0 to 63
(Classify Field type = IPv4 DSCP or IPv6
DSCP)
Classify Internal 0 to 7 Select Classify Priority to the internal
Priority priority from drop-down list.

7. The Information box appears. Click OK button.

Figure 5-191 Information Box

8. The QoS/Classification Setting window appears again. Confirm the


displayed parameters.

Figure 5-192 QoS/Classification Setting Window

This step ends the procedure.

Operation NWD-115476-06E
Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only

5-130 System Operation

(c) Delete Entry

Procedure 5-40

1. Expand Provisioning from the WebLCT menu.

2. Expand ETH Function Setting from the Provisioning sub menu.

3. Select QoS/Classification Setting from the ETH Function Setting sub


menu.

4. The QoS/Classification Setting window appears. Select the object from


Classify Profile No. drop-down list.

Classify Profile No. drop-down list

Figure 5-193 QoS/Classification Setting Window

5. The QoS/Classification Setting window appears again. Click Delete


Entry button.

NWD-115476-06E Operation
Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only

System Operation 5-131

Delete Entry button.

Figure 5-194 QoS/Classification Setting Window

6. The Delete Entry box appears. Assign a proper value for each parameter
and then click OK button.

Figure 5-195 Delete Entry Box

7. The Confirmation box appears. Click OK button.

Figure 5-196 Confirmation Box

8. The Information box appears. Click OK button.

Operation NWD-115476-06E
Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only

5-132 System Operation

Figure 5-197 Information Box

9. The QoS/Classification Setting window appears again. Confirm the


displayed parameters.

Figure 5-198 QoS/Classification Setting Window

This step ends the procedure.

(d) Select Profile No.

Procedure 5-41

1. Expand Provisioning from the WebLCT menu.

2. Expand ETH Function Setting from the Provisioning sub menu.

3. Select QoS/Classification Setting from the ETH Function Setting sub


menu.

4. The QoS/Classification Setting window appears. Click the Select


Profile No. button to configure.

NWD-115476-06E Operation
Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only

System Operation 5-133

Select Profile No. button

Figure 5-199 QoS/Classification Setting Window

5. The Select Profile No. box appears. Assign a proper value by using
drop-down list.

Figure 5-200 Select Profile No. Box

6. The Information box appears. Click OK button.

Figure 5-201 Information Box

7. The QoS/Classification Setting window appears. Confirm the displayed


parameters.

Operation NWD-115476-06E
Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only

5-134 System Operation

Figure 5-202 QoS/Classification Setting Window

This step ends the procedure.

(2) Classify Setting Tab [Port Based QoS Mode]

(a) Classification Mode Setting

Procedure 5-42

1. Expand Provisioning from the WebLCT menu.

2. Expand ETH Function Setting from the Provisioning sub menu.

3. Select QoS/Classification Setting from the ETH Function Setting sub


menu.

4. The QoS/Classification Setting window appears. Click Classification


Mode button.

NWD-115476-06E Operation
Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only

System Operation 5-135

Classification Mode button.

Figure 5-203 Classify Setting Window

5. The Classification Mode window appears. Select the Port Based QoS
Mode.

6. The Information box appears. Click OK button.

Figure 5-204 Information Box

7. The QoS/Classification Setting window appears again. Confirm the


parameters displayed.

This step ends the procedure.

Operation NWD-115476-06E
Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only

5-136 System Operation

(b) Port Classification Mode Setting

Procedure 5-43

1. Expand Provisioning from the WebLCT menu.

2. Expand ETH Function Setting from the Provisioning sub menu.

3. Select QoS/Classification Setting from the ETH Function Setting sub


menu.

4. The QoS/Classification Setting window appears. Click the Port button

Port button

Figure 5-205 QoS/Classification Setting Window

5. The Port Classification Mode Setting window appears. Select the object
from Port Classification Mode drop-down list and Assign a proper value
for Default Port Priority.

NWD-115476-06E Operation
Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only

System Operation 5-137

Figure 5-206 Port Classification Mode Setting Window (802.1q Mode)

Figure 5-207 Port Classification Mode Setting Window (802.1ad Mode)

Table 5-29 Port Classification Mode Setting Parameter

Item Parameter Description


Port Classification Port Select the object from drop-down list
Mode CoS (C-Tag) - CoS (C-Tag): use C-Tag CoS as the
Cos (S-Tag) internal priority
IPv4 / v6 DSCP - CoS (S-Tag): use S-Tag CoS as the
internal priority
- IPv4 / v6 DSCP: use DSCP as the
internal priority. DSCP is used even if a
frame has VLAN tag
- Port: Default priority of the port. This
value is used for access VLAN port, and
default value when specified DSCP filed is
not exist in the frame in the IPv4 /v6
DSCP mode.
Default Port Priority 0 to 7 Select the default priority for the port

6. The Information box appears. Click OK button.

Operation NWD-115476-06E
Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only

5-138 System Operation

Figure 5-208 Information Box

(c) DSCP Classification Mapping Setting

Procedure 5-44

1. Expand Provisioning from the WebLCT menu.

2. Expand ETH Function Setting from the Provisioning sub menu.

3. Select QoS/Classification Setting from the ETH Function Setting sub


menu.

4. The QoS/Classification Setting window appears. Click the DSCP


Classification Mapping button.

DSCP Classification Mapping button

Figure 5-209 QoS/Classification Setting Window

NWD-115476-06E Operation
Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only

System Operation 5-139

5. DSCP Classification Mapping window appears.

Figure 5-210 DSCP Classification Mapping Window

6. DSCP values 0 to 63 are summarized to 0 to 7 internal priority values.


An internal priority value can be changed if required.

Table 5-30 DSCP Classification Mapping

Item Parameter Description


DSCP Value Internal Priority Specify equipment internal priority value
(0 – 63) (0 – 7) for each DSCP value.

This step ends the procedure.

Operation NWD-115476-06E
Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only

5-140 System Operation

(3) Classify Setting Tab [VLAN ID Based QoS Mode]

Procedure 5-45

1. Expand Provisioning from the WebLCT menu.

2. Expand ETH Function Setting from the Provisioning sub menu.

3. Select QoS / Classification Setting from the ETH Function Setting


sub menu.

4. The QoS / Classification Setting window appears.

5. Click Classification Mode link. The Classification Mode box (for


selection) appears.

Figure 5-211 QoS / Classification Setting Window

6. Select the VLAN ID Based QoS Mode. Click OK button.

NWD-115476-06E Operation
Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only

System Operation 5-141

Figure 5-212 Classification Mode Box

7. The Information box appears. Click OK button.

Figure 5-213 Information Box

8. The QoS / Classification Setting window (VLAN ID Mode QoS)


appears. Click Default Priority link.

Operation NWD-115476-06E
Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only

5-142 System Operation

Figure 5-214 QoS / Classification [VLAN ID Based QoS Mode] Setting Window

9. The Default Priority Setting box appears. Specify the priority from 0 to 7.

Figure 5-215 Default Setting Box

10. The Information box appears. Click OK button.

NWD-115476-06E Operation
Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only

System Operation 5-143

Figure 5-216 Information Box

11. Click OK button. The QoS / Classification Setting window appears


again.

12. Click Entry No. to be set. The VLAN Classification Mode Setting
box appears. Set the parameters.

Figure 5-217 VLAN Classification Mode Setting Box

Table 5-31 VLAN Classification Mode Setting Parameters

Item Parameter Description


Enable On / Off VLAN ID Based QoS enabled / disabled.
(radio button) Up to 128 VLAN ID can be assigned to be
enabled.
Internal Priority 0 to 7 Specify Internal Priority value

Operation NWD-115476-06E
Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only

5-144 System Operation

Table 5-32 VLAN Classification Mode Behavior


Item Parameter Description
Access Assigned Assigned Internal Priority
Tunnel Not assigned Default Priority (Equipment based assign)
Trunk Assigned Assigned Internal Priority
Not assigned VLAN Tag CoS value

13. After setting parameters, click OK button.

14. The Information box appears. Click OK button.

Figure 5-218 Information Box

15. The QoS / Classification Setting window appears again.

NWD-115476-06E Operation
Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only

System Operation 5-145

Figure 5-219 QoS / Classification Setting Window (VLAN ID Based QoS Mode)

16. Confirm the parameters displayed.

This step ends the procedure.

(4) Ingress Setting Tab

(a) Add Policer Index

Procedure 5-46

1. Expand Provisioning from the WebLCT menu.

2. Expand ETH Function Setting from the Provisioning sub menu.

3. Select QoS/Classification Setting from the ETH Function Setting sub


menu.

4. The QoS/Classification Setting window appears. Click Ingress


Setting tab.

Operation NWD-115476-06E
Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only

5-146 System Operation

Ingress Setting tab

Figure 5-220 Classification Setting Window

5. The Ingress Setting tab appears. Click the Add Policer Index button.

Add Policer Index button

Figure 5-221 Ingress Setting Tab

NWD-115476-06E Operation
Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only

System Operation 5-147

6. The Add Policer Index box appears. Assign a proper value for each
parameter.

Policer Profile Detail button

Figure 5-222 Add Policer Index Box

Table 5-33 Ingress Policer Index Parameter

Item Parameter Description


Item Select the object from drop-down list
Port Specify the port from drop-down list.
CoS 0 to 7 Specify the CoS
Policer Profile No. 1-16 Specify the Policer Profile number that will
be applied on the port.
VLAN ID Check Enable Policer on the checked VLAN.
Uncheck -

7. Click the Policer Profile Detail button.

8. The Ingress Policer Profile Detail Setting box appears. Assign a proper
value for each parameter.

Operation NWD-115476-06E
Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only

5-148 System Operation

Figure 5-223 Ingress Policer Profile Detail Setting Box

Table 5-34 Ingress Policer Profile Detail Parameter

Item Parameter Description


EIR 0 to 1000000 kbps Set the Excess Information Rate.
CIR 0 to 1000000 kbps Set the Committed Information Rate.
EBS 0 to 128 kbyte Specify the Excess Burst Size.
CBS 1 to 64 kbyte Specify the Committed Burst Size.

Note You need to set Ebs value bigger than MTU size of the policer applying
port.

9. Click OK button after setting the parameters.

10. The Information box appears. Click OK button.

Figure 5-224 Information Box

11. The Add Policer Index box appears again. Click OK button.

NWD-115476-06E Operation
Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only

System Operation 5-149

Figure 5-225 Add Policer Index Box

12. The Information box appears. Click OK button.

Figure 5-226 Information Box

13. The Ingress Setting tab appears again. Confirm the newly added Ingress
Policer Index information is displayed.

Operation NWD-115476-06E
Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only

5-150 System Operation

Figure 5-227 Ingress Setting Tab

This step ends the procedure.

(b) Ingress Policer Profile Detail Setting

Procedure 5-47

1. Expand Provisioning from the WebLCT menu.

2. Expand ETH Function Setting from the Provisioning sub menu.

3. Select QoS/Classification Setting from the ETH Function Setting sub


menu.

4. The QoS/Classification Setting window appears. Click Ingress


Setting tab.

NWD-115476-06E Operation
Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only

System Operation 5-151

Figure 5-228 QoS/Classification Setting Window

5. The Ingress Setting tab appears. Click the Ingress Policer Profile
Setting button.
Ingress Policer Profile Setting button

Figure 5-229 Ingress Setting Tab

6. The Ingress Policer Profile Setting box appears. Click the desired
Ingress Policer Index No. to configure.

Operation NWD-115476-06E
Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only

5-152 System Operation

Figure 5-230 Ingress Policer Profile Setting Box

7. The Ingress Policer Profile Detail Setting box appears. Assign a proper
value for each parameter.

Figure 5-231 Ingress Policer Profile Detail Setting Box

Table 5-35 Ingress Policer Profile Detail Setting Parameter

Item Parameter Description


EIR 0 to 1000000 (kbps) Set the Excess Information Rate.
CIR 0 to 1000000 (kbps) Set the Committed Information Rate.
EBS 0 to 128 (kbyte) Specify the Excess Burst Size.
CBS 1 to 64 (kbyte) Specify the Committed Burst Size.

8. Click OK button after setting the parameters.

9. The Information box appears. Click OK button.

NWD-115476-06E Operation
Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only

System Operation 5-153

Figure 5-232 Information Box

10. The Ingress Policer Profile Setting box appears again. Click Close
button.

Figure 5-233 Ingress Policer Profile Setting Box

11. The Ingress Setting tab appears again. Confirm the displayed parameters.

Operation NWD-115476-06E
Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only

5-154 System Operation

Figure 5-234 Ingress Setting Tab

This step ends the procedure.

(c) Modify Policer Index

Procedure 5-48

1. Expand Provisioning from the WebLCT menu.

2. Expand ETH Function Setting from the Provisioning sub menu.

3. Select QoS/Classification Setting from the ETH Function Setting sub


menu.

4. The QoS/Classification Setting window appears. Click Ingress


Setting tab.

NWD-115476-06E Operation
Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only

System Operation 5-155

Ingress Setting tab

Figure 5-235 QoS/Classification Setting Window

5. The Ingress Setting tab appears. Click the desired Policer Index No. to
configure.
Policer Index No.

Figure 5-236 Ingress Setting Tab

Operation NWD-115476-06E
Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only

5-156 System Operation

6. The Ingress Policer Setting box appears. Modify the parameters.

Figure 5-237 Ingress Policer Setting Box

Table 5-36 Ingress Policer Index Parameter

Item Parameter Description


CoS 0 to 7 Specify the CoS.
Policer Profile No. 1-16 Specify the Policer Profile number which
will be applied on the port.
VLAN ID Check Enable Policer on the checked VLAN.
Uncheck -

7. Click OK button after setting the parameters.

8. The Information box appears. Click OK button.

Figure 5-238 Information Box

NWD-115476-06E Operation
Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only

System Operation 5-157

9. The Ingress Setting tab appears again. Confirm the modified parameters
of the Ingress Policer Index information are displayed.

Figure 5-239 Ingress Setting Tab

This step ends the procedure.

(d) Delete Ingress Policer Index

Procedure 5-49

1. Expand Provisioning from the WebLCT menu.

2. Expand ETH Function Setting from the Provisioning sub menu.

3. Select QoS/Classification Setting from the ETH Function Setting sub


menu.

4. The QoS/Classification Setting window appears. Click Ingress


Setting tab.

Operation NWD-115476-06E
Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only

5-158 System Operation

Ingress Setting tab

Figure 5-240 QoS/Classification Setting Window

5. The Ingress Setting tab appears. Click Delete Policer Index button.

Delete Policer Index button

Figure 5-241 Ingress Setting Tab

6. The Delete Policer Index box appears. Input the Ingress Policer Index
No. to be deleted.

NWD-115476-06E Operation
Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only

System Operation 5-159

Figure 5-242 Delete Policer Index Box

7. Click OK button.

8. The Confirmation box appears. Click OK button.

Figure 5-243 Confirmation Box

9. The Information box appears. Click OK button.

Figure 5-244 Information Box

10. The Ingress Setting tab appears again. Confirm the specifies Ingress
Policer Index No. has been deleted.

Operation NWD-115476-06E
Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only

5-160 System Operation

Figure 5-245 Ingress Setting Tab

This step ends the procedure.

(5) Port Setting Tab

(a) 4 Port QoS

Procedure 5-50

1. Expand Provisioning from the WebLCT menu.

2. Expand ETH Function Setting from the Provisioning sub menu.

3. Select QoS/Classification Setting from the ETH Function Setting sub


menu.

4. The QoS/Classification Setting window appears. Click Port Setting


tab.

NWD-115476-06E Operation
Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only

System Operation 5-161

Port Setting tab

Figure 5-246 QoS/Classification Setting Window

5. The Port Setting tab appears. Click the desired Port No. to configure.

Port No.

Figure 5-247 Port Setting Tab

6. The QoS Port Setting box appears. Assign a proper value for each
parameter.

Operation NWD-115476-06E
Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only

5-162 System Operation

Class No.

Figure 5-248 QoS Port Setting Box

7. Click the desired Class No. in the Egress Class Setting Information
field.

8. The Egress Class Setting box appears. Assign a proper value for each
parameter.

Figure 5-249 Egress Class Setting Box

NWD-115476-06E Operation
Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only

System Operation 5-163

Table 5-37 Port Setting (4 Class QoS)

Item Parameter Description


QoS Port Setting Information
Scheduling Mode 4xSP Specify the queueing mode.
1xSP+3xDWRR SP: Strict-Priority
4xDWRR DWRR: Deficit Weighted Round Robin
Drop Mode WTD Specify the port that discards all packets at
the tail end of the queue when queue
exceeds the preset threshold.
WTD (Weighted tail drop).
WRED Specify the port randomly that discards the
packets of traffic with lower priority than
one with higher priority when queue
exceeds the preset threshold.
WRED (Weighted Random Early
Detection).
Egress Shaper Rate 1 to 1000 Mbps Specify the maximum transmit rate of the
Granularity: port.
1Kbps
Internal Priority Queueing Policy per Ingress Port
Internal Priority 0 to 7 0 to 3 Specify the egress queue (0 to 3) for each
internal priority values. Egress queueing
policy is determined with the policy.
Egress Class Setting Information
Shaper Rate 0.001 to 1000 Specify the maximum sending rate of the
Mbps class (queue). This value works with
Granularity: “Egress Shaper Rate” as hierarchical
1Kbps shaping function.
DWRR Weight 1 to 127 Specify the weight of the queue.
Queue Length 16 to 1024 Kbyte Specify the length for each Queue.
(default: 64Kbyte).
WTD Yellow Frame 10 to 100 % Set the discard Threshold of Yellow
Threshold Frames which are colored with ingress
policer and not applied with ingress policer.
When total queued frames length exceeds
the threshold due to traffic congestion,
arrived yellow frames are discarded.
(default: 70%)
Green frame discard threshold is fixed to
100%.

Operation NWD-115476-06E
Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only

5-164 System Operation

Item Parameter Description


WRED Yellow Frame 10 to 100 % Set the beginning point of WRED discard
Threshold Threshold of Yellow Frames which are
colored with ingress policer and not applied
with ingress policer. When total queued
frames length exceeds the threshold due to
traffic congestion, arrived yellow frames
are applied to WRED algorism. (default:
70%)
WRED Green Frame 10 to 100 % Set the beginning point of WRED discard
Threshold Threshold of Green Frames which is
colored with ingress policer. When total
queued frames length exceeds the
threshold due to traffic congestion, arrived
green frames are applied to WRED
algorism. (default: 70%)

Class 3

SP
DWRR

WTD Yellow Frame Class 0


Threshold (default 70%)

Queue Length (16-1024Kbyte)

Figure 5-250 Egress Queue (1xSP+3xDWRR)

9. Click OK button after setting the parameters.

10. The Information box appears. Click OK button.

Figure 5-251 Information Box

NWD-115476-06E Operation
Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only

System Operation 5-165

11. The QoS Port Setting box appears again. Click OK button after
confirming the parameters.

Figure 5-252 QoS Port Setting Box

12. The Information box appears. Click OK button.

Figure 5-253 Information Box

13. The Port Setting tab appears again. Confirm the displayed parameters.

Operation NWD-115476-06E
Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only

5-166 System Operation

Figure 5-254 Port Setting Tab

This step ends the procedure.

(b) 8 Port QoS

Procedure 5-51

1. Expand Provisioning from the WebLCT menu.

2. Expand ETH Function Setting from the Provisioning sub menu

3. Select QoS/Classification Setting from the ETH Function Setting sub


menu.

4. The QoS/Classification Setting window appears. Click Port Setting


tab.

5. The Port Setting tab appears. Click the Class Mode in the QoS Port
Setting List.

NWD-115476-06E Operation
Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only

System Operation 5-167

Class Mode

Figure 5-255 Port Setting Tab

6. Class Mode Setting box appears. Select 8 Classes QoS from Class
Mode: Then click OK button.

Figure 5-256 Class Mode Setting Box

7. The Information box appears. Click OK button.

Figure 5-257 Information Box

Operation NWD-115476-06E
Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only

5-168 System Operation

8. Click the desired Port No. in the QoS/Classification Setting window.


QoS Port Setting box appears.

9. Click the desired Class No in Egress Class Setting Information field.

Figure 5-258 Qos Port Setting Box

10. Egress Class Setting box appears. Assign a proper value for each
parameter.

Figure 5-259 Egress Class Setting Box

NWD-115476-06E Operation
Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only

System Operation 5-169

Table 5-38 Port Setting (8 Class QoS)

Item Parameter Description


QoS Port Setting Information
Scheduling Mode 1xSP+7xDWRR Specify the queueing mode.
2xSP+6xDWRR SP: Strict-Priority
8xSP DWRR: Deficit Weighted Round Robin
Drop Mode WTD Specify the port that discards all packets at
the tail end of the queue when queue
exceeds the preset threshold.
WTD (Weighted tail drop).
WRED Specify the port randomly that discards the
packets of traffic with lower priority than
one with higher priority when queue
exceeds the preset threshold.
WRED (Weighted Random Early
Detection).
Egress Shaper Rate 1 to 1000 Mbps Specify the maximum transmit rate of the
Granularity: port.
1Kbps
Internal Priority Queueing Policy per Ingress Port
Internal Priority 0 to 7 0 to 7 Specify the egress queue (0 to 3) for each
internal priority values. Egress queueing
policy is determined with the policy.
Egress Class Setting Information
Shaper Rate 1 to 1000 Specify the maximum sending rate of the
Mbps class (queue). This value works with
Granularity: “Egress Shaper Rate” as hierarchical
1Kbps shaping function.
DWRR Weight 1 to 127 Specify the weight of the queue.
Queue Length 16 to 1024 Kbyte Specify the length for each Queue.
(default: 64Kbyte).
WTD Yellow Frame 10 to 100 % Set the discard Threshold of Yellow
Threshold Frames which are colored with ingress
policer and not applied with ingress policer.
When total queued frames length exceeds
the threshold due to traffic congestion,
arrived yellow frames are discarded.
(default: 70%)
Green frame discard threshold is fixed to
100%.

Operation NWD-115476-06E
Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only

5-170 System Operation

Item Parameter Description


WRED Yellow Frame 10 to 100 % Set the beginning point of WRED discard
Threshold Threshold of Yellow Frames which are
colored with ingress policer and not applied
with ingress policer. When total queued
frames length exceeds the threshold due to
traffic congestion, arrived yellow frames
are applied to WRED algorism. (default:
70%)
WRED Green Frame 10 to 100 % Set the beginning point of WRED discard
Threshold Threshold of Green Frames which is
colored with ingress policer. When total
queued frames length exceeds the
threshold due to traffic congestion, arrived
green frames are applied to WRED
algorism. (default: 70%)

11. Click OK button after setting the parameters.

12. The Information box appears. Click OK button.

Figure 5-260 Information Box

13. The QoS Port Setting box appears again. Click OK button after
confirming the parameter.

NWD-115476-06E Operation
Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only

System Operation 5-171

Figure 5-261 Qos Port Setting Box

14. The Information box appears. Click OK button.

Figure 5-262 Information Box

15. The Port Setting tab appears again. Confirm the displayed parameters.

Operation NWD-115476-06E
Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only

5-172 System Operation

Figure 5-263 Port Setting Tab

This step ends the procedure.

5.1.2.10 Filter Setting

(1) Filer List tab

(a) Add Filter

Procedure 5-52

2 Expand Provisioning from the WebLCT menu.

2. Expand ETH Function Setting from the Provisioning sub menu.

3. Select Filter Setting from the ETH Function Setting sub menu.

3 The Filter Setting window appears.

NWD-115476-06E Operation
Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only

System Operation 5-173

Figure 5-264 Filter Setting Window

5. Click the Filter List tab, and click Add button.

Figure 5-265 Filter List Tab

6. The Add Filter Entry box appears. Refer to the table below to assign a
proper value for each parameter.

Operation NWD-115476-06E
Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only

5-174 System Operation

Figure 5-266 Add Filter Entry Box

Table 5-39 Add Filter Entry Box

Item Parameter Description


Filtering Rule
Source MAC Address xx:xx:xx:xx:xx:xx Source MAC Address to be filtered. By
unchecking Any, Source MAC Address
can be specified.
Destination MAC xx:xx:xx:xx:xx:xx Destination MAC Address to be filtered.
Address By unchecking Any, Destination MAC
Address can be specified.
CoS Any, 0 to 7 CoS value to be filtered.
VLAN ID 1 to 4094 VLAN ID to be filtered.
Ethernet Type (0x) 0000 to Ethernet Type to be filtered.
FFFF

7. Click OK button after setting the parameters.

8. The Information box appears. Click OK button.

NWD-115476-06E Operation
Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only

System Operation 5-175

Figure 5-267 Information Box

9. The Filter List tab appears again.

Figure 5-268 Filter List Tab

This step ends the procedure.

(b) Modify Filter

Procedure 5-53

1. Expand Provisioning from the WebLCT menu.

2. Expand ETH Function Setting from the Provisioning sub menu.

3. Select Filter Setting from the ETH Function Setting sub menu.

Operation NWD-115476-06E
Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only

5-176 System Operation

4. The Filter Setting window appears.

Figure 5-269 Filter Setting Window

5. Click the Filter List tab, and Click the desired Entry Index No. to
configure.

NWD-115476-06E Operation
Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only

System Operation 5-177

Entry Index No.

Figure 5-270 Filter List Tab

6. The Modify Filter Entry box appears. Refer to the table below to assign a
proper value for each parameter.

Operation NWD-115476-06E
Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only

5-178 System Operation

Figure 5-271 Modify Filter Entry Box

Table 5-40 Modify Filter Entry Box

Item Parameter Description


Filtering Rule
Source MAC Address xx:xx:xx:xx:xx:xx Source MAC Address to be filtered. By
unchecking Any, Source MAC Address
can be specified.
Destination MAC xx:xx:xx:xx:xx:xx Destination MAC Address to be filtered.
Address By unchecking Any, Destination MAC
Address can be specified.
CoS Any, 0 to 7 CoS value to be filtered.
VLAN ID 1 to 4094 VLAN ID to be filtered.
Ethernet Type (0x) 0000 to Ethernet Type to be filtered.
FFFF

7. Click OK button after setting the parameters.

8. The Information box appears. Click OK button.

NWD-115476-06E Operation
Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only

System Operation 5-179

Figure 5-272 Information Box

9. The Filter List tab appears again.

Figure 5-273 Filter List Tab

This step ends the procedure.

(c) Delete Filter

Procedure 5-54

1. Expand Provisioning from the WebLCT menu.

2. Expand ETH Function Setting from the Provisioning sub menu.

Operation NWD-115476-06E
Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only

5-180 System Operation

3. Select Filter Setting from the ETH Function Setting sub menu.

4. The Filter Setting window appears.

Figure 5-274 Filter Setting Window

5. Click the Filter List tab, and click the Delete button.

6. The Delete Filter Entry dialog box appears.

7. Check the Entry Index number to be deleted. Click OK button.

NWD-115476-06E Operation
Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only

System Operation 5-181

Figure 5-275 Delete Filter Entry Box

8. The Confirmation box appears. Click OK button.

Figure 5-276 Confirmation Box

9. The Information box appears. Click OK button.

Figure 5-277 Information Box

10. The Filter Setting (Filter List tab) window appears again.

Operation NWD-115476-06E
Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only

5-182 System Operation

Figure 5-278 Filter Setting-Filter List (Deleted) Window

This step ends the procedure.

(2) Profile List Tab

(a) Add Profile List

Procedure 5-55

1. Expand Provisioning from the WebLCT menu.

2. Expand ETH Function Setting from the Provisioning sub menu.

3. Select Filter Setting from the ETH Function Setting sub menu.

4. The Filter Setting window appears. Click the Profile List tab.

5. The Profile List tab appears. Click Add button to create a new profile list.

NWD-115476-06E Operation
Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only

System Operation 5-183

Figure 5-279 Filter Setting-Profile List Tab

6. The Add Filter Profile box appears. Select the Entry Index number to add
filter(s).

Figure 5-280 Add Filter Profile Box

7. Click OK button. The Information box appears.

Operation NWD-115476-06E
Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only

5-184 System Operation

Figure 5-281 Information Box

8. Click OK button. The Profile List tab appears again.

Figure 5-282 Profile List Tab (Added)

This step ends the procedure.

(b) Delete Profile List

Procedure 5-56

1. Expand Provisioning from the WebLCT menu.

2. Expand ETH Function Setting from the Provisioning sub menu.

3. Select Filter Setting from the ETH Function Setting sub menu.

4. The Filter Setting window appears. Click the Profile List tab.

5. The Profile List tab appears. Click Delete button.

NWD-115476-06E Operation
Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only

System Operation 5-185

Figure 5-283 Profile List Tab

6. Check the Profile Index number to be deleted. Click OK button.

Figure 5-284 Delete Filter Profile Box

7. The Confirmation box appears. Click OK button.

Operation NWD-115476-06E
Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only

5-186 System Operation

Figure 5-285 Confirmation Box

8. The Information box appears. Click OK button.

Figure 5-286 Information Box

9. The Profile List tab appears again.

Figure 5-287 Profile List Tab

This step ends the procedure.

NWD-115476-06E Operation
Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only

System Operation 5-187

(3) Port Filter Setting List Tab

Procedure 5-57

1. Expand Provisioning from the WebLCT menu.

2. Expand ETH Function Setting from the Provisioning sub menu.

3. Select Filter Setting from the ETH Function Setting sub menu.

4. The Filter Setting window appears. Click the desired Port number to be
set.

Figure 5-288 Port Filter Setting List Tab

5. The Ingress Filter Setting box appears. Click the pull-down menu.

Operation NWD-115476-06E
Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only

5-188 System Operation

Note: In the above box, the second to fifth items are made by the prior
procedures.

Figure 5-289 Ingress Filter Setting

6. Select the desired Profile Index from the items. Click OK button.

7. The Information box appears. Click OK button.

Figure 5-290 Information Box

8. The Port Filter Setting List tab appears again.

NWD-115476-06E Operation
Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only

System Operation 5-189

Figure 5-291 Port Filter Setting List

This step ends the procedure.

5.1.2.11 L2CP Transparent / Mirroring Setting

Procedure 5-58

1. Expand Provisioning from the WebLCT menu.

2. Expand ETH Function Setting from the Provisioning sub menu.

3. Select L2CP Transparent / Mirroring Setting from the ETH Function


Setting sub menu.

4. The L2CP Transparent / Mirroring Setting window appears. Click


Port number to be set.

Operation NWD-115476-06E
Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only

5-190 System Operation

Figure 5-292 L2CP Transparent / Mirroring Setting Window

5. The L2CP Transparent / Monitoring Setting box appears. Assign a


proper value for each parameter

Figure 5-293 L2CP Transparent / Mirroring Setting Box

NWD-115476-06E Operation
Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only

System Operation 5-191

Table 5-41 L2CP Transparent / Mirroring Setting

Item Parameter Description


Port Information
Monitoring Disable Disable port monitoring function.
Monitoring Set the port as monitored port.
Mirror Set the port as Mirror port. The traffic of
the monitored port will be duplicated to
this port.
Monitoring Direction Ingress Specify to monitor the ingress traffic of the
port.
Egress Specify to monitor the egress traffic of the
port.
Both Specify to monitor the both ingress and
egress traffics.
L2 Protocol Transparency
Tunnel Enable Check Check the box of the protocol to enable
the PDU of the protocol transparent
without processing.
Uncheck -

Note STP/RSTP tunnel enabling function is not supported for RSTP enabled
port.
Tunnel Enable is set automatically, when the port is configured as
Tunnel.

(d) Click OK button after setting the parameters.

(e) The Information box appears. Click OK button.

Figure 5-294 Information Box

6. The L2CP Transparent / Mirroring Setting window appears again.


Confirm the parameters displayed

Operation NWD-115476-06E
Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only

5-192 System Operation

Figure 5-295 L2CP Transparent / Mirroring Setting

This step ends the procedure.

5.1.2.12 Port Isolate Setting

Procedure 5-59

1. Expand Provisioning from the WebLCT menu.

2. Expand ETH Function Setting from the Provisioning sub menu.

3. Select Port Isolate Setting from the ETH Function Setting sub menu.

4. The Port Isolate Setting window appears. Click the Port number to be
isolated.

Figure 5-296 Port Isolate Setting Window

NWD-115476-06E Operation
Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only

System Operation 5-193

5. The Port Isolate Setting box appears. Click Enable radio button.

Figure 5-297 Port Isolate Setting Box

6. Click OK button. The Information box appears.

Figure 5-298 Information Box

7. Click OK button. The Port Isolate Setting window appears again.

Figure 5-299 Port Isolate Setting Window

8. Confirm the value of the Port Isolate of the changed port(s) is turned to
Enable.

This step ends the procedure.

Operation NWD-115476-06E
Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only

5-194 System Operation

5.1.2.13 LLF Setting

(a) Add LLF GRP

Procedure 5-60

1. Expand Provisioning from the WebLCT menu.

2. Expand ETH Function Setting from the Provisioning sub menu.

3. Select LLF Setting from the ETH Function Setting sub menu.

4. The LLF Setting window appears. Click Add LLF button.

Add LLF button

Figure 5-300 LLF Setting Window

5. The LLF Setting (Add) box appears. Refer to the table below to assign a
proper value for each parameter accordingly

NWD-115476-06E Operation
Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only

System Operation 5-195

Figure 5-301 LLF Setting (Add) Box

Table 5-42 LLF Setting Parameter

Item Parameter Description


LLF GRP ID 1 to 16 Select the LLF group ID Number.
Item Select the object item from drop-down list.
Send LLF Signal Enable Enable sending LLF signal.
Disable Disable sending LLF signal.
Ignore Received LLF Enable Ignore received LLF signal.
Signal Disable Accept received LLF signal.
Edge Port Setting Check Set the port as Edge port.
Uncheck Not set the port as Edge port.

Operation NWD-115476-06E
Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only

5-196 System Operation

Item Parameter Description


OAM Send Port Check Transmit Side: A critical event frame is
Setting sent to opposite equipment using
IEEE802.3ah vendor specific OAM (NEC
Proprietary) , instead of “shut down” the
port when the ETH port is configured as
IEEE802.3ah enable and the trunk port
condition is under alarm.
Receive Side: The edge ETH port is
treated as link down when the port
receives above vendor specific OAM.
Uncheck Disable IEEE802.3ah coordination.

6. Click OK button after setting the parameters.

7. The Information box appears. Click OK button.

Figure 5-302 Information Box

8. The Information box appears. Click OK button.

Figure 5-303 Information Box

9. The LLF Setting window appears again. Confirm the newly added LLF
Setting information is displayed.

NWD-115476-06E Operation
Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only

System Operation 5-197

Figure 5-304 LLF Setting Window

This step ends the procedure.

(b) Modify LLF GRP

Procedure 5-61

1. Expand Provisioning from the WebLCT menu.

2. Expand ETH Function Setting from the Provisioning sub menu.

3. Select LLF Setting from the ETH Function Setting sub menu.

4. The LLF Setting window appears. Click the desired LLF GRP No. to
configure.

LLF GRP No.

Figure 5-305 LLF Setting Window

5. The LLF Setting (Modify) box appears. Modify the parameters.

Operation NWD-115476-06E
Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only

5-198 System Operation

Figure 5-306 LLF Setting (Modify) Box

NWD-115476-06E Operation
Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only

System Operation 5-199

Table 5-43 LLF Setting (Modify)

Item Parameter Description


LLF GRP ID 1 to 16 Select the LLF group ID Number.
Item Select the object item from drop-down list.
Send LLF Signal Enable Enable sending LLF signal.
Disable Disable sending LLF signal.
Ignore Received LLF Enable Ignore received LLF signal.
Signal Disable Accept received LLF signal.
Edge Port Setting Check Set the port as Edge port.
Uncheck Not set the port as Edge port.
OAM Send Port Check Transmit Side: A critical event frame is
Setting sent to opposite equipment using
IEEE802.3ah vendor specific OAM (NEC
Proprietary) , instead of “shut down” the
port when the ETH port is configured as
IEEE802.3ah enable and the trunk port
condition is under alarm.
Receive Side: The edge ETH port is
treated as link down when the port
receives above vendor specific OAM.
Uncheck Disable IEEE802.3ah coordination.

6. Click OK button after setting the parameters.

7. The Information box appears. Click OK button.

Figure 5-307 Information Box

Operation NWD-115476-06E
Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only

5-200 System Operation

8. The Information box appears. Click OK button.

Figure 5-308 Information Box

9. The LLF Setting window appears again. Confirm the modified parameters
of the LLF GRP information are displayed.

Figure 5-309 LLF Setting Window

This step ends the procedure.

(c) Delete LLF GRP

Procedure 5-62

1. Expand Provisioning from the WebLCT menu.

2. Expand ETH Function Setting from the Provisioning sub menu.

3. Select LLF Setting from the ETH Function Setting sub menu.

NWD-115476-06E Operation
Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only

System Operation 5-201

4. The LLF Setting window appears. Click Delete LLF button.

Delete LLF button

Figure 5-310 LLF Setting Window

5. The LLF Setting (Delete) box appears. Select the LLF GRP ID to be
deleted.

Figure 5-311 LLF Setting (Delete) Box

6. Click OK button after setting the parameters.

7. The Confirmation box appears. Click OK button.

Figure 5-312 Confirmation Box

Operation NWD-115476-06E
Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only

5-202 System Operation

8. The Information box appears. Click OK button.

Figure 5-313 Information Box

9. The LLF Setting window appears again. Confirm the LLF GRP has been
deleted.

Figure 5-314 LLF Setting Window

This step ends the procedure.

5.1.2.14 Broadcast Storm Control Setting

Procedure 5-63

1. Expand Provisioning from the WebLCT menu.

2. Expand ETH Function Setting from the Provisioning sub menu.

NWD-115476-06E Operation
Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only

System Operation 5-203

3. Select Broadcast Storm Control Setting from the ETH Function


Setting sub menu.

4. The Broadcast Storm Control Setting window appears. Click the


Broadcast Storm Control Rate [Mbps].

Broadcast Storm Control Rate [Mbps]

Figure 5-315 Broadcast Storm Control Setting Window

5. The Broadcast Storm Control Rate box appears.

Figure 5-316 Broadcast Storm Control Rate Box

6. Specify the rate (1 to 1000 Mbps). Click OK button.

Operation NWD-115476-06E
Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only

5-204 System Operation

7. The Information box appears. Click OK button.

Figure 5-317 Information Box

8. The Broadcast Storm Control Setting window appears again. Confirm


the setting.

9. Click the desired Port number to be set.

10. The Broadcast Storm Control box appears. Select Enable radio button,
then click OK button.

Figure 5-318 Broadcast Storm Control Box

11. The Information box appears. Click OK button.

Figure 5-319 Information Box

12. The Broadcast Storm Control Setting window appears again. Confirm
the setting.

This step ends the procedure.

NWD-115476-06E Operation
Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only

System Operation 5-205

5.1.3 Cross Connect Setting


User can configure the E1 port/STM-1 port and cross connect.

The E1/STM-1/Cross Connect Setting menu list is as follows:

 E1 Port Setting

Configure E1 Port Name, E1 CH usage, Channel Impedance, and unused CH


report.

 STM-1 Port Setting

Configure the STM-1 Port Mode, Usage, AIS generation, ALS (Automatic Laser
Shutdown) and trace setting.

 Cross Connect Setting

Configure Cross Connect, and confirm current Cross Connect and Port (CH)
utilization.

5.1.3.1 E1 Port Setting

Configure E1 port name, E1 CH usage, channel impedance, and unused CH report.

Procedure 5-64

1. Expand Provisioning from the WebLCT menu.

2. Expand E1/STM-1/Cross Connect Setting from the Provisioning sub


menu.

3. Select E1 Port Setting from the E1/STM-1/Cross Connect Setting sub


menu.

4. The E1 Port Setting window appears. Click Modify button.

Operation NWD-115476-06E
Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only

5-206 System Operation

Modify button

Figure 5-320 E1 Port Setting Window

5. The E1 Port Setting (Main Board) dialog box appears. Refer to the table
below to assign a proper value for each parameter.

NWD-115476-06E Operation
Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only

System Operation 5-207

Figure 5-321 E1 Port Setting (Main Board) Dialog Box

Table 5-44 E1 Port Setting

Item Parameter Description


Collective Setting
CH Usage Used All All E1 CHs are set to Used.
Not Used All All E1 CHs are set to All Unused.
CH Usage Error Report All Enable report usage error for all
Report unused E1 CHs which are
detected at input signal.
Not Report All Disable report usage error for all
E1 CHs.
Impedance All CH 120Ω Set Impedance of all E1 CHs to
120Ω.
All CH 75Ω Set Impedance of all E1 CHs to
75Ω.
CH Usage Used Set E1 CH to Used.
Not Used Set E1 CH to Unused.

Operation NWD-115476-06E
Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only

5-208 System Operation

Item Parameter Description


CH Usage Error Report Enable report usage error when
Report unused E1 CH is detected at input
signal. Valid when the CH Usage
is Not used.
Not Report Disable report usage error.
Impedance Setting 120Ω Set E1 Port Impedance to 120 Ω.
75Ω Set E1 Port Impedance to 75 Ω.
Port Name 0 to 32 characters Specify the Port name of the E1
CH.

6. Click OK button after setting the parameters.

7. The Information box appears. Click OK button.

Figure 5-322 Information Box

8. The E1 Port Setting window appears again. Confirm the displayed


parameters.

NWD-115476-06E Operation
Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only

System Operation 5-209

Figure 5-323 E1 Port Setting Window

This step ends the procedure.

Operation NWD-115476-06E
Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only

5-210 System Operation

5.1.3.2 STM-1 Port Setting

Configure the STM-1 port mode, usage, AIS generation, ALS (Automatic Laser
Shutdown) and trace setting.

Procedure 5-65

1. Expand Provisioning from the WebLCT menu.

2. Expand E1/STM-1/Cross Connect Setting from the Provisioning sub


menu.

3. Select STM-1 Port Setting from the E1/STM-1/Cross Connect Setting


sub menu.

4. The STM-1 Port Setting window appears. Click Modify button.

Modify button

Figure 5-324 STM-1 Port Setting Window (STM-1 Through)

5. The STM-1 Port Setting dialog box appears. Refer to the table below to
assign a proper value for each parameter.

NWD-115476-06E Operation
Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only

System Operation 5-211

(a) STM-1 Mode: Through

Through Mode transmits STM-1 over the radio frame.

Figure 5-325 STM-1 (Through Mode) Port Setting Dialog Box

(b) STM-1 Mode: Channelized

Channelized mode extracts the 63 E1 channels from the STM-1 and uses
them selectively.

Note: STM-1 mode can be selected in Equipment Configuration from


Equipment Setup sub menu.

Operation NWD-115476-06E
Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only

5-212 System Operation

Figure 5-326 STM-1 (Channelized Mode) Port Setting Dialog Box

Table 5-45 STM-1 Port Setting

Item Parameter Description


Port Setting
Port Usage Used Use STM-1 Port.
Not Used Not use STM-1 Port.
Port Name 0 to 32 characters Specify the port name of the STM-1.

NWD-115476-06E Operation
Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only

System Operation 5-213

Item Parameter Description


MS – AIS Generation Enable Enable stopping laser output when
receiving STM-1 signal is lost (optical
or radio) (RLOS) and send out
MS-AIS.
Disable Disable stopping laser output when
receiving STM-1 signal is lost (optical
or radio) (RLOS) and send out
MS-AIS.
ALS Usage Enable Enable ALS (Automatic Laser
Shutdown).
Disable Disable ALS (Automatic Laser
Shutdown).
ALS Interval 60 sec Set the delay time of releasing ALS
180 sec after clearing alarm.
300 sec
Trace Setting
Trace Mode J0:Section Trace Enable RS-TIM detection.
J1:High Order Path Trace Enable HP-TIM detection.
Trace Mismatch AIS Enable Enable transmitting AIS alarm when
Generation Action TIM is detected.
Disable Disable transmitting AIS alarm when
TIM is detected.
Section Trace Send 1 to 15 Set J0 in transmit direction.
Expected Section 1 to 15 Set J0 in receiving direction.
Trace
High Order Path - Not selectable.
Trace
Expected High Order - Not selectable.
Path Trace
Received Trace Value
Received select trace - Not selectable.
Port 01
Received High Order - Not selectable.
Path Trace
Radio Alarm Transfer Setting
Radio Alarm Transfer Enable Enable alarm transferred through E1
channel when STM-1 is configured as
channelized.
Disable Disable this function

Operation NWD-115476-06E
Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only

5-214 System Operation

Item Parameter Description


STM-1 Switch Setting
Lock-in Usage Used Enable pause the switchover activation
for a period of time to prevent from
switching frequently.
Not Used Disable this function
Detection time [min] 1 to 60 Set the interval of counting number of
times for Lock in
Detection Count 1 to 255 Setup for the Lock in threshold value of
[times] the switchover number of times
Clear Lock-in Time 10 to 2880 Set duration of pause of switchover in
[mins] the Lock in condition

1. Click OK button after setting the parameters.

2. The Information box appears. Click OK button.

Figure 5-327 Information Box

3. The STM-1 Port Setting window appears again. Confirm the displayed
parameters.

NWD-115476-06E Operation
Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only

System Operation 5-215

Figure 5-328 STM-1 Port Setting Window

This step ends the procedure.

5.1.3.3 Cross Connect Setting

User can add, edit and delete the Cross Connection.

iPASOLINK 400 supports 2M E1 and STM-1(Through mode) level Cross Connect.


The packets that support Cross Connection are listed in the following table.

Table 5-46 Cross Connect Setting

Item Max. Max. Description


Mounted Ports
MODEM-A 4 152 -
16E1(MC-A4) 1 16 -
16E1-A 4 16 -
STM1-A (channelized 4 63 -
mode)
STM1-A (through mode) 4 1(63E1) Treated as one 75xE1 ports
MSE-A 1 64

The channelized STM-1 channel numbering is listed in the following table.

Operation NWD-115476-06E
Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only

5-216 System Operation

Table 5-47 Channelized STM-1 Numbering

STM-1 channelized TUG-3# TUG-2# TU-12#


Port No. #K #L #M

1 1 1 1
2 2 1 1
3 3 1 1
4 1 2 1
5 2 2 1
6 3 2 1
7 1 3 1
8 2 3 1
9 3 3 1
10 1 4 1
11 2 4 1
12 3 4 1
13 1 5 1
14 2 5 1
15 3 5 1
16 1 6 1
17 2 6 1
18 3 6 1
19 1 7 1
20 2 7 1
21 3 7 1
22 1 1 2
23 2 1 2
24 3 1 2
25 1 2 2
26 2 2 2
27 3 2 2
28 1 3 2
29 2 3 2
30 3 3 2
31 1 4 2
32 2 4 2
33 3 4 2

NWD-115476-06E Operation
Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only

System Operation 5-217

STM-1 channelized TUG-3# TUG-2# TU-12#


Port No. #K #L #M
34 1 5 2
35 2 5 2
36 3 5 2
37 1 6 2
38 2 6 2
39 3 6 2
40 1 7 2
41 2 7 2
42 3 7 2
43 1 1 3
44 2 1 3
45 3 1 3
46 1 2 3
47 2 2 3
48 3 2 3
49 1 3 3
50 2 3 3
51 3 3 3
52 1 4 3
53 2 4 3
54 3 4 3
55 1 5 3
56 2 5 3
57 3 5 3
58 1 6 3
59 2 6 3
60 3 6 3
61 1 7 3
62 2 7 3

63 3 7 3

Operation NWD-115476-06E
Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only

5-218 System Operation

(1) Add Cross Connect

(a) Cross Connect – Non Protection Mode

Procedure 5-66

1. Expand Provisioning from the WebLCT menu.

2. Expand E1/STM-1/Cross Connect Setting from the Provisioning sub


menu.

3. Select Cross Connect Setting from the E1/STM-1/Cross Connect


Setting sub menu.

4. The Cross Connect Setting window appears. Click Add button to create
a new cross connection.

Figure 5-329 Cross Connect Setting Window

5. The Cross Connect Setting (Add) dialog box appears. Refer to the table
below to assign a proper value for each parameter accordingly.

NWD-115476-06E Operation
Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only

System Operation 5-219

Figure 5-330 Cross Connect Setting (Add) Dialog Box

Table 5-48 Cross Connect Setting

Item Parameter Description


No. 1 to 168 Cross connect service number
Service Name 0 to 32 characters Cross connect service name
Cross Connect Type E1 E1 level cross connect
STM-1(Through) STM-1 Through mode cross
connect
Edge.A
Protection Not check the radio box Uncheck Protection means no E1
SNCP protection is provided.
Configure one of Edge A only.
Pull-down menu Interface Block for Edge.A
(Block selection)
AMR Linkage
Click-to-Select Blue Selected Port/CH
Port/CH (KLM/CH) White Not Selected Port/CH
Gray Already used Port/CH
Edge.B

Operation NWD-115476-06E
Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only

5-220 System Operation

Item Parameter Description


Protection Not check the radio box Uncheck Protection means no E1
SNCP protection is provided.
Configure one of Edge B only.
AMR Linkage
Pull-down menu Interface Block for Edge.B
(Block selection)
Click-to-Select Blue Selected Port/CH
Port/CH (KLM/CH) White Not Selected Port/CH
Gray Already used Port/CH

Note: The port number of the Edge.A/B Term1 on the mounted card or
MODEM changes according to the channel spacing.

6. Click OK button after setting the parameters.

7. The Information box appears. Click OK button.

Figure 5-331 Information Box

8. The Cross Connect Setting window appears again. Confirm the newly
added cross connection information is displayed.

Figure 5-332 Cross Connect Setting Window

This step ends the procedure.

NWD-115476-06E Operation
Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only

System Operation 5-221

(b) Cross Connect – Protection Mode

Procedure 5-67

1. Expand Provisioning from the WebLCT menu.

2. Expand E1/STM-1/Cross Connect Setting from the Provisioning sub


menu.

3. Select Cross Connect Setting from the E1/STM-1/Cross Connect


Setting sub menu.

4. The Cross Connect Setting window appears. Click Add button to create
a new cross connection.

Figure 5-333 Cross Connect Setting Window

5. The Cross Connect Setting (Add) dialog box appears. Refer to the table
below to assign a proper value for each parameter accordingly.

Operation NWD-115476-06E
Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only

5-222 System Operation

Figure 5-334 Cross Connect Setting (Add) Dialog Box

NWD-115476-06E Operation
Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only

System Operation 5-223

Table 5-49 Cross Connect Setting

Item Parameter Description


No. 1 to 168 Cross connect service number
Service Name 0 to 32 characters Cross connect service name
Cross Connect Type E1 E1 level cross connect
STM-1 Through STM-1 Through mode cross
connect
Edge.A
Protection Not check the radio box If Protection is checked, both of
Edge.B Port/CH needs to be
specified..
Pull-down menu Interface Block for Edge.A
(Block selection)
Click-to-Select Blue Selected Port/CH
Port/CH (KLM/CH) White Not Selected Port/CH
Gray Already used Port/CH
Edge.B
Protection Check the radio box If Protection is checked, both of
Edge.B Port/CH needs to be
specified.
Pull-down menu Interface Block for Edge.B
(Block selection)
Click-to-Select Blue Selected Port/CH
Port/CH (KLM/CH) White Not Selected Port/CH
Gray Already used Port/CH

6. Click OK button after setting the parameters.

7. The Information box appears. Click OK button.

Figure 5-335 Information Box

8. The Cross Connect Setting window appears again. Confirm the newly
added cross connection information is displayed.

Operation NWD-115476-06E
Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only

5-224 System Operation

Figure 5-336 Cross Connect Setting Window

This step ends the procedure.

(2) Modify (Edit) Cross Connect

Procedure 5-68

1. Expand Provisioning from the WebLCT menu.

2. Expand E1/STM-1/Cross Connect Setting from the Provisioning sub


menu.

3. Select Cross Connect Setting from the E1/STM-1/Cross Connect


Setting sub menu.

4. The Cross Connect Setting window appears. Click the Service No. to
be modified.

Service No.

Figure 5-337 Cross Connect Setting Window

NWD-115476-06E Operation
Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only

System Operation 5-225

5. The Cross Connect Setting (Modify) dialog box appears. Modify the
parameters.

Figure 5-338 Cross Connect Setting (Modify) Dialog Box

6. Click OK button after modification.

7. The Information box appears. Click OK button.

Figure 5-339 Information Box

8. The Cross Connect Setting window appears again. Confirm the modified
parameters of the cross connection.

Operation NWD-115476-06E
Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only

5-226 System Operation

Figure 5-340 Cross Connect Setting Window

This step ends the procedure.

(3) Delete Cross Connect

Procedure 5-69

1. Expand Provisioning from the WebLCT menu.

2. Expand E1/STM-1/Cross Connect Setting from the Provisioning sub


menu.

3. Select Cross Connect Setting from the E1/STM-1/Cross Connect


Setting sub menu.

4. The Cross Connect Setting window appears. Click Delete button.

NWD-115476-06E Operation
Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only

System Operation 5-227

Delete button

Figure 5-341 Cross Connect Setting Window

5. The Cross Connect Setting (Delete) dialog box appears. Check the
Service No. to be deleted. If all service numbers are to be deleted, click the
select all check box. All service numbers are checked and can be deleted at
one time.

Check box for select all


Service No.

Figure 5-342 Cross Connect Setting (Delete) Dialog Box

6. Click OK button.

7. The Confirmation box appears. Click OK button.

Operation NWD-115476-06E
Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only

5-228 System Operation

Figure 5-343 Confirmation Box

8. The Information box appears. Click OK button.

Figure 5-344 Information Box

9. The Cross Connect Setting window appears again. Confirm that the
selected cross connection has been deleted.

Figure 5-345 Cross Connect Setting Window

This step ends the procedure.

NWD-115476-06E Operation
Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only

System Operation 5-229

5.1.4 PWE Setting


User can configure the TDM PWE (SAToP) function.

5.1.4.1 PWE Setting

(1) Add new PWE

Procedure 5-70

1. Expand Provisioning from the WebLCT menu.

2. Select PWE Setting from the Provisioning menu.

3. The PWE Setting window appears. Click Add PWE button.

Operation NWD-115476-06E
Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only

5-230 System Operation

Add PWE button

Figure 5-346 PWE Setting Window

4. The Step1 window appears. Modify the parameters.

Figure 5-347 Step1 Window

NWD-115476-06E Operation
Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only

System Operation 5-231

Table 5-50 Step1 PWE Setting Parameter

Item Parameter Description


PWE No 1 to 256 Service number of PWE.
PWE Service Name 0 to 32 characters Service name of PWE
MSE E1 CH 1 to 64 E1 Cross Connect CH
Jitter Buffer 2ms, 4ms, 8ms, 16ms, Jitter Buffer size (8ms setting
32ms, 64ms, 128ms value means ±4ms Jitter Buffer)
Clock Mode MSE E1 CH No: 1 to 16 Transmit TDM synchronization
-NE Clock, ACR, source clock select. Refer to the
Sync E1 figure below:
MSE E1 CH No:17 to 64
-NE Clock, ACR Slave,
Sync E1
Assign CH 1 to 16 When ACR Slave is selected

<MSE E1 CH 1 to 16>

NE Clock (from System)


Sync E1 (recovered clock Synchronous Source Clock
of the E1 port, loop timing) of PWE
ACR (from Opposite side
iPASOLINK)

Clock Mode

<MSE E1 CH 17 to 63>
NE Clock (from System)
Sync E1 (recovered clock Synchronous Source Clock
of the E1 port, loop timing) of PWE
ACR CH1
ACR CH2

Clock Mode
ACR CH16

Assign CH

Figure 5-348 Clock Mode Selection

Operation NWD-115476-06E
Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only

5-232 System Operation

5. Click Detail Option button.

(In the case of changing the Capsule E1 frame Size /RTP Header addition)

6. The Detail Option box appears. Modify the parameters and specify a proper
value for RTP Header.

Figure 5-349 Detail Option box

Table 5-51 Detail Option Parameter

Item Parameter Description


Capsule E1 Frame 1 to 8
Size
RTP Header On / Off Select the Option RTP Header
addition

7. Click OK button after modification.

8. Click NEXT button after modification.

9. The Step2 window appears. Modify the parameters and select VLA ID or
Click the Add VLAN ID button (How to add VLAN ID, refer to 5.1.2.3 (a) ).

NWD-115476-06E Operation
Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only

System Operation 5-233

Add VLAN ID button


VLAN ID

Figure 5-350 Step2 Window

Table 5-52 Step2 Select VLAN ID Parameter

Item Parameter Description


CoS 0 to 7 CoS value of PWE.
ECID 1 to 1048575 Specify an ID of PWE
Destination MAC Opposing MSE-A or Value of display to PWE setting
Address Broadcast Address window or Broadcast MAC
Address (ff:ff:ff:ff:ff:ff)

10. Click Next button.

11. The Step3 window appears. Confirm the displayed parameters.

Operation NWD-115476-06E
Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only

5-234 System Operation

Figure 5-351 Step3 Window

12. Click the OK button.

13. The Information box appears. Click OK button.

Figure 5-352 Information Box

14. The PWE Setting window appears again. Confirm the displayed
parameters.

NWD-115476-06E Operation
Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only

System Operation 5-235

Figure 5-353 PWE Setting Window

15. Add cross connect between E1 CH and MSE-A E1 CH. (Refer to 5.1.3.3)

This step ends the procedure.

(2) Modify PWE

Procedure 5-71

1. Expand Provisioning from the WebLCT menu.

2. Select PWE Setting from the Provisioning menu.

3. The PWE Setting window appears. Click the PWE No. to be modified.

Operation NWD-115476-06E
Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only

5-236 System Operation

PWE No.

Figure 5-354 PWE Setting Window

4. The Step1 window appears. Modify the parameters.

NWD-115476-06E Operation
Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only

System Operation 5-237

Figure 5-355 Step1 Window

5. Click the Next button.

6. The Step2 window appears. Modify the parameters.

Operation NWD-115476-06E
Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only

5-238 System Operation

Figure 5-356 Step2 Window

7. Click the Next button.

8. The Step3 window appears. Confirm the displayed parameters.

NWD-115476-06E Operation
Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only

System Operation 5-239

Figure 5-357 Step3 Window

9. Click the OK button.

10. The Information box appears. Click OK button.

Figure 5-358 Information Box

11. The PWE Setting window appears again. Confirm the displayed
parameters.

Operation NWD-115476-06E
Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only

5-240 System Operation

Figure 5-359 PWE Setting Window

This step ends the procedure.

(3) Delete PWE

Procedure 5-72

1. Expand Provisioning from the WebLCT menu.

2. Select PWE Setting from the Provisioning menu.

3. The PWE Setting window appears. Click Delete PWE button.

Delete PWE button

Figure 5-360 PWE Setting Window

NWD-115476-06E Operation
Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only

System Operation 5-241

4. The Delete PWE window appears. Click the check box for PWE No. to be
deleted. If plural PWE Nos are to be deleted, click the check box for
collective deletion. All PWE Nos are checked and can be deleted at one
time.

Check box for collective deletion


PWE No.

Figure 5-361 Delete PWE Window

5. The Confirmation box appears. Click OK button.

Figure 5-362 Confirmation Box

6. The PWE Setup — Under execution indicator appears.

Figure 5-363 Under execution Indicator

Operation NWD-115476-06E
Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only

5-242 System Operation

7. The Information box appears. Click OK button.

Figure 5-364 Information Box

8. The PWE Setting window appears again. Confirm the displayed


parameters.

Figure 5-365 PWE Setting Window

9. Delete Cross connect between E1 CH and MSE-A E1 CH. (Refer to 5.1.3.3.)

This step ends the procedure.

NWD-115476-06E Operation
Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only

System Operation 5-243

5.1.5 Equipment Clock / Synchronization Setting


Procedures here set the configuration of Clock (Internal or External) and Timing
Source Selection of the equipment.

Specific System Configuration is available only when CLK2M-C card (option) is


installed. Detailed configuration is show as below

System w/o CLK2M-C CLK2M-C


Radio 1+0/1+1  
Radio n-way  
Radio Ring  
STM-1 Through  
STM-1 Channelized 
SyncETH 
PWE path 
PTP w/NE CLK Mode 
EXT CLK I/O 

The EXT Clock Setting menu list is as follows:

 Equipment Clock Setting

Select the Clock and Timing Source.

 EXT Clock Setting

Specify the output CLK parameters.

 PTP Mode Setting

Specifies the PTP communication mode.

Operation NWD-115476-06E
Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only

5-244 System Operation

5.1.5.1 Equipment Clock Setting

(1) Mounted with Clock Card

Procedure 5-73

1. Expand Provisioning from the WebLCT menu.

2. Expand Equipment Clock/Synchronization Setting from the


Provisioning sub menu.

3. Select Equipment Clock Setting from the Equipment


Clock/Synchronization Setting sub menu.

4. The Equipment Clock Setting window appears. Click Modify button.

Figure 5-366 Equipment Clock Setting Window

5. The Equipment Clock Setting dialog box appears. Assign a proper value
for each parameter.

Figure 5-367 Equipment Clock Setting Dialog Box

NWD-115476-06E Operation
Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only

System Operation 5-245

Table 5-53 Equipment Clock Setting

Item Parameter Description


Equipment CLK Mode Master Internal clock is used as equipment clock.
Slave Best clock is selected automatically among clocks of
“Timing Source” entry. Selection is based on quality
and priority.
When all of clocks in the “Timing Source” entry are
failed, status of equipment clock becomes holdover.
SyncETH Enable Enable Synchronous Ethernet Function in the IDU.
Disable Disable Synchronous Ethernet Function in the IDU.
Clock Source QL Mode Mode that switches Timing Source according to the
Selective Mode Quality Level (SSM), Signal Fail and Priority, External
Command.
Timing Source decision is done by Quality value. If
Quality values of Timing Sources are same, Priority
value is used, instead.
PL Mode Mode that switches Timing Source based on Signal
Fail, Priority and External Command.
Timing Source Not Entry Select the clock source.
Line Clock(MODEM)
Line Clock(GbE-A)
Line Clock(STM1-A)
Line Clock(16E1-A)
Line Clock(MSE-A)
Line Clock(PTP-A)
GbE Line CLK 1/2
E1 Line CLK
EXT CLK
Slot Line CLK: 1 to 4 Select the universal slot
Port/CH E1: 1 to 16 CH Specify the Port or CH which can extract clock
GbE: 1 to 4 information.

Priority 1 to 12 Set the priority of timing source manually.

LINE SSM Usage Used Received SSM code of the Timing Source is used as
Quality Level.
Not Used Forced SSM Value Setting is used.

Operation NWD-115476-06E
Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only

5-246 System Operation

Item Parameter Description


Forced SSM Value When LINE SSM Usage is set to “Not Used”, overwriting received SSM code of the
Timing Source.
overwrite
Quality Level Quality
SSM code

0010 QL-PRC High


0100 QL-SSU-A |
1000 QL-SSU-B |
1011 QL-SEC Low

WTR 0, 10, 20, 30 sec Set Wait To Restore time that is the amount of time to
1 to 15 min wait before a recovered timing source becomes
active again.

6. Click OK button after setting the parameters.

7. The Information box appears. Click OK button.

Figure 5-368 Information Box

8. The Equipment Clock Setting window appears again. Confirm the


displayed parameters.

Figure 5-369 Equipment Clock Setting Window

This step ends the procedure.

NWD-115476-06E Operation
Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only

System Operation 5-247

(2) Mounted without Clock Card

Procedure 5-74

9. Expand Provisioning from the WebLCT menu.

10. Expand Equipment Clock/Synchronization Setting from the


Provisioning sub menu.

11. Select Equipment Clock Setting from the Equipment


Clock/Synchronization Setting sub menu.

12. The Equipment Clock Setting window appears. Click Modify button.

Figure 5-370 Equipment Clock Setting Window

13. The Equipment Clock Setting dialog box appears. Assign a proper value
for each parameter.

Figure 5-371 Equipment Clock Setting Dialog Box

Operation NWD-115476-06E
Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only

5-248 System Operation

Table 5-54 Equipment Clock Setting

Item Parameter Description


Equipment CLK Mode Master The device working as Master and
provide clock.
Slave(MODEM) Received radio clock is used as
equipment clock. This setting must
be set for slave equipments with
1-hop and n-hop network
configuration.
Slave(AUTO) Received radio clock is used as
equipment clock. This setting must
be set for slave equipments with
radio ring configuration.
CLK Source1, 2 Slave(MODEM):
One Modem can be specified among the installed in the option
slot 1 to 4. When 1+1 configuration, one of SW Group can be
specified.
Slave(Auto):
Two Modem can be specified among the installed in the option
slot 1 to 4. When 1+1 configuration, SW Group1 and SW Group2
can be specified.

14. Click OK button after setting the parameters.

15. Warning box will appear for the clock source modification. Click OK
button.

Figure 5-372 Warning Box

16. The Information box appears. Click OK button.

Figure 5-373 Information Box

NWD-115476-06E Operation
Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only

System Operation 5-249

17. The Equipment Clock Setting window appears again. Confirm the
displayed parameters.

Figure 5-374 Equipment Clock Setting Window

This step ends the procedure.

Operation NWD-115476-06E
Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only

5-250 System Operation

5.1.5.2 EXT Clock Setting

Procedure 5-75

1. Expand Provisioning from the WebLCT menu.

2. Expand Equipment Clock/Synchronization Setting from the


Provisioning sub menu.

3. Select Ext Clock Setting from the Equipment Clock/Synchronization


Setting sub menu.

4. The Ext Clock Setting window appears. Click Modify button.

Figure 5-375 Ext Clock Setting Window

NWD-115476-06E Operation
Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only

System Operation 5-251

5. The Ext Clock Setting dialog box appears. Assign a proper value for each
parameter.

Figure 5-376 Ext Clock Setting Dialog Box

Operation NWD-115476-06E
Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only

5-252 System Operation

Table 5-55 EXT Clock Setting


Item Parameter Description
In/Out
EXT Impedance 120 Ω Set Ext Clock impedance to 120 Ω.
75 Ω Set Ext Clock impedance to 75 Ω.
EXT CLK Interface bps Select the Ext Clock in bps.
Hz Select the Ext Clock in Hz.
CRC On/Off On Turn on Ext Clock CRC check.
Off Turn off Ext Clock CRC check.
SSM Support Enable SSM support is enabled.
Disable SSM support is disabled.
Sa Bit Sa 4 to 8 Set SSM bit of input/output Ext
Clock.
Out
EXT CLK Out SEL NOT SELECT Not export CLK.
NE CLK Export NE CLK.
Line Clock(MODEM) Export Line Clock(MODEM)
Line Clock(GbE-A) Export Line Clock(GbE-A)
Line Clock(16E1-A) Export Line Clock(16E1-A)
Line Clock(STM1-A) Export Line Clock(STM1-A)
Line Clock(MSE-A) Export Line Clock(MSE-A)
Line Clock(PTP-A) Export Line Clock(PTP-A)
Line Clock(MODEM) Export Line Clock(MODEM)
GbE Line CLK 1/2 Export GbE Line CLK.
E1 Line CLK Export E1 Line CLK.
Slot 1 to 4
Port/CH E1: 1 to 16 CH Specify the Port or CH.
GbE: 1 to 4
Message Pass On SSM Message Pass Through mode
Through
Off
Forced SSM Send Pull-down menu Specify SSM value.
Value
AIS Generation Mode AIS AIS generation or Clock shutdown
Shutdown configuration when source of output
clock is failed.
Timing Loop On Enable Timing Loop detection
Prevention Off Disable Timing Loop detection

Note: User cannot change the Port/CH parameters when the same
interface is already registered on the Equipment clock setting.

NWD-115476-06E Operation
Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only

System Operation 5-253

6. Click OK button after setting the parameters.

7. The Information box appears. Click OK button.

Figure 5-377 Information Box

8. The Ext Clock Setting window appears again. Confirm the displayed
parameters.

Figure 5-378 Ext Clock Setting Window

This step ends the procedure.

Operation NWD-115476-06E
Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only

5-254 System Operation

5.1.5.3 PTP Mode Setting

(1) Modify PTP Card Mode Settings

Procedure 5-76

1. Expand Provisioning from the WebLCT menu.

2. Expand Equipment Clock/Synchronization Setting from the


Provisioning sub menu.

3. Select Equipment Clock Setting from the PTP Mode Setting sub
menu.

4. The PTP Mode Setting window appears. Click Modify PTP Card Mode
button.

Figure 5-379 PTP Mode Setting Window

NWD-115476-06E Operation
Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only

System Operation 5-255

5. The PTP Card Mode Setting (Step1, Step2) dialog box appears. Assign
a proper value for each parameter.

Figure 5-380 PTP Card Mode Setting (Step1) Window

Figure 5-381 PTP Card Mode Setting (Step2) Window

Operation NWD-115476-06E
Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only

5-256 System Operation

Table 5-56 PTP Card Mode Setting

Item Parameter Description


PTP Mode Slave Only Ordonary PTP Card acts as the Slave Clock Node.
Olock (SOOC)
Telecom Boundary Clock PTP Card acts as the Boundary Clock Node. This mode
(T-BC) requires the Licence key.
BMC Mode IEEE 1588v2 Mode This is static parameter.
Delay Measurement End-to-End This is static parameter.
Mode
Transport Mode PTP over UDP / IPv4 This option is fixed.

PTP Communication Unicast Select a commuication mode of synchronization. Select a


Mode Multicast matching mode to the Master that is synchronized with..
Unicast : One to one communication to the Master by
IPv4/UDP.
Multicast:: One to multicast communication to the
Master by IPv4/UDP.
PTP Domain Number 0 to 127 Specify the PTP domain number, which should match to
the Master that is synchronized with.

Clock Model PTP Mode Select a synchronizing method for the PTP Card:
PTP w/NE CLK Mode PTP Mode: Both the phase and frequency are
synchronized only by the IEEE1588v2 protocol.
PTP w/NE CLK Mode: The phase is synchronized by
IEEE1588v2 protocol, and the frequency is synchronized
by the equipment clock.
PTP Network Model Ethernet Set the algorithm of Packet Delay Variation (PDV)
Radio reduction.
For the normal use, select Ethernet.

Clock Class 1 to 180 Specify a period (minutes) to wait before changing SSM
Notification Delay value of the equipment clock when the clock class value
from the Master is changed.
This parameter is enabled when the PTP Card is
selected for the reference clock of the equipment, and
the BMC mode is Telecom Profile. In other conditions,
this option does not need to be changed.
PTP Card Priority1 1 to 255 Set the default vaules of Priority1 and Priority2 on the
Value PTP Card.
PTP card Priority2 This value is announced when the boundary clock
Value operates independently.
Revertive Mode Not supported This option is fixed.

WTR Mode NotSupported This option is fixed.

NWD-115476-06E Operation
Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only

System Operation 5-257

6. Click OK button after setting the parameters.

7. The Information box appears. Click OK button.

Figure 5-382 Information Box

(2) Modify Local Interface Setting

Procedure 5-77

1. Expand Provisioning from the WebLCT menu.

2. Expand Equipment Clock/Synchronization Setting from the


Provisioning sub menu.

3. Select Equipment Clock Setting from the PTP Mode Setting sub
menu.

4. The PTP Mode Setting window appears. Click Modify Local Intercace
Setting button.

Figure 5-383 PTP Mode Setting Window

Operation NWD-115476-06E
Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only

5-258 System Operation

5. The Local Interface Setting dialog box appears. Assign a proper value for
each parameter.

Figure 5-384 Local Interface setting Window

Table 5-57 Local Interface Setting

Item Parameter Description


Physical Interface Disable This option operates the PTP synchronization, but suspends
Type all the outputs of Clock, 1PPS and ToD.
Defferential This option outputs Clock, 1PPS or ToD according to the set
condition.

ToD Setting NMEA This option is fixed.


Time Format
ToD Setting UTC +/- 15:59 Specify the UTC Offset information on ToD output message.
Time Zone

1PPS Setting Positive Set the polarity of the 1PPS output pulse.
Polarity Negative Positive: The rising edge of 1PPS pulse is synchronizing
timing.
Negative: The falling edge of 1PPS pulse is synchronizing
timing.
1PPS Setting +/- 1000.0us Specify the Offset to the output of 1PPS.
Phase Offset

NWD-115476-06E Operation
Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only

System Operation 5-259

Item Parameter Description


1PPS Setting 100ns to 500ms Specify the width of the 1PPS output pulse.
Pulse Width

Holdoff Setting Always On Supplies clocks always regardless of the Clock State of the
10MHz / Card Clock Card.
Mode Squelch Supplies clocks unless the Clock State is Locked or Holdover.
Holdoff Setting 0 to 86400 If Holdover occurs where the Squelch mode is set, outputs will
10MHz / Card Clock be sudpended after passing the period specified here
Time Value
Holdoff Setting Always On Always outputs 1PPS regardless of the Clock State of the
1PPS Card.
Mode AIS Outputs AIS unless the Clock State is Locked or Holdover.
Squelch Suspends 1PPS outputs unless the Clock State is Locked or
Holdover.
Holdoff Setting 0 to 86400 If Holdover occurs where the squelch mode is set, outputs will
1PPS be suspended after passing the period specified here.
Time Value
Holdoff Setting Always On Outputs ToD always regardless of the Clock State of the
ToD Card.
Mode AIS Outputs AIS unless the Clock State is Locked or Holdover.
Squelch Outputs are suspended unless the Clock State is Lockd or
Holdover.
Holdoff Setting 0 to 86400 If Holdover occurs where the Squelch mode is set, outputs will
ToD be sudpended after passing the period specified here

Time Value

6. Click OK button after setting the parameters.

7. The Information box appears. Click OK button.

Figure 5-385 Information Box

Operation NWD-115476-06E
Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only

5-260 System Operation

(3) Add Master Ports

Following shows the settings of Logical Port that is to connect PTP-A Card and
Master equipment. The Port in this procedure is for the use of Slave only, which
cannot operates as a Master-role.

Procedure 5-78

1. Expand Provisioning from the WebLCT menu.

2. Expand Equipment Clock/Synchronization Setting from the


Provisioning sub menu.

3. Select Equipment Clock Setting from the PTP Mode Setting sub
menu.

4. The PTP Mode Setting window appears. Click Number of Master Port
Lists.

Figure 5-386 PTP Mode Setting Window

5. The Master Port IP Address Setting dialog box appears. Assign a proper
value for each parameter.

NWD-115476-06E Operation
Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only

System Operation 5-261

Figure 5-387 Master Port Setting Window

Operation NWD-115476-06E
Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only

5-262 System Operation

Table 5-58 Master Port Setting

Item Parameter Description


Master Port IP IP address Set the IP address of logical interface port that
Address synchronizes with master.

Subnet mask Subnet mask Set the subnet mask.


Default Gateway ─ This option is not necessary to set.
DSCP 0 to 63 Set the DSCP (DiffServ Code Point) value of PTP
packet.
TTL 1 to 255 This option is not necessary to set.
CoS 0 to 7 Set the CoS (Class of Service) value of PTP packet.
VLAN ID 1 to 4094 Select the VLAN of logical interface port that
synchronizes with master.
PTP Message Rate 1[fps], 2[fps], 4[fps], 6[fps], Set the rate of Sync Message that is sent to PTP-A
Sync Message 8[fps], 16[fps], 32[fps], card from Master.
64[fps], 128[fps] This option is valid when in the Unicast mode.
PTP Message Rate 1[fps], 2[fps], 4[fps], 6[fps], Set the rate of Delay Request Message that is sent to
Delay_Req Message 8[fps], 16[fps], 32[fps], Master from PTP-A card.
64[fps], 128[fps] This option is valid at the Unicast mode.

PTP Message Rate 0.5[fps], 1[fps], 2[fps], 4[fps], Set the rate of Announce Message that is sent to
Announce Message 8[fps] PTP-A card from Master.
This option is valid when in the Unicast mode.
Announce Receipt 2 to 255 Set the threshold of detecting PTSF-LossAnnounce.
Timeout Expire The value indicates the number of reception packets.
Sync Receipt Timeout 2 to 255 Set the threshold of detecting PTSF-LossSync.
Expire The value indicates the number of reception packets.

NWD-115476-06E Operation
Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only

System Operation 5-263

(4) Add Slave Ports

Following shows the settings of the Logical Port that is to connect the PTP-A
card and Slave equipment or Boundary Clock equipment. The Port here is
supported by the Boundary Clock mode, and it needs Licence Key in Boundary
Clock.

Procedure 5-79

1. Expand Provisioning from the WebLCT menu.

2. Expand Equipment Clock/Synchronization Setting from the


Provisioning sub menu.

3. Select Equipment Clock Setting from the PTP Mode Setting sub
menu.

4. The PTP Mode Setting window appears. Click Number of Slave Port
Lists.

Figure 5-388 PTP Mode Setting Window

Operation NWD-115476-06E
Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only

5-264 System Operation

5. The Slave Port IP Address Setting dialog box appears. Assign a proper
value for each parameter.

Figure 5-389 Slave Port Setting Window

NWD-115476-06E Operation
Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only

System Operation 5-265

Table 5-59 Slave Port Setting

Item Parameter Description


Slave Port IP Address IP address Set the IP address of logical interface port that
synchronizes with slave.

Subnet mask Subnet mask Set the subnet mask.


Default Gateway - Setting is unnecessary.
DSCP 0 to 63 Set the DSCP (DiffServ Code Point) value of PTP
packet.
TTL 1 to 255 This option is not necessary to set.
CoS 0 to 7 Set the CoS (Class of Service) value of PTP packet.
VLAN ID 1 to 4094 Select the VLAN of logical interface port that
synchronizes with slave.
PTP Message Rate 1[fps], 2[fps], 4[fps], 6[fps], Set the packet rate of Sync Messages that are sent
Sync Message 8[fps], 16[fps], 32[fps], from PTP-A Card to the Slave.
64[fps], 128[fps] This option is valid when in the multicast mode.
PTP Message Rate 1[fps], 2[fps], 4[fps], 6[fps], Set the packet rate of Delay Request Messages that
Delay_Req Message 8[fps], 16[fps], 32[fps], are sent from the Slave to PTP-A Care.
64[fps], 128[fps] This option is valid when in the multicast mode.

PTP Message Rate 0.5[fps], 1[fps], 2[fps], 4[fps], Set the packet rate of Announce Messages that are
Announce Message 8[fps] sent from PTP-A Card to the Slave.
This parameter is valid at the multicast mode.

Operation NWD-115476-06E
Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only

5-266 System Operation

5.1.5.4 PTP Domain Setting

(1) Add PTP Master List

Procedure 5-80

1. Expand Provisioning from the WebLCT menu.

2. Expand Equipment Clock/Synchronization Setting from the


Provisioning sub menu.

3. Select Equipment Clock Setting from the PTP Domain Setting sub menu.

4. The PTP Domain Setting window appears. Click Number of PTP Master
Lists.

Figure 5-390 PTP Domain Setting Window

Figure 5-391 PTP Master Setting Window

NWD-115476-06E Operation
Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only

System Operation 5-267

Table 5-60 Master / Slave Port Setting

Item Parameter Description


PTP Master IPv4 Address Set the IP address of GrandMaster/BoundaryClock.
IP Address
Master Name String Specify the name of the Master equipment.

Priority ─ This option is not necessary to set.

Operation NWD-115476-06E
Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only

5-268 System Operation

5.1.6 Relay-Alarm Mapping Setting


User can configure relay control setting and cluster alarm setting.

 Relay Control Setting

 Cluster Alarm Setting

5.1.6.1 Relay Control Setting

Procedure 5-81

1. Expand Provisioning from the WebLCT menu.

2. Expand Relay-Alarm Mapping Setting from the Provisioning sub


menu.

3. Select Relay Control Setting from the Relay-Alarm Mapping Setting


sub menu.

4. Relay Control Setting window appears.

5. Click MC-A4 tab. The MC-A4 tab appears.

NWD-115476-06E Operation
Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only

System Operation 5-269

Figure 5-392 Relay Control Setting Box

6. Click Modify button. Relay Control Setting (MC-A4) box appears.

Operation NWD-115476-06E
Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only

5-270 System Operation

Figure 5-393 Relay Control Setting (MC-A4)

NWD-115476-06E Operation
Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only

System Operation 5-271

7. For confirmation, click a cell in the above box.confirm that color of the
clicked cell changed green.

8. Map alarm names to relay contact(s) RL01 to RL06.

9. Click OK button. The Information box appears.

Figure 5-394 Information Box

10. Click OK button.

11. The Relay Control Setting window appears again. Confirm the mapped
condition.

12. Repeat above steps for other tabs ODU No.1/MODEM (Slot01),
ODU No.2/MODEM (Slot02), etc. (depends on mounted cards).

This step ends the procedure.

Operation NWD-115476-06E
Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only

5-272 System Operation

5.1.7 V.11/OW Setting


This setting provides the configuration of user interface (V.11, RS-232C) and OW
channel.

 V.11/SC Control Setting

Select the input of SC Channel, RS-232C, and V.11 from the SC channel of each
MODEM.

 V.11 Directional Setting

Set the working mode of V.11.

 OW Setting

Set the OW channel of the radio section and CALL OUT polarity.

5.1.7.1 V.11/SC Setting

(1) SC Setting

Procedure 5-82

1. Expand Provisioning from the WebLCT menu.

2. Expand V.11/OW Setting from the Provisioning sub menu.

3. Select V.11/SC Setting from the V.11/OW Setting sub menu.

4. The V.11/SC Setting window appears. Click SC Channel.

NWD-115476-06E Operation
Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only

System Operation 5-273

Figure 5-395 V.11/SC Setting Window

5. The V.11/SC Setting (SC Channel) dialog box appears. Specify the
proper SC channel for each interface.

Figure 5-396 V.11/SC Setting (SC Channel) Dialog Box (for MODEM1)

Operation NWD-115476-06E
Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only

5-274 System Operation

Figure 5-397 V.11/SC Setting (SC Channel) Dialog Box (for STM1-A)

6. Click OK button after setting the parameters.

7. The Information box appears. Click OK button.

Figure 5-398 Information Box

8. The V.11/SC Setting window appears again. Confirm the displayed


parameters.

NWD-115476-06E Operation
Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only

System Operation 5-275

Figure 5-399 V.11/SC Setting Window

This step ends the procedure.

(2) MODEM

Procedure 5-83

1. Expand Provisioning from the WebLCT menu.

2. Expand V.11/OW Setting from the Provisioning sub menu.

3. Select V.11/SC Setting from the V.11/OW Setting sub menu.

4. The V.11/SC Setting window appears. Click MODEM1 or MODEM2.

Operation NWD-115476-06E
Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only

5-276 System Operation

Figure 5-400 V.11/SC setting Window

5. The V.11/SC Setting dialog box appears. Specify the proper SC channel for
each interface.

Figure 5-401 V.11/SC Setting Dialog Box (from MODEM1 and MODEM2)

NWD-115476-06E Operation
Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only

System Operation 5-277

Figure 5-402 V.11/SC Setting Dialog Box (from MODEM1 or MODEM2 to STM1-A)

6. Click OK button after setting the parameters.

7. The Information box appears. Click OK button.

Figure 5-403 Information Box

8. The V.11/SC Setting window appears again. Confirm the displayed


parameters.

Operation NWD-115476-06E
Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only

5-278 System Operation

Figure 5-404 V.11/SC Setting Window

This step ends the procedure.

(3) STM1-A

Procedure 5-84

1. Expand Provisioning from the WebLCT menu.

2. Expand V.11/OW Setting from the Provisioning sub menu.

3. Select V.11/SC Setting from the V.11/OW Setting sub menu.

4. The V.11/SC Setting window appears. Click STM1-A.

NWD-115476-06E Operation
Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only

System Operation 5-279

Figure 5-405 V.11/SC Setting Window

5. The V.11/SC Setting dialog box appears. Specify the proper SC channel for
each interface.

Figure 5-406 V.11/SC Setting Dialog Box (for STM1-A)

6. Click OK button after setting the parameters.

Operation NWD-115476-06E
Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only

5-280 System Operation

7. The Information box appears. Click OK button.

Figure 5-407 Information Box

8. The V.11/SC Setting window appears again. Confirm the displayed


parameters.

Figure 5-408 V.11/SC Setting Window

This step ends the procedure.

5.1.7.2 V.11 Directional Setting

Procedure 5-85

1. Expand Provisioning from the WebLCT menu.

2. Expand V.11/OW Setting from the Provisioning sub menu.

NWD-115476-06E Operation
Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only

System Operation 5-281

3. Select V.11 Directional Setting from the V.11/OW Setting sub menu.

4. The V.11 Directional Setting window appears. Click Modify button.

Figure 5-409 V.11 Directional Setting Window

5. The V.11 Directional Setting dialog box appears. Assign a proper value
for each parameter.

Figure 5-410 V.11 Directional Setting Dialog Box

Table 5-61 V.11 Directional Setting

Item Parameter Description


V.11-1/2 Direction Co-Directional The data receiving direction is the
Setting same as the clock output/input
direction.
Contra-Directional The data receiving direction is different
from the clock output/input direction.

6. Click OK button after setting the parameters.

7. The Information box appears. Click OK button.

Operation NWD-115476-06E
Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only

5-282 System Operation

Figure 5-411 Information Box

8. The V.11 Directional Setting window appears again. Confirm the


displayed parameters.

Figure 5-412 V.11 Directional Setting Window

This step ends the procedure.

5.1.7.3 OW Setting

(1) SW GRP (MODEM1/2 or MODEM3/4): SW GRP1 sample

Procedure 5-86

1. Expand Provisioning from the WebLCT menu.

2. Expand V.11/OW Setting from the Provisioning sub menu.

3. Select OW Setting from the V.11/OW Setting sub menu.

4. The OW Setting window appears. Click MODEM1 or MODEM2.

NWD-115476-06E Operation
Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only

System Operation 5-283

Figure 5-413 OW Setting Window

5. The OW Setting (MODEM - 1 + 0) dialog box appears. Specify a proper


value for the parameter.

Figure 5-414 OW Setting (MODEM - 1 + 0) Dialog Box

Table 5-62 OW Setting

Item Parameter Description


OW Use DSC Used Enable the use of OW channel.
Not Used Disable the use of OW channel.

6. Click OK button after setting the parameter.

7. The Information box appears. Click OK button.

Figure 5-415 Information Box

8. The OW Setting window appears again. Confirm the displayed parameters.

Operation NWD-115476-06E
Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only

5-284 System Operation

Figure 5-416 OW Setting Window

This step ends the procedure.

(2) AUX-A

Procedure 5-87

1. Expand Provisioning from the WebLCT menu.

2. Expand V.11/OW Setting from the Provisioning sub menu.

3. Select OW Setting from the V.11/OW Setting sub menu.

4. The OW Setting window appears. Click AUX-A.

Figure 5-417 OW Setting Window

5. The OW Setting (AUX-A) dialog box appears. Specify a proper value for
the parameter.

NWD-115476-06E Operation
Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only

System Operation 5-285

Figure 5-418 OW Setting (AUX-S) Dialog Box

Table 5-63 OW Setting

Item Parameter Description


Call Polarity Invert When a signal is not normal
signal.
Normal When a signal is normal.

6. Click OK button after setting the parameter.

7. The Information box appears. Click OK button.

Figure 5-419 Information Box

8. The OW Setting window appears again. Confirm the displayed parameters.

Figure 5-420 OW Setting Window

This step ends the procedure.

Operation NWD-115476-06E
Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only

5-286 System Operation

5.1.8 Alarm/AIS Setting


This setting provides the configuration of alarm severity, color and the relevant
setting of AIS events.

 Correlation Setting

User can configure the condition of masking alarm (displaying/clearing alarm on


LCT or LED).

 Alarm Severity Setting

User can specify the alarm severity (critical, major, minor, and warning) for each
alarm reported by iPASOLINK400.

 AIS Setting

User can enable or disable sending AIS alarm and specify the conditions and
delay of sending AIS alarm.

 BER Threshold Setting

Specify the threshold of BER alarm of (High/Low)/STM-1 MUX input and


E-BER/SD

NWD-115476-06E Operation
Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only

System Operation 5-287

5.1.8.1 Correlation Setting

Procedure 5-88

1. Expand Provisioning from the WebLCT menu.

2. Expand Alarm/AIS Setting from the Provisioning sub menu.

3. Select Correlation Setting from the Alarm/AIS Setting sub menu.

4. The Correlation Setting window appears. Click Modify button.

Figure 5-421 Correlation Setting Window

5. The Correlation Setting dialog box appears. Assign a proper value for
each parameter.

Figure 5-422 Correlation Setting Dialog Box

Table 5-64 Correlation Setting

Item Parameter Description


Alarm Correlation On Enables masking the lower level alarm.
Off Disables masking the lower level alarm.

6. Click OK button after setting the parameters.

Operation NWD-115476-06E
Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only

5-288 System Operation

7. The Information box appears. Click OK button.

Figure 5-423 Information Box

8. The Correlation Setting window appears again. Confirm the displayed


parameters.

Figure 5-424 Correlation Setting Window

This step ends the procedure.

NWD-115476-06E Operation
Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only

System Operation 5-289

5.1.8.2 Alarm Severity Setting

1. Expand Provisioning from the WebLCT menu.

2. Expand Alarm/AIS Setting from the Provisioning sub menu.

3. Select Alarm Severity Setting from the Alarm/AIS Setting sub menu.

4. The Alarm Severity Setting window appears. Description is an example


for ODU. After the setting of ODU, perform similarly for other tabs.

5. Click the Modify button

Modify button

Figure 5-425 Alarm Severity Setting Window (ODU Tab)

6. Alarm Severity Setting Box (ODU) appears.

7. Select the desired alarm status from the drop down list of Alarm Status.

Operation NWD-115476-06E
Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only

5-290 System Operation

Figure 5-426 Alarm Severity (ODU) Dialog Box

Table 5-65 Alarm Severity Levels

Item Parameter Description


Alarm Items specific Critical -
for each tab Major -
Minor -
Warning -

8. Set the alarm status for each Alarm Item, and then repeat the procedures for
other tabs.

9. After setting of severity, click OK button. Information box appears

Figure 5-427 Information Box

10. Click OK button. Alarm Severity Setting window appears again. Confirm
the displayed parameter(s).

NWD-115476-06E Operation
Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only

System Operation 5-291

Figure 5-428 Alarm Severity Setting Window

This step ends the procedure.

5.1.8.3 AIS Setting

Procedure 5-89

1. Expand Provisioning from the WebLCT menu.

2. Expand Alarm/AIS Setting from the Provisioning sub menu.

3. Select AIS Setting from the Alarm/AIS Setting sub menu.

4. The AIS Setting window appears. Click Modify button.

Operation NWD-115476-06E
Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only

5-292 System Operation

Figure 5-429 AIS Setting Window

5. The AIS Setting dialog box appears. Specify a proper value for each
parameter.

Figure 5-430 AIS Setting Dialog Box

Table 5-66 AIS Setting

Item Parameter Description


AIS Activation LOF + High BER Send AIS alarm after receiving LOF
Condition and High BER alarm.
LOF Send AIS alarm after receiving LOF
alarm only.
AIS Generated Report Report Report AIS generated event.
Not Report Not report AIS generated event.
AIS Received Report Report Report AIS received event.
Not Report Not report AIS received event.
AIS Received Alarm Specify the AIS received event as
Condition alarm.
Status Specify the AIS received event as
status.

6. Click OK button after setting the parameters.

7. The Information box appears. Click OK button.

NWD-115476-06E Operation
Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only

System Operation 5-293

Figure 5-431 Information Box

8. The AIS Setting window appears again. Confirm the displayed parameters.

Figure 5-432 AIS Setting Window

This step ends the procedure.

5.1.8.4 BER Threshold Setting

Specify the threshold of BER alarm of (High/Low)/STM-1 MUX input and


E-BER/SD.

(1) SW GRP (MODEM1/2 or MODEM3/4)

Procedure 5-90

1. Expand Provisioning from the WebLCT menu.

2. Expand Alarm/AIS Setting from the Provisioning sub menu.

3. Select BER Threshold Setting from the Alarm/AIS Setting sub menu.

4. The BER Threshold Setting window appears. Click the desired MODEM
No. (or SW GRP) to configure.

Operation NWD-115476-06E
Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only

5-294 System Operation

Figure 5-433 BER Threshold Setting Window

5. The BER Threshold Setting (MODEM - 1+0) dialog box appears. Assign
a proper value for each parameter.

Figure 5-434 BER Threshold Setting (MODEM - 1 + 0) Dialog Box

Table 5-67 BER Threshold

Item Parameter Description


High BER 1E-3 to 1E-5 Setting for High BER Threshold of
MW.
Low BER 1E-6 to 1E-9 Setting for Low BER Threshold of
MW.

6. Click OK button after setting the parameters.

7. The Information box appears. Click OK button.

Figure 5-435 Information Box

8. The BER Threshold Setting window appears again. Confirm the

NWD-115476-06E Operation
Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only

System Operation 5-295

displayed parameters.

Figure 5-436 BER Threshold Setting Window

This step ends the procedure.

(3) STM1-A

Procedure 5-91

1. Expand Provisioning from the WebLCT menu.

2. Expand Alarm/AIS Setting from the Provisioning sub menu.

3. Select BER Threshold Setting from the Alarm/AIS Setting sub menu.

4. The BER Threshold Setting window appears. Click STM1-A.

Figure 5-437 BER Threshold Setting Window

5. The BER Threshold Setting (STM1-A) dialog box appears. Assign a


proper value for each parameter.

Operation NWD-115476-06E
Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only

5-296 System Operation

Figure 5-438 BER Threshold Setting (STM1-A) Dialog Box

Table 5-68 BER Threshold

Item Parameter Description


RS-EXC 1E-3 to 1E-5 Setting for RS-EXC Threshold of STM-1 MUX.
RS-DGE 1E-5 to 1E-9 Setting for RS-DGE Threshold of STM-1 MUX.

6. Click OK button after setting the parameters.

7. The Information box appears. Click OK button.

Figure 5-439 Information Box

8. The BER Threshold Setting window appears again. Confirm the


displayed parameters.

Figure 5-440 BER Threshold Setting Window

This step ends the procedure.

NWD-115476-06E Operation
Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only

System Operation 5-297

5.1.9 PMON/RMON Setting


This setting provides the relevant configuration of PMON (except Ethernet port) and
RMON (Ethernet port), including threshold.

The PMON/RMON Setting menu list is as follows:

 PMON Threshold Setting

Threshold setting of PMON (except ETH port).

 PMON Other

Threshold setting of TCN level.

 RMON Threshold Setting

Threshold setting of RMON (ETH port).

 RMON Other

Add the VLAN Counter (VLAN Counter Report).

5.1.9.1 PMON Threshold Setting

(1) MC-A4 Tab

Procedure 5-92

1. Expand Provisioning from the WebLCT menu.

2. Expand PMON/RMON Setting from the Provisioning sub menu.

3. Select PMON Threshold Setting from the PMON/RMON Setting sub


menu.

4. The PMON Threshold Setting window appears. Select the MC-A4 tab.

5. The MC-A4 tab appears. Click Modify button.

Operation NWD-115476-06E
Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only

5-298 System Operation

Figure 5-441 MC-A4 Tab

6. The MC-A4 dialog box appears. Assign a proper value for each parameter.

NWD-115476-06E Operation
Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only

System Operation 5-299

Figure 5-442 MC-A4 Dialog Box

Table 5-69 PMON Threshold Setting

Item Parameter Description


15min/1day Occur 0 to 4294967295 Specify the threshold for
generating alarm.
Recover 0 to 4294967295 Specify the threshold for
clearing the alarm.

7. Click OK button after setting the parameters.

8. The Information box appears. Click OK button.

Figure 5-443 Information Box

Operation NWD-115476-06E
Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only

5-300 System Operation

9. The MC-A4 tab appears again. Confirm the displayed parameters.

Figure 5-444 MC-A4 Tab

This step ends the procedure.

(2) SW GRP (Slot No.) Tab

Procedure 5-93

1. Expand Provisioning from the WebLCT menu.

2. Expand PMON/RMON Setting from the Provisioning sub menu.

3. Select PMON Threshold Setting from the PMON/RMON Setting sub


menu.

4. The PMON Threshold Setting window appears. Select the SW GRP


(Slot No.) tab.

NWD-115476-06E Operation
Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only

System Operation 5-301

5. The SW GRP (Slot No.) tab appears. Click Modify button.

Figure 5-445 SW GRP (Slot No.) Tab

6. The RF- SW GRP (Slot No.) dialog box appears. Assign a proper value for
each parameter.

Figure 5-446 RF- SW GRP (Slot No.) Dialog Box

Operation NWD-115476-06E
Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only

5-302 System Operation

Table 5-70 PMON Threshold Setting (SW GRP (Slot No.) Tab)

Item Parameter Description


RF 15min MODEM-A Specify the threshold for generation/recovery
BBE 0 to 5640000 of 15 min RS-BBE alarm.
MODEM-EA
1 to 5812000
1 day MODEM-A Specify the threshold for generation/recovery
0 to 541440000 of 1 day RS-BBE alarm.
MODEM-EA
1 to 557952000
RF ES 15min 0 to 900 Specify the threshold for generation/recovery
of 15 min RF ES alarm.
1 day 0 to 86400 Specify the threshold for generation/recovery
of 1 day RF ES alarm.
RF 15min 0 to 900 Specify the threshold for generation/recovery
SES of 15 min RF SES alarm.
1 day 0 to 86400 Specify the threshold for generation/recovery
of 1 day RF SES alarm.
RF 15min 0 to 900 Specify the threshold for generation/recovery
SEP of 15 min RF SEP alarm.
1 day 0 to 86400 Specify the threshold for generation/recovery
of 1 day RF SEP alarm.
RF 15min 0 to 900 Specify the threshold for generation/recovery
UAS of 15 min RF UAS alarm.
1 day 0 to 86400 Specify the threshold for generation/recovery
of 1 day RF UAS alarm.
RF 15min 0 to 900 Specify the threshold for generation/recovery
OFS of 15 min RF OFS alarm.
1 day 0 to 86400 Specify the threshold for generation/recovery
of 1 day RF OFS alarm.

7. Click OK button after setting the parameters.

NWD-115476-06E Operation
Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only

System Operation 5-303

8. The Information box appears. Click OK button.

Figure 5-447 Information Box

9. The SW GRP (Slot No.) tab appears again. Confirm the displayed
parameters.

Figure 5-448 SW GRP (Slot No.) Tab

This step ends the procedure.

(3) APS GRP (Slot No.) Tab

Procedure 5-94

1. Expand Provisioning from the WebLCT menu.

2. Expand PMON/RMON Setting from the Provisioning sub menu.

3. Select PMON Threshold Setting from the PMON/RMON Setting sub


menu.

4. The PMON Threshold Setting window appears. Select the APS GRP
(Slot No.) tab.

Operation NWD-115476-06E
Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only

5-304 System Operation

5. The APS GRP (Slot No.) tab appears. Click Modify DMR RS or Modify
RS button.

Figure 5-449 APS GRP (Slot No.) Tab

6. The DMR - STM1-A or RS - STM1-A dialog box appears. Assign a proper


value for each parameter.

Figure 5-450 DMR - APS GRP (Slot No.) Dialog Box

NWD-115476-06E Operation
Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only

System Operation 5-305

Figure 5-451 RS - APS GRP (Slot No.) Dialog Box

Table 5-71 PMON Threshold Setting (APS GRP (Slot No.) DMR)

Item Parameter Description


DMR RS BBE 15min 0 to 16777215 Specify the threshold for
generation/recovery of 15 min DMR RS
BBE Alarm.
1 day 0 to 1610612640 Specify the threshold for
generation/recovery of 1 day DMR RS BBE
Alarm.
DMR RS ES 15min 0 to 900 Specify the threshold of generation/recovery
of 15 min DMR RS ES Alarm.
1 day 0 to 86400 Specify the threshold for
generation/recovery of 1 day DMR RS ES
Alarm.
DMR RS SES 15min 0 to 900 Specify the threshold for
generation/recovery of 15 min DMR RS
SES Alarm.
1 day 0 to 86400 Specify the threshold for
generation/recovery of 1 day DMR RS SES
Alarm.
DMR RS SEP 15min 0 to 900 Specify the threshold for
generation/recovery of 15 min DMR RS
SEP Alarm.
1 day 0 to 86400 Specify the threshold for
generation/recovery of 1 day DMR RS SEP
Alarm.
DMR RS UAS 15min 0 to 900 Specify the threshold for
generation/recovery of 15 min DMR RS
UAS Alarm.

Operation NWD-115476-06E
Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only

5-306 System Operation

Item Parameter Description


1 day 0 to 86400 Specify the threshold for
generation/recovery of 1 day DMR RS UAS
Alarm.
DMR RS OFS 15min 0 to 900 Specify the threshold for
generation/recovery of 15 min DMR RS
OFS Alarm.
1 day 0 to 86400 Specify the threshold for
generation/recovery of 1 day DMR RS OFS
Alarm.

NWD-115476-06E Operation
Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only

System Operation 5-307

Table 5-72 PMON Threshold Setting (APS GRP (Slot No.) RS)

Item Parameter Description


RS BBE-RS 15min 0 to 16777215 Specify the threshold for generation/recovery
of 15 min RS BBE-RS Alarm.
1 day 0 to 1610612640 Specify the threshold for generation/recovery
of 1 day RS BBE-RS Alarm.
RS ES-RS 15min 0 to 900 Specify the threshold for generation/recovery
of 15 min RS ES-RS Alarm.
1 day 0 to 86400 Specify the threshold for generation/recovery
of 1 day RS ES –RS Alarm.
RS SES-RS 15min 0 to 900 Specify the threshold for generation/recovery
of 15 min RS SES-RS Alarm.
1 day 0 to 86400 Specify the threshold for generation/recovery
of 1 day RS SES-RS Alarm.
RS SEP-RS 15min 0 to 900 Specify the threshold for generation/recovery
of 15 min RS SEP-RS Alarm.
1 day 0 to 86400 Specify the threshold for generation/recovery
of 1 day RS SEP-RS Alarm.
RS UAS-RS 15min 0 to 900 Specify the threshold for generation/recovery
of 15 min RS UAS-RS Alarm.
1 day 0 to 86400 Specify the threshold for generation/recovery
of 1 day RS UAS-RS Alarm.
RS OFS-RS 15min 0 to 900 Specify the threshold for generation/recovery
of 15 min RS OFS-RS Alarm.
1 day 0 to 86400 Specify the threshold for generation/recovery
of 1 day RS OFS-RS Alarm.

7. Click OK button after setting the parameters.

8. The Information box appears. Click OK button.

Figure 5-452 Information Box

Operation NWD-115476-06E
Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only

5-308 System Operation

9. The APS GRP (Slot No.) tab appears again. Confirm the displayed
parameters.

Figure 5-453 APS GRP (Slot No.) Tab

This step ends the procedure.

5.1.9.2 PMON Other

Procedure 5-95

1. Expand Provisioning from the WebLCT menu.

2. Expand PMON/RMON Setting from the Provisioning sub menu.

3. Select PMON Other from the PMON/RMON Setting sub menu.

4. The PMON Other window appears. Click the target MODEM.

NWD-115476-06E Operation
Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only

System Operation 5-309

Figure 5-454 PMON Other Window

5. The PMON Other Setting dialog box appears. Assign a proper value for
each parameter.

Figure 5-455 PMON Other Setting Dialog Box

Table 5-73 PMON Other Setting

Item Parameter Description


RX Level TCN Threshold -99 to -30 dBm Specify the threshold for generating TCN RX
Level alarm.

6. Click OK button after setting the parameters.

7. The Information box appears. Click OK button.

Figure 5-456 Information Box

8. The PMON Other window appears again. Confirm the displayed

Operation NWD-115476-06E
Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only

5-310 System Operation

parameters.

Figure 5-457 PMON Other Window

This step ends the procedure.

5.1.9.3 RMON Threshold Setting

Procedure 5-96

1. Expand Provisioning from the WebLCT menu.

2. Expand PMON/RMON Setting from the Provisioning sub menu.

3. Select RMON Threshold Setting from the PMON/RMON Setting sub


menu.

4. The RMON Threshold Setting window appears. Click Modify button.

Figure 5-458 RMON Threshold Setting Window

NWD-115476-06E Operation
Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only

System Operation 5-311

5. The RMON Threshold Setting dialog box appears. Assign a proper value
for each parameter.

Figure 5-459 RMON Threshold Setting Dialog Box

Operation NWD-115476-06E
Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only

5-312 System Operation

Table 5-74 RMON Threshold Setting

Item Parameter Description


RX Drop Events 15 min 0 to 133929000 Specify the threshold for generation of
15 min RX Drop Events.
1 day 0 to 4294967294 Specify the threshold for generation of
1 day RX Drop Events.
RX Undersize Pkts 15 min 0 to 133929000 Specify the threshold for generation of
15 min RX Under size Packets.
1 day 0 to 4294967294 Specify the threshold for generation of
1 day RX Under size Packets.
RX Fragments 15 min 0 to 133929000 Specify the threshold for generation of
15 min RX Fragments.
1 day 0 to 4294967294 Specify the threshold for generation of
1 day RX Fragments.
RX CRC Alignment Errors 15 min 0 to 133929000 Specify the threshold for generation of
15 min RX CRC Alignment Errors.
1 day 0 to 4294967294 Specify the threshold for generation of
1 day RX CRC Alignment Errors.
RX oversize Pkts 15 min 0 to 133929000 Specify the threshold for generation of
15 min RX oversize Packets.
1 day 0 to 4294967294 Specify the threshold for generation of
1 day RX oversize Packets.
TX Collisions 15 min 0 to 133929000 Specify the threshold for generation of
15 min TX Collisions.
1 day 0 to 4294967294 Specify the threshold for generation of
1 day TX Collisions.

6. Click OK button after setting the parameters.

7. The Information box appears. Click OK button.

Figure 5-460 Information Box

8. The RMON Threshold Setting window appears again. Confirm the


displayed parameters.

NWD-115476-06E Operation
Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only

System Operation 5-313

Figure 5-461 RMON Threshold Setting Window

This step ends the procedure.

5.1.9.4 RMON Other

(a) Add VLAN Counter

Procedure 5-97

1. Expand Provisioning from the WebLCT menu.

2. Expand PMON/RMON Setting from the Provisioning sub menu.

3. Select RMON Other from the PMON/RMON Setting sub menu.

4. The RMON Other window appears. Click VLAN counter No. in the
VLAN Counter Select tab.

Operation NWD-115476-06E
Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only

5-314 System Operation

Figure 5-462 RMON Other Window

5. The VLAN Counter Select dialog box appears. Assign a proper value for
each parameter.

Figure 5-463 VLAN Counter Select Dialog Box

Table 5-75 RMON Other

Item Parameter Description


Item Specify a package.
Port Specify a port.
Enable radio Button ON / OFF Set to ON to count the frames that
pass through the VLAN.

6. Click OK button after setting the parameters.

7. The Information box appears. Click OK button.

NWD-115476-06E Operation
Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only

System Operation 5-315

Figure 5-464 Information Box

8. The RMON Other window appears again. Confirm the displayed


parameters.

Figure 5-465 RMON Other Window

This step ends the procedure.

(b) Delete VLAN Counter

Procedure 5-98

1. Expand Provisioning from the WebLCT menu.

2. Expand PMON/RMON Setting from the Provisioning sub menu.

3. Select RMON Other from the PMON/RMON Setting sub menu.

4. The RMON Other window appears. Click Delete VLAN Counter button.

Operation NWD-115476-06E
Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only

5-316 System Operation

Figure 5-466 RMON Other Window

5. The Delete VLAN Counter dialog box appears. Select the VLAN
Counter No. to be deleted.

Figure 5-467 Delete VLAN Counter Dialog Box

6. Click OK button after setting the parameters.

7. The Confirmation box appears. Click OK button.

Figure 5-468 Confirmation Box

8. The Information box appears. Click OK button.

NWD-115476-06E Operation
Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only

System Operation 5-317

Figure 5-469 Information Box

9. The RMON Other window appears again. Confirm the displayed


parameters.

Figure 5-470 RMON Other Window

This step ends the procedure.

5.1.10 AUX Setting


The AUX Setting menu list is as follows:

- AUX Input Setting

- AUX Output Setting

5.1.10.1 AUX Input Setting

Procedure 5-99

1. Expand Provisioning from the WebLCT menu.

2. Expand AUX Setting from the Provisioning sub menu.

3. Select AUX Input Setting from the AUX Setting sub menu.

Operation NWD-115476-06E
Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only

5-318 System Operation

4. The AUX Input Setting window appears. Click Modify button in the target
AUX tab.

Figure 5-471 AUX Input Setting Window

5. The AUX Input Setting dialog box appears. Assign a proper value for each
parameter.

Figure 5-472 AUX Input Setting Dialog Box

NWD-115476-06E Operation
Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only

System Operation 5-319

Table 5-76 AUX Input Setting

Item Parameter Description


Name 1 to 32 characters Specify the event Name which is
displayed on the event log.
Condition Alarm when Event On Set to report an alarm in case of
(Close) Event ON.
Alarm when Event Off Set to report an alarm in case of
(Open) Event OFF.
Status Status information is reported instead
of an alarm.
Status Strings
Event On 1 to 32 characters Specify an event name to be
(Close) displayed when the event status
Event Off 1 to 32 characters changes.
(Open)
X.733
Severity Critical/Major/Minor/Warning Specify an alarm Severity.
Alarm Type Default: environmentalAlarm Specify an Alarm Type name.
Probable Cause Default: Invalid Specify a Probable Cause of the
event.

6. Click OK button after setting the parameters.

7. The Information box appears. Click OK button.

Figure 5-473 Information Box

8. The AUX Input Setting window appears again. Confirm the displayed
parameters.

Operation NWD-115476-06E
Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only

5-320 System Operation

Figure 5-474 AUX Input Setting Window

This step ends the procedure.

5.1.10.2 AUX Output Setting

Procedure 5-100

1. Expand Provisioning from the WebLCT menu.

2. Expand AUX Setting from the Provisioning sub menu.

3. Select AUX Output Setting from the AUX Setting sub menu.

4. The AUX Output Setting window appears. Click the target output No.

Figure 5-475 AUX Output Setting Window

NWD-115476-06E Operation
Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only

System Operation 5-321

5. The AUX Output Setting dialog box appears. Specify a proper value for
the parameters.

Figure 5-476 AUX Output Setting Dialog Box

Table 5-77 AUX Output Setting

Item Parameter Description


Name 1 to 32 characters Specify an Alarm Name.
Control Event Off (Open) Send out a control signal in case
of Event Off.
Event On (Close) Send out a control signal in case
of Event ON.
Event On(Close) 1 to 32 characters Specify an event name.
Event Off(Open) 1 to 32 characters

6. Click OK button after setting the parameters.

7. The Information box appears. Click OK button.

Operation NWD-115476-06E
Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only

5-322/END System Operation

Figure 5-477 Information Box

8. The AUX Output Setting window appears again. Confirm the displayed
parameters.

Figure 5-478 AUX Output Setting Window

This step ends the procedure.

NWD-115476-06E Operation
Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only

Abbreviations 6-1

6. ABBREVIATIONS

ACAP Adjacent Channel Alternate CORBA Common Object Request Broker


Polarization Architecture
ACCP Adjacent Channel Co-Polarization CoS Class of Service
ACK Acknowledgement CPU Central Processing Unit
ACR Adaptive Clock Recover CR Critical
AGC Automatic Gain Control CRC Cyclic Redundancy Check
AIS Alarm Indication Signal CS Channel Separation
ALM Alarm CTRL Control
ALS Auto Laser Shutdown CV near end Code Violation
AMR Adaptive Modulation Radio CW Carrier Wave
ANT, Ant. Antenna DA Destination Address
APS Automatic Protection Switch DADE Differential Absolute Delay
ATT Attenuator Equalizer

ATPC Automatic Transmitter Power DB Database


Control DC Direct Current
AU Administrative Unit DCN Data Communication Network
AUX Auxiliary DEG Degraded
Ave Average DEI Drop Eligible Indicator
BBE Background Block Error DEM Demodulator
BER Bit Error Rate Des(Dest) Destination
BPF Band Pass Filter DI Data-in
BS Base Station D/I Drop and Insert
BSC Base Station Controller DL Download
BTS Base Transceiver Station DM Delay Measurement
CAPEX Capital Expenditure DMM Delay Measurement Message
CBS Committed Burst Size DMR Delay Measurement Reply
CCDP Co-Channel Dual Polarization DO Data-out
CCM Continuity Check Message DSCP Differentiated Services Code Point
CEPT Conference of European Postal & DUP Duplexer
Telecommunication Administration DXC Digital Cross Connect
CIR Committed Information Rate E1 E-carrier level 1
CKT Circuit EBS Express Burst Size
CLK Clock EIR Excess Information Rate
CMF Channel Mismatch Failure EMC Electro Magnetic Compatibility
CMI Coded Mark Inversion EML Element Management Layer
CONV Converter EMS Element Management System
EOW C Order Wire

Operation NWD-115476-06E
Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only

6-2 Abbreviations

EPS ETH-Protection Switch HDB High Density Bipolar


EQL Equalizer HK House Keeping
ERP ETH-Ring Protection Switch HP Higher order Path
ES Errored Seconds HYB Hybrid
ETH-CC ETH-Continuity Check function H/W Hardware
ETH-LB ETH-Loopback function ID Identification
ETH-LBM ETH-Loopback Message IDU Indoor Unit
ETH-LBR ETH-Loopback Reply IE Internet Explorer
ETH-LT ETH- Link Trace function IEC International Electrotechnical
ETH-LTM ETH-Link Trace Message Commission

ETH-LTR ETH-Link Trace Reply IEEE Institute of Electrical and


Electronics Engineers
ETH-OAM Ethernet Operations, Administration
and Maintenance I/F Interface

ETH-OAM ETH-OAM Loopback IF Intermediate Frequency


LB IHG iPASOLINK High Grade
ETH-OAM ETH-OAM Link Trace IN Input
LT INTFC Interface
ETH-RDI ETH-Remote Defect Indication I/O Input/Output
function
IP Internet Protocol
ETSI European Telecommunications
ITU International Telecommunication
Standards Institute
Union
EXC Electrical Cross Connect
ITU-R Radio Communication Sector of ITU
E-to-E. End-to-End
ITU-T Telecommunication Sector of ITU
Fail Failure
L2SW Layer2-Switch
F/B Front Back Ratio
LAN Local Area Network
FCS Frame Check Sequence
LB Loopback
FD Frequency Diversity
LBM Loopback Message
FDB Forwarding Database
LCD Loss of Cell Delineation
FE Fast Ethernet
LCT Local Craft Terminal
FEC Forward Error Correction
LDPC Low Density Parity Check
FEBBE Far End Background Block Error
LED Light Emitting Diode
FEES Far End Errored Seconds
Lev. Level
FESES Far End Severely Errored Seconds
LLF Link Loss Forwarding
FEUAS Far End Unavailable Seconds
LM Loss Measurement
FPGA Field Programmable Gate Array
LMM Loss Measurement Message
F/W Firmware
LNA Low Noise Amplifier
GbE, GBE Gigabit Ethernet
LO Local Oscillator
3GPP Third Generation Partnership
LOC Loss of Continuity
Project
LOF Loss of Frame
GUI Graphical User Interface
LOM Loss of Multiframe
H Horizontal
LOP Loss of Pointer

NWD-115476-06E Operation
Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only

Abbreviations 6-3

LO REF Local Reference Signal Loss N/A Not Applicable


LOS Loss of Signal NBI Northbound Interface
LP Lower order Path NE Network Element
LPM Link Performance Monitor NML Network Management Layer
LT Link Trace NMS Network Management System
LTI Loss of incoming Timing Input OAM Operation Administration and
LTM Link Trace Message Maintenance

MAC Media Access Control OCR Occur

MAIN Main Octs Octets

MAINT Maintenance ODU Out-Door Unit

MAX Maximum OFS Out of Frame Second

Mdev Mean Deviation OMT Ortho-Mode Transducer

MDCPU MODEM CPU OPEX Operational expenditure

MDI Medium Dependent Interface OPP Opposite

MDIX Medium Dependent Interface OPR Operation


Crossover OPT Optical
MD4 Message Digest Algorithm 4 OSPF Open Shortest Path First
MD5 Message Digest Algorithm 5 OSS Operation Support System
MEG Maintenance Entity Group OUT Output
MEM Memory OW Oder Wire
MEP MEG End Point PA Power Amplifier
MIN Minimum PBR Pressurizable Type B, flange profile
MIP Maintenance Intermediate Point square Rectangular

MIX Mixer PCP Priority Code Point

MJ Major PDH Plesiochronous Digital Hierarchy

MMC Multi Media Card PDU Protocol Data Unit

MME Mobility Management Entity PDV Packet Delay Variation

MMG Mismerge PGM Program

MN Minor PHY Physical

MOD Modulator PIR Peak Information Rate

MODEM Modulator Demodulator PJE Pointer Justification Event

MON Monitor PJE-N Pointer Justification Event Negative


Stuff
MPX Multiplexer
PJE-P Pointer Justification Event Positive
MS Multiplex Section
Stuff
MSC Mobile Switching Center
PKG Package
MSDU MAC Service Data Unit
Pkts Packets
MSP Multiplex Section Protection
PLM Payload Label Mismatch
MTBF Mean Time Between Failure
PMC PASOLINK Management Card
MTPC Manual Transmitter Power Control
PMON Performance Monitor
MUX Multiplexing Equipment

Operation NWD-115476-06E
Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only

6-4 Abbreviations

PNMSj PASOLINK Network Management SEP Severely Errored Period


System Java Version SES Severely Errored Seconds
PPI PDH PHY Interface SFP Small Form factor Pluggable
ppm parts per million SGMI Security Gateway Management
PPP Point-to-Point Protocol Interface
PPS Path Protection Switch SMS Synchronous Multiplexing System
PQ Priority Queuing SMU Source Measure Unit
PRM Parameter SNCP Sub-network Connection Protection
PROT Protection SNMP Simple Network Management
Protocol
PS Power Supply
SP Strict Priority
PSC Protection Switching Counts
SPD Speed
PSD Protection Switching Duration
SRC Source MAC Address
PTP Precision Time Protocol
STAT Status
PWE Pseudowire Emulation
STD Standard
PWR Power
STM Synchronous Transport Module
QAM Quadrature Amplitude Modulation
STP Spanning Tree Protocol
QoS Quality of Service
SUB Substitute
QPSK Quadrature Phase Shift Keying
SW Switch
RCVR Recover
S/W Software
REF Reference
SWG Switch Group
REM Remote
SYNC Synchronous
RDI Remote Defect Indication
TCI Tag Control Information
RF Radio Frequency
TCN Threshold Crossing Notification
RFS Radio Frequency Systems
TDM Time Division Multiplex
RL Relay
TDMoP TDM over Packet
RMON Remote Network Monitoring
TEMP Temperature
RNC Radio Network Controller
TERM Terminal
RPL Ring Protection Link
TF Transmit Fail
RS Regenerator Section
TIM Trace Identifier Mismatch
RS-232 Recommended Standard 232
TLV Type Length Value
RSL Received Signal Level
TM Through Mode
RST Regenerator Section Termination
TNC Threaded Neil Councilman
RSTP Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol
ToS Type of Service
RX Receiver
TP Twin Path
SAToP Structure-Agnostic Time Division
Multiplexing over Packet TPID Tag Protocol Identifier

SC Service Channel TQC Total Quality Control

SD Space Diversity TTL Time To Live

SDH Synchronous Digital Hierarchy TU Tributary Unit

SEG Segment TX Transmitter

NWD-115476-06E Operation
Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only

Abbreviations 6-5

UAE UAS Event


UAS Unavailable Seconds
UL Upload
UNEQ Unequipped
UNEXP Unexpected
Unicast Unicast Delay Measurement Reply
DMR
UNM Unexpected MEP
UNP Unexpected Period
USB Universal Serial Bus
V Vertical
V Volt
VC Virtual Channel
VLAN Virtual LAN
VP Virtual Path
VPN Virtual Private Network
VSWR Voltage Standing Wave Ratio
WDM Wavelength Division Multiplexing
Web World Wide Web
WG Waveguide
WR Warning
WRR Weighted Round Robin
WS Wayside
WWW World Wide Web
XCTRL XPIC Control
X-DEM XPIC Demodulator
XFP 10(X) Gigabit Small Form Factor
Pluggable
XIF XPIC IF
XPD Cross Polarization Discrimination
Ratio
XPIC Cross Polarization Interference
Canceller
XREF XPIC Reference

Operation NWD-115476-06E
Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only

6-6/END Abbreviations

This page is intentionally left blank.

NWD-115476-06E Operation

S-ar putea să vă placă și